Description
A Business Intelligence (BI) System
TARGIT
User guide
Disclaimer
TARGIT provides this publication “as-is” without warranty of any kind.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of TARGIT
Copyright
The software, which includes information contained in any databases, described in this document is
furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of
the agreement.
It is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in the license agreement.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying or recording, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of TARGIT.
© 2011 TARGIT. All rights reserved, including the right of reproduction in whole or in part, or in any
form.
TARGIT
Aalborgvej 94, 9800 Hjørring
Denmark
Tel: +45 96 23 19 00
Fax: +45 96 23 19 99
Manual Revision: 2K11, SR1
Content i
Contents
TARGIT ................................................................................................................. 1
A Business Intelligence (BI) System ........................................................................ 1
What is a BI System? ............................................................................................ 1
What is a Data Warehouse? ................................................................................... 2
Data warehousing techniques ............................................................................. 3
Relational Data Warehouse ............................................................................. 3
Multidimensional Data Warehouse ................................................................... 3
Overview of this user guide ................................................................................... 3
The Basics ............................................................................................................. 5
Working with TARGIT ............................................................................................ 5
User Levels .......................................................................................................... 5
Starting TARGIT ................................................................................................... 5
TARGIT Main Window ............................................................................................ 6
The Menu ......................................................................................................... 6
The Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 6
The Navigation Bar ............................................................................................ 6
Using the Navigation Bar ................................................................................ 6
Defining the Navigation Bar ............................................................................ 7
The Smartpad................................................................................................... 9
Documents ................................................................................................... 9
Source data ................................................................................................ 11
Properties ................................................................................................... 12
Calculations ................................................................................................ 12
Criteria ....................................................................................................... 12
Drillpad ...................................................................................................... 13
Scheduled Jobs ........................................................................................... 13
The Work area ................................................................................................ 13
Thumbnail Navigator .................................................................................... 13
The Statusbar ................................................................................................. 14
TARGIT Report Main Window................................................................................ 14
TARGIT Report Elements .................................................................................. 14
Bands ........................................................................................................ 14
Components ............................................................................................... 14
Objects ............................................................................................................. 15
Object Explanation .......................................................................................... 15
Analyses and Reports .......................................................................................... 15
Save and Open Analyses and Reports ................................................................ 15
Organizing Analyses and Reports ...................................................................... 16
Tools................................................................................................................. 17
Intelligent Analysis .......................................................................................... 17
Schedule ........................................................................................................ 17
Notifications ................................................................................................... 17
ii TARGIT User Guide
Reporting Services web ................................................................................... 17
Gauge Builder Wizard ...................................................................................... 18
New gauge ................................................................................................. 18
Modify gauge .............................................................................................. 18
Launch TARGIT Desktop ................................................................................. 19
Report templates ............................................................................................ 19
Criteria editor ................................................................................................. 19
Select language .............................................................................................. 19
User Preferences ............................................................................................. 19
Appearance ................................................................................................ 19
Behavior ..................................................................................................... 20
Documents ................................................................................................. 21
Flush Intelligence ............................................................................................ 22
Logging ......................................................................................................... 22
Query logging ............................................................................................. 22
View query log ............................................................................................ 22
Log query results ......................................................................................... 22
Getting help ....................................................................................................... 22
Intelligent Analysis ............................................................................................. 24
The Intelligent Analysis tool ................................................................................. 24
Explanation ................................................................................................. 25
Sample ...................................................................................................... 25
Reentering Intelligent Analysis ...................................................................... 25
Options for creating an Analysis ........................................................................ 26
… grouped by…............................................................................................ 26
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 26
… selected by the following criteria ................................................................ 26
Options for creating a Dashboard ...................................................................... 27
…with the trend over … ................................................................................ 27
…visualized with … ....................................................................................... 27
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 27
… selected by the following criteria: ............................................................... 27
Options for creating a TARGIT Report ................................................................ 28
… showing the fields … ................................................................................. 28
… with the title … ......................................................................................... 28
... using the template ... ............................................................................... 28
… with page numbers ................................................................................... 28
… with the image … ..................................................................................... 28
… with the header … .................................................................................... 28
… with the footer … ...................................................................................... 28
… showing the chart object … for every … ....................................................... 29
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 29
… grouped by …........................................................................................... 29
… showing the top … of … ............................................................................. 29
… showing the bottom … of … ........................................................................ 29
… ordered ascending by … ............................................................................ 30
Content iii
… ordered descending by …........................................................................... 30
… selected by the following criteria … ............................................................. 30
… with grand total ....................................................................................... 30
… with subtotals .......................................................................................... 30
… with a new page for every … ...................................................................... 30
… with an explanation .................................................................................. 30
Options to be notified ...................................................................................... 30
Select measure to monitor ............................................................................ 30
Select Notification trigger ............................................................................. 31
Set delivery method ..................................................................................... 31
Schedule Notification Agent .......................................................................... 31
... for each ... ............................................................................................. 31
... selected by the following criteria ............................................................... 31
Options to schedule ......................................................................................... 31
Select filename and format ........................................................................... 32
Set delivery method ..................................................................................... 32
Set schedule ............................................................................................... 32
Options to create a storyboard.......................................................................... 32
…based on drillpad analyses… ....................................................................... 32
…based on document analyses… .................................................................... 32
Options to search ............................................................................................ 33
Options to search for Sentinels ......................................................................... 33
Options to analyze uploaded data ..................................................................... 33
Options to upload data .................................................................................... 33
Designing Analyses ............................................................................................. 34
Creating a new analysis ....................................................................................... 34
Creating Objects................................................................................................. 34
Creating Objects from the Toolbar ..................................................................... 34
Creating Objects from the menu ....................................................................... 35
Organizing Objects .......................................................................................... 35
Object definition ................................................................................................. 35
Selecting data ................................................................................................ 36
Selecting data for display ................................................................................. 36
Replace measures in objects ............................................................................ 37
Displaying data .................................................................................................. 37
Object types ...................................................................................................... 37
Object type change ......................................................................................... 37
Non-graphical Objects ......................................................................................... 38
Tables ........................................................................................................... 38
Cross tabulations ............................................................................................ 38
Graphical Objects ............................................................................................... 39
Pie charts ....................................................................................................... 40
Bar charts and Horizontal bar charts .................................................................. 41
Line charts ..................................................................................................... 42
Area charts .................................................................................................... 42
Scatter charts ................................................................................................. 42
iv TARGIT User Guide
Bubble charts ................................................................................................. 43
Radar charts ................................................................................................... 43
Maps ............................................................................................................. 44
Globes ........................................................................................................... 44
Scalable maps ................................................................................................ 45
Gauges .......................................................................................................... 45
SQL 2005 KPIs ............................................................................................ 46
Layout Objects ................................................................................................... 46
Blank area .................................................................................................. 47
Text box ..................................................................................................... 47
Explanation box........................................................................................... 47
Image ........................................................................................................ 48
Search Object .................................................................................................... 48
What-If .......................................................................................................... 48
Multi-cube Analyses ............................................................................................ 49
Biggest Opportunities and Problems ...................................................................... 49
Biggest Opportunities ................................................................................... 50
Biggest Problems ......................................................................................... 50
Object functions .................................................................................................. 51
Activating functions ............................................................................................ 51
General functions ............................................................................................... 51
Locking Objects .............................................................................................. 51
Locking all Objects ....................................................................................... 51
Trigger Analysis .............................................................................................. 51
Cut, Copy and Paste ........................................................................................ 52
Duplicate ....................................................................................................... 52
Actions .......................................................................................................... 53
Export table data ............................................................................................ 53
Hyper Relations .............................................................................................. 53
Scheduling ..................................................................................................... 54
Administrating Scheduled Jobs ...................................................................... 56
Sentinels........................................................................................................ 56
Visualize Sentinels ....................................................................................... 58
Scheduling Sentinels .................................................................................... 58
TARGIT Cloud ................................................................................................. 59
Notification Agents .......................................................................................... 59
Condition .................................................................................................... 59
Criteria ....................................................................................................... 60
Schedule .................................................................................................... 60
Delivery ..................................................................................................... 60
Add object Notification Agent ........................................................................ 60
Smiley .............................................................................................................. 60
Height ........................................................................................................... 61
Width ............................................................................................................ 61
Maximize / Restore ......................................................................................... 61
Map locations ................................................................................................. 62
Content v
Globe locations ............................................................................................... 62
Gauge configuration ........................................................................................ 63
Object property – Adding and removing gauges .............................................. 63
Object property – Arranging gauges............................................................... 63
Object property – Hyperrelate ....................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Title ................................................................................. 64
Gauge property – Small gauge ...................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Visualizations .................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Scale ................................................................................ 65
Gauge property – Value................................................................................ 65
Gauge property – Minimum and Maximum span .............................................. 65
Gauge property – Visualization and Rotation ................................................... 65
Gauge property – Adding and removing values................................................ 66
Value property – Selecting source data .......................................................... 66
Value property – Use default gauge span ........................................................ 66
Value property –Value Visualization (for Speedometer gauge type only) ............. 66
Value property –Gauge Intervals (for Icon gauge type only) ............................. 67
Formatting functions ........................................................................................... 67
Auto Agent ..................................................................................................... 67
Show criteria .................................................................................................. 67
Regression ..................................................................................................... 68
Linear correlation ............................................................................................ 68
Show legend .................................................................................................. 68
Vertical axis labels .......................................................................................... 68
Show labels .................................................................................................... 69
Show axis titles .............................................................................................. 69
3D chart ........................................................................................................ 69
Cylindrical ...................................................................................................... 69
Gradient rendering .......................................................................................... 70
Multi series .................................................................................................... 70
Globe projection ............................................................................................. 70
Average crosshair ........................................................................................... 70
Align ............................................................................................................. 71
Formatting options .......................................................................................... 71
Title and explanation .................................................................................... 71
Chart properties .......................................................................................... 71
Map ........................................................................................................... 72
Scalable map .............................................................................................. 72
Cross tabulation .......................................................................................... 73
Visibility ..................................................................................................... 73
Labels and hints .......................................................................................... 73
Numbers .................................................................................................... 74
Dynamic captions ........................................................................................ 76
Element colors ............................................................................................ 77
Intelligent Agents ............................................................................................ 77
Color and Gauge Agents ............................................................................... 77
vi TARGIT User Guide
Visibility Agents ........................................................................................... 79
Format table functions ........................................................................................ 79
Sorting and ordering ....................................................................................... 80
Custom order .............................................................................................. 80
Format row style ............................................................................................. 80
Measures Down .............................................................................................. 81
Word wrap ......................................................................................................... 81
Hierarchical collation ....................................................................................... 81
Compact hierarchies ........................................................................................ 81
Indent hierarchies ........................................................................................... 82
Grand totals ................................................................................................... 82
Subtotals ....................................................................................................... 82
Remove custom order...................................................................................... 82
Ignore custom order ........................................................................................ 82
Row totals after members ................................................................................ 83
Text row ........................................................................................................ 83
Column totals after members ........................................................................... 83
Multidimensional subtotal columns .................................................................... 83
Multidimensional subtotal rows ......................................................................... 84
Calculations functions ......................................................................................... 84
Smart calculations........................................................................................... 84
Add calculation ............................................................................................ 84
Modify a calculation ..................................................................................... 85
Advanced Calculations Editor ............................................................................ 85
Syntax description ....................................................................................... 86
Referencing columns, rows and data .............................................................. 86
Top list .......................................................................................................... 87
Top percentage (Pareto analysis) ................................................................... 88
Criteria ................................................................................................................ 89
Global criteria .................................................................................................... 89
Basic Global criteria ......................................................................................... 89
Free text filtering ......................................................................................... 90
Auto-filter Criteria bar .................................................................................. 90
Stored criteria selector ................................................................................. 90
Measure selector ......................................................................................... 91
Dynamic periods .......................................................................................... 91
Ignore initial criteria .................................................................................... 91
Criteria tab ..................................................................................................... 92
Criteria editor ................................................................................................. 92
Adding criteria............................................................................................. 93
Stored criteria ............................................................................................. 94
Dynamic Periods .......................................................................................... 95
Timeslider object ............................................................................................ 96
Play ........................................................................................................... 97
Global criteria via Trigger Analyses .................................................................... 97
Global criteria via Magic Drops .......................................................................... 97
Content vii
Global criteria via Hyper Relations ..................................................................... 97
Local criteria ...................................................................................................... 97
Drilling .............................................................................................................. 98
Hierarchies ....................................................................................................100
Stopping drills ...............................................................................................101
Drill through ..................................................................................................102
Drillpad ............................................................................................................102
Criteria priority..................................................................................................102
Comparisons .....................................................................................................102
Add Comparisons ...........................................................................................103
Comparison Elements .................................................................................103
Storing a comparison ..................................................................................104
Drag-Drop Comparisons ..................................................................................105
Storyboards ...................................................................................................... 106
What are Storyboards? .......................................................................................106
Designing Storyboards .......................................................................................106
Use Intelligent Analysis ...................................................................................106
Import from the Drillpad .................................................................................106
Add snapshots to the clipboard ........................................................................107
Edit Storyboard .............................................................................................107
Forecasting ....................................................................................................... 109
What is Forecasting? ..........................................................................................109
Using Forecasting ..............................................................................................109
Designing TARGIT Reports ................................................................................ 110
Creating a new report ........................................................................................110
Bands ..............................................................................................................110
Band Types ...................................................................................................110
Page Header ..............................................................................................111
Title ..........................................................................................................111
Column Header ..........................................................................................111
Group Header ............................................................................................111
Detail ........................................................................................................112
Crosstab ....................................................................................................112
Crosstab Header .........................................................................................112
Crosstab Footer ..........................................................................................112
Group Footer .............................................................................................112
Summary ..................................................................................................112
Page Footer ...............................................................................................112
Insert Band ...................................................................................................113
Select Band ...................................................................................................113
Resize Band ..................................................................................................113
Delete Band ..................................................................................................114
Band Properties .............................................................................................114
Background color ........................................................................................114
Align to bottom of page ...............................................................................114
Force new page ..........................................................................................114
viii TARGIT User Guide
Force new column.......................................................................................114
Reprint on new page ...................................................................................115
Prevent orphans .........................................................................................115
Page break before ......................................................................................115
Font ..........................................................................................................115
Use parent font ..........................................................................................116
Style .........................................................................................................116
Text color ..................................................................................................116
Borders .....................................................................................................116
Order by ....................................................................................................116
Sorting ......................................................................................................117
Dimension order .........................................................................................117
Top list / Bottom list ...................................................................................117
Components .....................................................................................................117
Insert Component .......................................................................................118
Select Component ......................................................................................118
Resize Component ......................................................................................118
Delete Component ......................................................................................118
Data Fields ....................................................................................................118
Format numbers .........................................................................................119
Text .............................................................................................................119
Text ..........................................................................................................120
System Variable .............................................................................................120
Variable.....................................................................................................120
Leading Text ..............................................................................................120
Memo ...........................................................................................................120
Edit Text ...................................................................................................120
Criteria Box ...................................................................................................121
Shape ...........................................................................................................121
Shape type ................................................................................................121
Line ..........................................................................................................121
Line Color ..................................................................................................121
Fill ............................................................................................................121
Fill Color ....................................................................................................122
Image ..........................................................................................................122
Load Image ...............................................................................................122
Zoom to actual size ....................................................................................122
Zoom to fit ................................................................................................122
Analysis Object ..............................................................................................122
Load object ................................................................................................123
Background color ........................................................................................123
Analysis Crosstab ...........................................................................................123
Common Properties ...........................................................................................123
Position and size ............................................................................................124
Position .....................................................................................................124
Size ..........................................................................................................124
Content ix
Cut, Copy and Paste .......................................................................................124
Border ..........................................................................................................124
Format dynamic captions ....................................................................................125
Align ............................................................................................................125
Align Left/Top/Bottom/Right ........................................................................125
Align Vertical Center ...................................................................................125
Align in band .................................................................................................125
Align Left/Top/Bottom/Right in band .............................................................125
Align Vertical/Horizontal Center in band ........................................................126
Space Equally Vertical/Horizontal..................................................................126
Send to back ..............................................................................................126
Bring to front .............................................................................................126
Text Properties ..................................................................................................127
Background color ........................................................................................127
Text alignment ...........................................................................................127
Transparent ...............................................................................................127
Automatic Sizing ........................................................................................127
Font ..........................................................................................................128
Style .........................................................................................................128
Text color ..................................................................................................128
Page Setup .......................................................................................................128
Ruler ............................................................................................................128
Title .............................................................................................................129
Border ..........................................................................................................129
Paper size .....................................................................................................129
Format ......................................................................................................129
Orientation ................................................................................................129
Size ..........................................................................................................129
Units .........................................................................................................130
Margins ........................................................................................................130
Columns .......................................................................................................130
Character set.................................................................................................130
Font .............................................................................................................130
Defining a Report Collection ................................................................................130
Adding Reports to a Collection ......................................................................131
Preview TARGIT Reports ................................................................................... 132
Preview the report .............................................................................................132
Zoom ...............................................................................................................132
Navigation ........................................................................................................132
Printing, Exporting and Sending ....................................................................... 133
Printing Analyses and Reports .............................................................................133
Printer setup ..............................................................................................133
Printing Analyses ........................................................................................133
Printing Objects ..........................................................................................133
Printing TARGIT Reports ..............................................................................133
Export analysis ..................................................................................................133
x TARGIT User Guide
Image file .....................................................................................................134
Email ............................................................................................................134
Microsoft PowerPoint ......................................................................................134
Exporting Reports ..............................................................................................135
Exporting TARGIT Reports ...............................................................................135
PDF ..........................................................................................................135
HTML ........................................................................................................135
RTF (Rich Text File) ....................................................................................135
Exporting table data ..........................................................................................135
Microsoft Office Excel ..................................................................................136
Text File ....................................................................................................136
XML ..........................................................................................................136
Sending Analyses and Reports ............................................................................136
TARGIT Desktop ................................................................................................ 138
Installing Desktop..............................................................................................138
Desktop interface ..............................................................................................138
Adding objects to Desktop ...............................................................................139
Adding shared objects to Desktop .................................................................140
Desktop preferences ..........................................................................................140
Appendix A: Keyboard shortcuts ....................................................................... 142
Primary controls ................................................................................................142
Graphical Objects ..............................................................................................142
Non-graphical Objects ........................................................................................143
Report design mode ...........................................................................................144
Appendix B: Formula syntax ............................................................................. 145
Arithmetic operators ..........................................................................................145
Boolean operators .............................................................................................145
Other operators .................................................................................................145
Aggregation functions ........................................................................................146
Element sets .....................................................................................................146
Measure references............................................................................................147
Element references ............................................................................................147
Element reference scope modifiers ......................................................................149
Template metadata ............................................................................................150
Appendix C: Glossary ........................................................................................ 152
TARGIT 1
TARGIT
A Business Intelligence (BI) System
This software package is developed for Business Intelligence and Business Analytics.
Several key benefits of Business Intelligence software:
Improves decision-making at all organizational levels
A better rate of return on investment in systems, such as ERP, SCM and CRM
Better customer retention and satisfaction
Quicker response to sudden changes in market
More successful and efficient products and services
Performance monitoring
Gives your offices consistent information and statistics
Allows employees to use their time more efficiently
The goal of this software is both ambitious and simple: To make use of unique technology to provide
the best possible conditions for making the right decisions using as few clicks as possible.
Key competitive advantages of the TARGIT:
The best user-friendly technology on the market (designed for non-technical users)
Dashboards, Analyses and Reports with fewer clicks than ever before
Flexible and efficient
Needs much less consulting and implementation support than other reporting tools
Set up is easy and fast to deploy (typically you are up and running within five working days)
Scalable for future growth of both data and users
The software is affordable and the overall cost of ownership is low
TARGIT is a complete software tool kit covering all the Business Intelligence tools you may
need
This software and the context in which it is used, is unique. The program suite, called TARGIT, brings
data to life making it easy to use as a strategic management tool.
What is a BI System?
Having the best and most expensive computer systems on the market is not enough when you cannot
use the stored information in a fast and efficient manner to help you in your daily decisions.
2 TARGIT User Guide
Business Intelligence allows companies to centralize data for easy and fast analysis - thereby
providing the opportunity to make better business decisions by intelligently using corporate
information.
By means of Business Intelligence software, managers and key personnel can analyze all crucial
information right at their own desktop or via the Internet without affecting the original data sources.
Business Intelligence software has become vital to the survival of each and every successful business
because it is capable of fulfilling all needs in terms of
Analyzing data
Monitoring data
Sharing data
Reporting data
A computer based BI System is designed to generate information in a user-friendly way. This offers
decision-makers with limited knowledge of computers the ability to specify their own analysis. Good
Business Intelligence Systems offer tools to apply any imaginable delimitation to data before
displaying them in comprehensible forms, thereby helping identification of possible problem areas.
With a BI System it is possible to analyze many factors, both internal and external, which may affect
the corporation. The only requirement is that there is relevant data to analyze. The foundation of a
Business Intelligence System is therefore the ability to periodically extract data from several sources
(databases) into one analysis database usually referred to as the Data Warehouse.
It is not just a question of displaying data after extraction but also being able to apply delimitations in
form of Drill downs to the data and thereafter visualize the results in comprehensible forms. Drill
downs may also be used for evaluation of possible solutions to problems. One way to put focus on
problem areas is by applying specific colors to data when it has a certain value. Data about a product
with low sales could for instance be colored red.
The major design goal of Business Intelligence Systems is to create better foundations on which to
make decisions both strategic and administrative which have to be made within a corporation.
Organizations that effectively use Business Intelligence to manage and impact decision-making will
have the greatest competitive advantage.
What is a Data Warehouse?
Data Warehousing is all about centralizing data from possibly different systems. Having data from
different systems makes it possible to analyze data across those systems.
Data Warehouse is often defined as a collection of data in support of management and employees
decision-making processes. A Data Warehouse solution should ensure consistent and cleansed
information at all levels.
TARGIT 3
A Data Warehouse can be viewed upon as a periodical intelligent extract of relevant data from a
corporation's enterprise wide operational databases. Before being used for analysis, data should be
optimized for fast access facilitating speedy analysis. Other reasons for extracting data into a separate
analysis database (Data Warehouse) is to make sure that data remains static during the analysis
phase, and secure that the analysis itself does not affect data integrity at the information sources.
In other words, a Data Warehouse is a database designed specifically to meet the needs of decision-
makers and their use of Business Intelligence Systems such as TARGIT.
Data warehousing techniques
There are two basic ways of organizing Data Warehouse data. TARGIT supports both, and they are
briefly described in the following.
Relational Data Warehouse
The relational data model represents the classic approach to database design. Most operational
systems in use in businesses today are based on this principle - ERP systems included. Traditionally,
this approach has therefore also been applied to Data Warehousing databases.
Multidimensional Data Warehouse
Multidimensional databases are based on the need to build databases for high performance analysis
on large amounts of data. The basic principle is to sum up data in the database ensuring a higher
level of readiness for the queries from the programs using the data for building analytical reports.
TARGIT supports several different database platforms for implementing multidimensional Data
Warehouses.
Overview of this user guide
TARGIT provides plenty of functionality, which is centered around the three main functions: analyzing,
reporting and exporting. This user's guide covers all the details of these functions and gives you all
the information needed to analyze and display your data in fewest clicks.
The following list sums up the contents of the individual sections in this guide. Click on a heading to
navigate to the section.
• The Basics
This section describes how to start TARGIT and the fundamental concepts in the user interface.
• Intelligent Analysis
The Intelligent Analysis tool is used to create analyses fast and intuitively with few clicks. This
section describes the options in this tool.
• Designing Analyses
4 TARGIT User Guide
Analyses consist of objects. Objects come in many types and may be created in many ways.
This section explains how to create objects and the differences among object types.
• Object functions
This section explains the wide range of options for objects.
• Criteria
To gain control of which data is displayed, criteria may be applied to objects, analyses and
reports. This section explains how criteria may be applied and to which objects.
• Storyboards
Storyboards are dynamic snapshots of data. This section explains how storyboards may be
created and distributed.
• Forecasting
Forecasting is a way of predicting future data based on historical data. This section describes
when and how forecasting may be applied.
• Designing TARGIT Reports
This section first describes how TARGIT Reports are created, then the different band and
component types are described.
• Preview TARGIT Reports
This section explains the navigation options when previewing the report.
• Printing, Exporting and Sending
Analyses and reports may be printed or exported in various formats. This section explains how
to print and export and which formats are available.
• TARGIT Desktop
Objects may be presented as a part of the Windows Desktop for real time data awareness.
This section explains how to install, use and configure the TARGIT Desktop.
• Keyboard shortcuts
Helpful shortcuts to main functions are listed in this section.
• Formula syntax
Advanced calculations uses a special syntax for referencing elements and measures. This
syntax and other operators are listed in this section.
The Basics 5
The Basics
Working with TARGIT
This application is designed to help analyze and visualize corporate data from the Data Warehouse. To
achieve this, it offers tools to apply any imaginable delimitation to data before display in
comprehensible graphical forms. This will help to identify possible problem areas, but of course also
recognizing factors causing good results.
In many situations it is necessary to print out important information from a Data Warehouse system
in a standard paper report. TARGIT Report, imbedded in TARGIT, provides a flexible and intuitive
reporting tool that meets all needs for high quality customizable reports. In addition, all data
displayed in TARGIT may be exported to folders or via e-mail in several output formats to meet all
needs.
User Levels
TARGIT users can have different levels of access to the application functions. Normal users have
access to the majority of functions, but some of the more advanced functions are restricted to other
types of users. Functions that are available only to users of other types than Normal will be marked
accordingly.
Starting TARGIT
The application is started by double clicking the TARGIT icon on the Windows desktop or selecting it
from the Windows 'Start Programs' menu. This brings up the logon screen where the desired TARGIT
Server may be entered or selected in a drop-list. Depending on the security system of the desired
server, the user has several options to log on. If the desired TARGIT Server uses standard
authentication, a valid Username and Password must be entered in the edit fields followed by a click
on the key button to start the logon procedure.
If the desired TARGIT Server uses Windows authentication, the 'Use Windows Authentication'
checkbox must be checked. If the user?s PC is part of the same domain as the TARGIT Server, just
click the key button to start logon procedures. If the TARGIT Server is on a different domain than the
user, a click in the 'Specify credentials' checkbox, allows the user also to enter the name of the
domain of the desired TARGIT Server and valid Windows user name and password, before clicking the
key icon to start the logon procedure.
6 TARGIT User Guide
TARGIT Main Window
The main window consists of five elements: 1. the Menu just beneath the program title bar, 2. the
Toolbar beneath the Menu, and under this, 3. the Smartpad to the left and 4. the Work area to the
right. At the bottom: 5. the Statusbar.
The Menu
The menu contains buttons for easy access to all application functions and settings. The menu may be
hidden to enlarge the size of the work area. This can be done either by clicking View | Menubar or
pressing F10.
The Toolbar
The Toolbar contains buttons for activating the primary functions of the application. The four buttons
at the left of the Toolbar represent standard functions such as: New, Open, Save and Print. The
remaining buttons may vary and represent functions for creating Objects and Reports and working
with them. The Toolbar may be hidden to enlarge the size of the Work area. Next to some of the
buttons there is a small down-arrow button which will open submenus that enable users to select
other function types within the same category.
The Navigation Bar
The purpose of the Navigation Bar is to give all users a dynamic and context sensitive navigation tool.
It is placed between the toolbar and the criteria bar and its content may be defined by users with both
Windows and report developer user rights and may be used by users with all user rights. The
Navigation bar consist of a collection of interlinked menus each of which contains a number of
buttons. Each of the buttons may be used to open a document, an URL or simply display an image or
some text.
Using the Navigation Bar
When a developer has defined a Navigation bar with menus and buttons, users will see a start menu
in the Navigation Bar when logging in. The start menu as well as other menus contain buttons that
may have three purposes: Information, opening a document and/or opening another menu in the
Navigation Bar. The typical use of buttons is triggering of documents either with or without criteria of
the currently opened document depending on how the button was defined or as navigational buttons
to open other menus (e.g. back/forward buttons). If a button triggers a document and opens another
menu, that menu is also opened if the same document is opened from Smartpad Documents or
somewhere else within the client while the button is displayed in the Navigation Bar, such that the
navigational context is retained no matter where the document was opened from. Right-clicking the
Navigation Bar opens a menu with options to go back to the previous menu, the start menu or hide
the Navigation Bar.
The Basics 7
If there is not enough space for the buttons in a menu it is divided into several pages and an arrow is
displayed on the right border to go to the next page.
Note: The Navigation bar may be hidden from the View menu or by pressing Alt + F6.
Defining the Navigation Bar
The Navigation Bar may be defined by opening the Navigation Bar dialog from 'Tools | Navigation Bar'
or by right-clicking the Navigation Bar and select Properties. The dialog consists of a button bar in the
top, a menu structure to the left and a settings area where the settings of the selected button or
menu may be changed.
Defining menus
The left side of the Navigation Bar dialog displays a tree structure with the Navigation Bar element at
the top followed by menu items. Selecting the Navigation bar displays height and margin settings that
applies to all menus and buttons in the Navigation Bar. The start menu may also be set and
determines the menu to open when users log on to the client. The start menu setting may also be set
by right-clicking a menu and enable the 'Use as start menu' item.
Selecting a menu in the tree structure displays a name text field and a button spacing selector. The
button space is set for all buttons in the selected menu.
A new menu may be created by right-clicking an item in the tree structure and select 'New menu' or
'Duplicate menu' if an existing menu should be duplicated with all content and settings. A convenient
way to create interlinked menus is to right-click a button in a menu and select 'New submenu' which
adds a new menu to the navigation bar and automatically creates a submenu link from the selected
button to the menu - whenever the button is clicked the submenu is opened. A menu may be removed
using the right-click menu.
Defining buttons
When a menu is selected in the tree structure, buttons may be added to the button bar on top of the
menu and settings areas. By default new menus contain one button. New buttons are created by
right-clicking the button bar and selecting 'New button' or right-clicking a button and selecting
'Duplicate button' to copy an existing button including settings. It is also possible to cut/copy/paste
buttons or copy/paste button styling from the right-click menu. When styling is copied only the
settings from the three tabs; Style, Hover and Selected are copied to another button. Buttons may be
organized on the button bar by using drag and drop movements or by right-clicking an object and use
the 'Move button left/right' options. A new button may also be added by dragging a document from
Smartpad Documents to the Navigation Bar. The new button obtains the same properties as the
button to the left of where the document was dropped. Note that the Navigation Bar is divided into
several pages if there is not enough space for the buttons. Switching page is done by using the arrow
in the right side of the menu.
Left-clicking a button selects it and the button is highlighted. The settings area contains five tabs that
may be used to format the selected button:
8 TARGIT User Guide
Button
The button may be given a title that appears on the button. The entered text may include codes that
refer to document name ($d), path ($p) and trigger URL ($u). The same codes may also be used in
the hint text box. The codes may be displayed in the dialog by clicking the information icon. Both title
and hint may be translated by clicking the globe icon and enter text in the translation dialog.
By default no icon is displayed on a button, but three icon options are available in the image selector;
Document, displays a small document image as used in the Smartpad. Thumbnail, displays the
thumbnail of the selected trigger analysis in the Action tab. The Custom option makes it possible to
select an image from the list of available images. New images may be added by clicking the 'Add'
button and select the image. For each image option the image placement and spacing between text
and image inside the button may be set. The height of the image may also be set for the thumbnail
and custom options - the height is limited by the height of the Navigation Bar and margins.
Note that images may be managed by right-clicking a menu or the Navigation Bar to the left and
selecting 'Manage images'. The settings area changes to a list of currently added images with
information about format and size. For each image a number may be displayed in parenthesis to
display how many buttons the image is used in. Buttons may be added, replaced or removed using
the options in the bottom in the dialog.
The button width is automatically set to fit the contents. The width may also be set to a fixed number
of pixels or to fill the empty space in the Navigation Bar.
Action
In the Action tab a trigger may be defined. The trigger is similar to the trigger that may be set for
objects in an analysis. Clicking the 'Add trigger' link opens a dialog with two options; 'Document'
displays the list of documents equal to the Documents tab in the Smartpad. The appropriate document
must be selected and if the option 'Include criteria when triggering' is checked the activated document
is assigned global criteria of the document that was open when the button was clicked in the
Navigation Bar. The second option is to trigger an URL. This is done by entering an URL in the text
field. Activation of the URL is done similar to activation of a document - when clicking an element in
the object with the trigger, the URL is opened in a new browser window. A selected trigger may be
removed again by clicking the cross next to the trigger.
The Submenu option makes it possible to open another menu in the Navigation Bar when the button is
clicked. All other menus than the currently selected are available. Options to go to the previous menu
or the start menu are also available in the submenu drop down.
Style
In the Style tab the button text font may be set. Clicking the font opens a new dialog where all of the
fonts installed on the system may be selected. Other options such as font size, color and style may
also be selected and in the bottom of the dialog an example text box shows the formatting of the
current selections. In the right side of the dialog all recently used fonts across the application are
displayed. Note that checking the 'Use default font' checkbox overrides the selected font and size.
The Basics 9
The button background is by default set to none (transparent) and may be formatted in three ways:
As a solid color, as a gradient with from and to colors and a left-to-right or top-to-bottom direction or
as an image with four fill options. Repeat - repeats the image across the button as many times as
space allows, Stretch - stretches the image to fill the whole button without regard for dimension
change, Fit - resizes the image to fit either height or width and keeps the dimensions, Actual size -
inserts the image in the center with its actual size.
Button borders may have either rectangular shape or rounded rectangle shape. Both shapes have a
color option and the rounded rectangle shape also has a corner radius option to specify how rounded
the corners should be.
Hover
The Hover tab contains the same options as the Style tab, but each of the Font, Background and
Border settings contain an override option that must be checked to override the values of the Style
tab, when a button is hovered.
Selected
The Selected tab contains the same options as the Style tab, but each of the Font, Background and
Border settings contain an override option that must be checked to override the values of the Style
tab, when a button is selected.
Note: Sometimes a developer may edit a menu where a button triggers a document that the
developer does not have access to (e.g because of roles). In this case the button is displayed with an
orange information icon and the same icon is displayed next to the trigger document in the Action tab.
In the Navigation Bar this button is hidden for users that don't have access to the document.
The Smartpad
The Smartpad covers the left fourth of the main window. The Smartpad has seven tabs: Documents,
Source data, Properties, Calculations, Criteria, Drillpad and Scheduled Jobs. These tabs are used in a
wide variety of the functions and will therefore be described along with the functions in the following
sections. The Smartpad may be hidden by pressing F4 to enlarge the size of the work area. The
Smartpad may also be hidden by double clicking the right frame line that separates the Smartpad
from the analysis objects. Note that in some situations the tabs may have several pages. When
browsing these pages it is always possible to go back to the first page by clicking the Smartpad tab.
The basic functionality offered by the mentioned tabs is:
Documents
The Documents tab contains four sections; Favorites, Shared, Personal, Recent.
The Favorites section contains user defined links to documents ie. a document can only be removed
from the Favorites section and not deleted - Favorites may be seen as shortcuts to popular
documents. Since a Favorites document is only a link, copying or cutting it will in both cases make a
copy of the original document if it is pasted into another folder than the Favorites. If it is copied or cut
and pasted within the Favorites folder, the links are copied and cut in the usual copy/cut manner. A
10 TARGIT User Guide
document may be added to Favorites from each of the other three sections by dragging it directly to
Favorites or right-clicking a Document and selecting 'Document | Add to favorites'. This opens a new
dialog where the placement of the document may be selected and new folders may be created. A third
option is to add a currently open document to the Favorites root by clicking the Favorites icon in the
toolbar. To remove a document from Favorites right-click it and select 'Remove from favorites'. Note
that if the source document a Favorites document is linked to is deleted, the explanation icon of the
Favorites document changes color to orange to indicate a broken link. The right-click menu items that
require the source document are also disabled.
The shared section contains documents that are available to all users. Only users with developer
rights may save documents and create folders in this section.
The Personal section contains documents that are only available to the logged in user.
The Recent section contains a chronological list of documents that have recently been opened. The list
may be cleared by right-clicking and select 'List | Clear'.
Moving or copying documents may also be done by dragging them. Dragging documents between the
Shared and Personal sections causes the documents to be cut and pasted while dragging to or from
the Recent or Favorites sections causes documents to be copied and pasted. A document may also be
copy-pasted between the Shared and Personal folders by pressing 'Ctrl' while dragging the document.
When dragging a document, the cursor actively displays what action will be performed if the document
is dropped in the hovered placement.
In each section a right-click menu is available with general options to Open, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete
and Rename (note that not all options are available in each section). An explanation dialog may also
be opened with a thumbnail preview of the document and information on the elements and criteria in
the document. The time of the last modification and the user name of the user who modified it are
stamped in the bottom of the dialog. The dialog may also be opened by clicking the icon next to each
document in the Smartpad. Note that the thumbnail image and user stamp is not be displayed until
the document is saved if upgrading from older versions of TARGIT, where document explanations are
not available. Also note that clicking the thumbnail opens the document.
When a document is right-clicked a document submenu is available with options to add the document
to favorites (only other sections than Favorites), Schedule the document for export and enable the
document to load on startup.
An Open submenu is also available. It contains three options; 'Open' - opens the document as it was
saved. E.g. if an analysis is saved in define mode it is opened in the new 'without data' mode and if it
was saved with data loaded in two out three objects it is opened in the same state. This is the same
as clicking the document. 'Open with data' - opens the document with all data loaded, no matter if
some objects or the whole document were in define mode when saved. 'Open without data' - opens
the document without data. For reports and report collections this means a thumbnail preview with an
option to load data. For analyses the objects are visualized as a shaded version of the object type and
without data. This option is convenient if changes must be made before load intensive data are
loaded. Note that the last two open options are not available for Storyboards.
The Basics 11
Each section also contain a List submenu in the right-click menu with options to Refresh or Clear the
list. The name of the folders and documents may be changed by selecting `Use translations´ from the
List submenu. This will toggle between the file system names of the folders and analyses and the
names translated in TARGIT Management Studio. The translations are shown in the language selected
from the Tools menu. Each section, except the Recent list, has the options 'Folders first' and 'Sort by
type'. These options are also available from the dialog opened by clicking the Properties menu item.
For more information on these and other document properties see the User Preferences section.
Searching Documents
In the bottom of the Documents tab a search field is available. The search field is always available no
matter which section or folder the user has navigated to and the search field will always search for
documents throughout the Documents tab. The search operators supported are the same as for the
criteria editor with the exception that A B is searched as A & B (and) instead of A | B (or).
The search string entered is used to search through all the document properties that are used in the
search algorithm. The properties are listed according to a precedence order where document
filenames and descriptions are ranked highest, then data fields (e.g. measures and dimensions) and
at last user generated text (e.g. custom titles and explanations) and criteria data. Search results are
ranked according to this precedence. E.g. if the search string is 'Revenue', all documents with
'Revenue' in the translated filename are displayed at the top. If there are more than one document
with 'Revenue' in the translated filename, these documents are listed according to how many search
string occurrences they have across all the search properties. If this number is also the same, they
are listed alphabetically.
Notice that it may take some time before newly created/changed documents are included in the
search since the indexing of the documents takes time.
Source data
This tab is used to select data from the Data Warehouse. The path at the top is used to select a cube
from a data source and browse all connected cubes. The area below contains the dimensions and
measures for the selected cube available to be used for creating analyses or reports. In case of
designing a report, the bottom of this tab has buttons for adding text and graphical components to the
report.
Right-clicking in the Source data tab brings up a menu with options to add measures and dimensions
to the active analysis or dimensions to the criteria bar. Another options is 'TARGIT this'. It makes a
hyperrelation based on the clicked dimension or measure.
'Show explanation' opens a small box with information about the clicked data element. This includes
name, description and the location of the element, the approximate member count for dimensions
(Forced/initial criteria not taken into account and all members included as this number is obtained
directly from the cube), Dynamic time status for period dimensions. For cubes the explanation
includes name, description and location of the cube and the number of dimensions, hierarchies,
measures and KPI's contained in the cube (these numbers are only displayed when a cube has been
12 TARGIT User Guide
selected and is right-clicked from the source data path in the top of the tab). The last processing time
is also stamped into the box.
'Search for documents' opens the Documents tab and displays all documents containing the clicked
cube/measure/dimension. In the bottom of the right-click menu the List menu item contains three
subitems for sorting the Source data content; 'Display folders first' which displays folders before any
measures or dimensions in the cube, 'Sort by type' sorts folders, measures and dimensions according
to type, 'Group by type' groups dimensions and measures by separating them in the Source data tab.
Note that at all times when data may be added to the work area, data elements are colored blue. E.g.
when switching to a cube that has not been used in the analysis all data are colored black. The same
applies for search results. When doing multi cube search only data from the same cube as the
selected object are colored blue and may be added to the object.
Searching Source data
In the bottom of the Source data tab a search field is available to search for data elements. When a
cube is selected a search string may be entered and when clicking the search icon a list of data
elements containing the search string is displayed. To search across cubes, the multi cube icon must
be clicked and the search is redone across all available cubes. Note that multi cube search is default
and cannot be changed when placed in the Source data root.
Single cube search results are sorted in alphabetical order and multi cube search sorted in cube order
and within each cube in alphabetical order. If search results can be added to the selected object they
are colored blue and may be clicked to add them to the object. The containing cube name is also
displayed underneath each search result in grey and may be clicked to navigate to the cube. The
right-click menu is also available for search results.
The search function in Source data supports the same operators as the search function in the
Documents tab.
Properties
Contain the primary functions and settings, including type specification, formatting and Intelligent
Agents, for the active Object and in case of designing a report, for the active item.
Calculations
Contains a 'Smart calculations' dialog for the active Object making it easy to add or edit predefined
calculations. In the bottom of the tab is a button giving access to the Advanced Calculations editor.
This tab is not used when working with Reports.
Criteria
The Criteria tab provides options for defining Global and Local criteria as well as defining Comparisons.
A criterion, whether that is Global, Local or a Comparison element, is defined by selected dimension
values from one dimension. The selection of values is furthermore defined by the selection operator,
The Basics 13
e.g. 'equal to', 'different from', 'less than' etc. Use the 'Disable/Enable immediate refresh' toggle to
stop the objects from refreshing every time a criterion is added or changed – this is especially useful
when working with large or complex data structures with long query response times.
Drillpad
The „Drillpad? tab will automatically log whenever criteria, Global or 'Drill down' criteria, are changed
for the active Analysis. Changes in Global criteria are logged for Reports. The log will be displayed as a
list of nested criteria in a chronological sequence. Any of the logged entries in this list can be clicked
to bring the user back to the exact state of the Analysis or the Report according to the selected
'Drillpad' entry. Back and Forward buttons are available to traverse the „Drillpad? one step at a time.
Scheduled Jobs
The „Scheduled Jobs? tab provides options to edit existing scheduled jobs i.e. reports and storyboards.
When this tab is open the Work area will display a list of all active scheduled jobs and selecting one by
a click will present its data in the Smartpad Scheduled Jobs ready to inspect and edit.
The Work area
The Work area is the part of the window where the actual work is done. All Analyses, Reports and the
Intelligent Analysis wizard are placed in the work area.
Thumbnail Navigator
The Thumbnail Navigator is an animated navigator placed below the Intelligent Analysis tool on the
front page. The Navigator displays thumbnails of all documents in the Documents Favorites by default.
Switching between documents is done by clicking on documents to the left or right of the centered
document or by sliding the mouse wheel. Clicking on the centered document opens it. The centered
document also displays an information box where the document explanation may be opened by
clicking the information 'i' or the document icon. The information box also contains the name of the
document and the folder it is placed in. Above the thumbnails the path of the displayed documents is
shown. The Thumbnail Navigator may also display documents in the Recent section. The section to
display may be changed in User Preferences.
User Preferences
Note: If upgrading from versions that don't have thumbnails a generic thumbnail is displayed instead
of a document preview until the document is saved. Each time a document is saved the thumbnail is
updated.
14 TARGIT User Guide
The Statusbar
The Statusbar shows information about the current status of the tasks being performed by TARGIT.
This information is shown in the left side of the bar. The Statusbar may be hidden to enlarge the size
of the work area.
TARGIT Report Main Window
The TARGIT Report Main Window when manually designing Reports consists of five elements: Menu,
Toolbar, Smartpad, Work area and Statusbar.
TARGIT Report Elements
This section gives an overview of the different elements of a TARGIT Report. The actual use and
functionality of the elements are covered elsewhere.
Bands
A TARGIT Report consists of a number of bands running across the paper. A band is a rectangular
portion of the report area, covering the total width of the report (except when creating multi-column
reports). When the report is processed for output each band will be repeated a certain number of
times given by the context. In the bands various items can be placed to make up the actual contents
of the report. The purpose of having bands is to be able to group the information and determine how
often each band is repeated.
Components
TARGIT Report offers a series of components to be used in the report. The Components holds the
definitions of the actual contents of reports and components are placed inside bands.
Data Fields
The most important part of TARGIT Report is of course the possibility to present (dynamic)
information from the data warehouse. This is accomplished in TARGIT Report by giving access to the
measures and dimensions defined in either a relational data model or the multi-dimensional cube. The
list of available measures and dimensions is kept in the Smartpad and by drag/drop they can be
placed on the report.
Text Components
The Text Components makes it possible to place static or semi-dynamic text on a report. Some Text
Components will hold a text that will never change during or between executions of the report, while
other types of components will change either during the execution (e.g. page number) or between
executions (e.g. date and time).
The Basics 15
Graphical Components
The Graphical Components could be used to insert images or simple drawings. It also includes the
possibility to place TARGIT objects or whole Analyses in the report.
Objects
Objects are basically windows within the TARGIT Work area that display data. An Object can show
data in many ways, for instance as a pie chart or a table. Within each Object window it is possible to
influence which data is displayed and how it is displayed. Objects can be used on their own or more
likely for composing Analyses consisting of one or more Objects.
Object Explanation
Menu: Object | Object | Explanation Keyboard: CTRL+I
A very important concept of TARGIT is the ability to perform advanced analyses consisting of a variety
of Objects, Criteria and Calculations and with large quantities of data without loosing track of the
individual elements and actions performed to build the analyses. In order to make sure that this is
unlikely to happen, all Objects can “explain themselves” to the user. An Object Explanation contains
information about the Dimensions and Measures of the Object, which Criteria and Drill downs affect
the Object, which Drill downs affect other Objects and whether and how Intelligent Agents may
influence the Object.
In order to improve legibility there is an option in the Smartpad Properties tab which may be used to
add custom information to the automatically supplied explanation.
Analyses and Reports
An Analysis consists of one or more Objects placed in the work area. All Objects in an Analysis are
connected, allowing one Object to be used to specify or influence data shown in other Objects.
Combining Objects into Analyses make automatic 'Drill down' searches possible.
Reports are used to produce dynamic printable reports from the data warehouse data based on
certain parameters and selection criteria. Both Analyses and Reports may be built either by using the
user friendly Intelligent Analysis tool, or by manual design.
Save and Open Analyses and Reports
Saving Analyses and Reports is an important part of using TARGIT. It is the key function to enable
sharing of information among different users. Only the object definitions are saved in an Analysis file -
not the data. When the Analysis is later opened it will be refreshed to show the current data at the
time of the opening.
16 TARGIT User Guide
The Toolbar contains buttons that will save and open Analyses and Reports.
Use this button to save the current Analysis or Report.
Use this button to open a saved Analysis or Report or double-click on the file in the Documents
tab of the Smartpad.
Saving and opening Analyses and Reports is implemented using dialogs. TARGIT offers the option to
save Analyses and Reports as Personal or Shared in a Virtual File System (VFS). When an Analysis or
a Report is saved in the VFS it is transferred to and stored in a folder on the server. This means that
the Analysis or Report is immediately available to other users connected to that server both via a web
and a Windows client.
When an Analysis or a Report is saved as Shared, it will be available to all users on any client. Note
that the user needs to have developer rights to be able to save in the Shared section.
When an Analysis or a Report is saved as Personal it is available only to the user, who saved it. It will
still be available on any client, but only when the user who originally saved the Analysis or Report logs
on.
In the Save dialog the user has the option to create subfolders similar to the ordinary Windows file
system. This makes it possible to organize and group Analyses and Reports, and the user has the
option to rearrange saved Analyses and Reports by using drag/drop in the Documents tab in the
Smartpad.
Analyses and Reports may be saved in any other location by selecting the text 'or save to file location'
in the bottom of the dialog and then browsing to the location in the Windows save dialog.
Analyses and Reports saved as Shared and Personal are available through the Documents tab of the
Smartpad. By double-clicking on the Analysis or Report, it is retrieved and displayed based on the
current information in the Data Warehouse. Alternatively, Analyses and Reports may be opened with
the open dialog via the File menu or the toolbar. Note that a search field is available in the open
dialog to search for documents in the Documents tab. Analyses and Reports may also be opened from
another file location by selecting 'or open from file location' in the bottom of the Open dialog.
The Recent section of the Documents tab will after some use present a list showing the most recently
used Analyses and Reports for easy access.
Organizing Analyses and Reports
Analyses and Reports saved in the Virtual File System (VFS) may be organized by simple drag-drop
actions in the Smartpad Documents window. Drag-drop of an Analysis or Report to a different folder
while holding down the CTRL-key will make a copy of the file in the target folder of the Smartpad
Documents and leave the original file untouched. Analyses and Reports may be deleted from the VFS
by selecting the „Delete? option in the right-click menu.
The Basics 17
Tools
The Tools menu offers easy access to major tools of the application including preferences settings and
logging.
Intelligent Analysis
Menu: Tools | Intelligent Analysis
This menu item shows or hides the Intelligent Analysis tool, the same action which may be achieved
by pressing the 'Intelligent Analysis' button in the Toolbar.
Schedule
Menu: Tools | Schedule
This menu item offers a shortcut to the Intelligent Analysis 'Options to Schedule a Report' tool.
Notifications
Menu: Tools | Notifications Smartpad: Scheduled jobs
This menu item offers a shortcut to open the Smartpad `Scheduled Jobs´ tab and present a list of
active Notification Agents in the Work area.
Reporting Services web
Menu: Tools | Reporting Services web Smartpad: Documents
This menu item and the link in the Smartpad Documents opens the web interface to the Reporting
Services Server in the Work area. The URL path to the Reporting Manager Web Interface must be
defined in the TARGIT Management Studio.
The Reporting Manager Web Interface will display a list of reports that have been promoted to the
Reporting Services Server, e.g. after having been designed in MS Visual Studio.
18 TARGIT User Guide
Gauge Builder Wizard
Menu: Tools | Gauge Builder Wizard
This menu item opens the Gauge Builder Wizard. The Gauge Builder Wizard is a unique tool that
enables the user to create customized gauges based on user defined graphics. To start the Gauge
Builder Wizard go to the Tools item in the menu bar and click the `Gauge Builder Wizard´ button. A
new dialog box is opened with two choices; `New gauge´ and `Modify gauge´.
New gauge
If `New gauge´ is chosen a new screen will appear with three types of gauges to chose from: The
speedometer gauge and progress bar, which are used to represent values and icon gauge used to
represent value ranges. After choosing the type of gauge, one or more images (bitmap, JPEG, PNG or
GIF) may be chosen to represent the gauge depending on the selected gauge type. The image size
(pixels) should reflect the size of the object where it should be used. If the image is too small, scaling
the object causes the image to pixelate, while using an image that is too big causes larger rendering
time when scaling the image down.
After choosing the images and clicking `Next´ a name for the gauge can be typed before pressing
`Create´ to create the gauge. When the gauge is created the gauge builder editor will be shown with
the gauge in the main window and a pane with a gauge section and a properties section in the left
side. The top of the pane on the left side controls the visibility of the gauge. Marking the checkboxes
will include the gauge item in the final gauge. Options to change the order of the gauge items and
adding or removing items can be found below the gauge items.
Clicking the name of any gauge item will enable a properties pane below the gauge items, where size,
placement, title, description and other properties can be set for the individual items. Options to move
the items will also appear in the main window. When satisfied with the gauge clicking the `OK´ button
in the bottom of the pane will add the gauge to the existing gauges in TARGIT and making it available
to all users.
Note: It is possible to work with multiple images in multiple layers for backgrounds, scales, needles,
icons etc.
Modify gauge
If `Modify gauge´ is chosen from the Gauge Builder Wizard a list of gauges is shown. Some of the
gauges are system gauges and can only be copied while custom made gauges can be modified. When
a gauge has been selected for modification the Gauge Builder editor will appear with the gauge in the
main window and the gauge items in the left pane. The modification of a gauge is done in the same
way as explained above when creating a new gauge.
Note: Building and editing gauges requires Developer user rights.
The Basics 19
Launch TARGIT Desktop
Menu: Tools | Launch Desktop
This menu item launches TARGIT Desktop, an independent program that gives access to TARGIT
information before the TARGIT client is opened. If already launched, selecting this menu item will
close TARGIT Desktop.
Report templates
Menu: Tools | Report templates
By clicking this menu item a new window opens, where saved report templates can be selected for
further use. When selecting a template three options appear in then bottom of the dialog. The delete
button deletes the template. The edit button opens the template for editing only and the Use button
opens it for use when creating a new report. Templates may also be opened from the `New Report´
menu item in the toolbar.
Criteria editor
Menu: Tools | Criteria editor Keyboard: CTRL+R
This menu item activates the Criteria editor, the same action which may be achieved by pressing the
'Criteria editor' button in the Toolbar or keying CTRL+R.
Select language
Menu: Tools | Select language
Selecting this item will bring the user to the login screen, where the preferred language may be
selected from a drop-list of available languages.
User Preferences
Menu: Tools | User Preferences
This tool enables the user to change some of the application's default settings. The available options
are described below.
Appearance
The appearance tab provides the following options for changing the visual aspect of the application:
20 TARGIT User Guide
Small smartpad tabs
Click 'Small smartpad tabs' to toggle the Smartpad tabs from their large, default size to small size,
where they are displayed as icons in a single line at the bottom of the Smartpad. Use this function to
save space in the Smartpad, which is useful for some of the space demanding functions.
Week starts on Sunday
Per default, the calendar settings of TARGIT is set to start weeks on mondays. Using this function the
weeks will start on Sundays.
Scroll grid headers
Per default, only data fields of tables are scrollable leaving column and row headers viewable when
scrolling. Enabling this option will cause entire tables, including column and row headers, to be
scrollable.
Compact hierarchies
Per default, tables with multi-level dimensions will display the dimension hierarchy with one column or
one row for each level in the dimension. The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a
multi-level dimension, to be displayed in a single column or row. Setting this option in the Preferences
menu will enable this feature in all new objects. Per default, this option is disabled. The 'Object |
Formatting' menu has a similar option to enable / disable this feature in individual Objects.
Behavior
The behavior tab provides the following behavioral options:
Always logon to current server
Enabling this option will cause the login screen, upon opening the application, to be automatically
processed with the current server and user information. Per default, this option is disabled.
Auto-filter criteria bar
When this option is enabled, the Criteria bar drop-lists are filtered to show only the dimension
members that would be present in a data object being influenced by the selected criteria.
Auto-filter criteria editor
When this option is enabled, the Criteria editor is filtered to show only the dimension values that
would be present in a data object being influenced by the selected criteria.
Member list threshold
When this option is enabled a threshold is put on the number of members shown in criteria bar drop
lists. The number of members shown may be specified in the value field. If the option is disabled all
members are shown.
Drillpad mode
Three options are available for the drillpad mode: Always show drillpad, which makes it possible to
enable the drillpad by clicking it. This splits the Smartpad in two - one part for the selected tab in the
Smartpad and one for the drillpad. The drillpad may be disabled again by clicking the tab again. Show
The Basics 21
drillpad on use is the default selection and shows the drillpad when drilling takes place. Never change
to drillpad does not change to the drillpad on drilling and the drillpad tab has to be clicked in the
Smartpad to show the drillpad.
Expansion and chart type
When this option is enabled and an object is auto-expanded for instance as a result of a drill action or
by applying criteria, the type of chart will automatically change in accordance with the level of
expansion. This option has three states: Always, auto expands an object and changes the chart type
to the one most often used for the dimension according to the built in intelligent analysis. This is done
when applying a criterion, when hyper relating or drilling. If for example the criterion JEANS is applied
(from the criteria editor/bar, from hyper relating or from drilling) the object is auto-expanded to show
all children of the JEANS hierarchy level and the chart type that is most often used for this dimension
is used to display all the children. The setting When TARGITing also auto expands the object and
changes the chart type, but only when hyper relating. The setting Never disables all auto expansion
and changing chart type.
Note: Expansion and chart type is only active if the object has one dimension on the Y-axis of the
data page.
Print explanation on last page
When using Print Special options: "Chart and explanation" or "Data and explanation" explanations are
by default printed at the bottom of each page. This option allows the user to print the explanation on
the last page only.
Note: If the explanation spans more than 50% of the page height, it will automatically be moved to
the last page.
Snap to grid
When placing elements in a report, the placement is decided by an underlying grid. The grid size may
be changed by this function and thereby change the size of the steps when moving elements with the
keyboard keys. e.g. a 4 x 6 grid causes elements to be moved in steps of 4 pixels along the X-axis
and 6 pixels along the Y-axis.
Documents
The documents tab provides the following options:
Load document
When right-clicking a document in the Documents tab there is an option to load the document
whenever the client is started. If this option is enabled on a document, the name of the document is
displayed here. Loading the document on start up may be disabled by clicking the red cross.
Start in Folder
When starting the client the Documents tab is displayed in the Smartpad. This option decides what
content to initially display in the Documents tab. Favorites is default. Note that if the specified folder is
empty the root of Documents is displayed.
22 TARGIT User Guide
Show folders first
This option is enabled by default and causes folders to be displayed first in the Documents tab. The
option may also be changed from the right-click menu in the Documents tab.
Sort by type
This option is disabled by default and causes all content in the Documents tab to be sorted by type
(default sorting is alphabetical). The option may also be changed from the right-click menu in the
Documents tab.
Folder
This option is set to 'Auto' by default. This setting displays Favorites in the Thumbnail Navigator, but if
there are no Favorites the Recent documents are displayed instead. Options to display 'Favorites' and
'Recent' are also available.
Flush Intelligence
Menu: Tools | Flush Intelligence
The application does, in an intelligent way, remember and reuse the user?s preferred selections. E.g. it
remembers the preferred Object types for certain combinations of dimensions and measures. Clicking
the 'Flush intelligence' option will cause this memory to be reset.
Logging
Menu: Tools | Logging
Query logging
Enabling this option will cause the application to write all MDX actions into a log file in HTML format.
This may be especially helpful for advanced users that need to know the MDX syntax for specific
actions.
View query log
This option will only be available if 'Query logging' has previously been enabled. It will open a browser
to display the present contents of the log file.
Log query results
This is an extension of the 'Query logging' option that will include query results in the log file.
Getting help
The Basics 23
Menu: Help Keyboard: F1
TARGIT has an integrated help function. This may be activated by pressing F1, by clicking `Help |
TARGIT help´ in the menu bar or by clicking the small icon showing a question mark in the right side
of the toolbar. Activating the help function will open a new window with a tree structure on the left
side and a view frame to the right. Different tabs are also available above the tree structure with
access to an index and a search functionexactly like the one with this user's guide.
Two other options are available from the help menu. The first option is a `Contact Us´ menu item.
Clicking this item opens the default browser with contact information. The other option is `About
TARGIT´, which opens a new window with license and user information and the license agreement.
24 TARGIT User Guide
Intelligent Analysis
TARGIT offers two methods of designing analyses and reports. First the traditional way, where all
content and formatting is specified in a number of manual steps or secondly the user friendly
Intelligent Analysis tool which will create powerful analyses, dashboards and reports just with a few
clicks of the mouse.
The Intelligent Analysis tool
Traditionally, analysis and report generators require numerous manual steps to create perfect results,
which can be tedious and time-consuming. This application is actually no different as it provides the
user with all the necessary tools and features to do exactly that. But it also offers a unique way of
creating analyses and reports which shields the user from having to deal with the less attractive
details.
The Intelligent Analysis tool is designed to fulfill most requirements for designing analyses,
dashboards and reports. For a detailed description of all components of an Analysis or a dashboard,
and how to add or change components and their properties in order to manually improve the Analysis,
please refer to the Designing Analyses chapter.
When more control of a TARGIT Report layout and content is required, than is available through the
Intelligent Analysis tool, it is possible to enter manual define mode, which is described in the chapter
Designing TARGIT Report.
The Intelligent Analysis tool can be started by clicking on the 'New...' or 'Intelligent Analysis' button
on the Toolbar or by selecting the File | New… menu item.
Start a new Intelligent Analysis.
Shows/hides Intelligent Analysis.
When this feature is activated the work area changes from the standard define mode to the Intelligent
Analysis interface. The Intelligent Analysis tool divides the Work area into two areas. The upper half
contains first an explanation of the analysis in readable text followed by options that may be selected
in order to accomplish the task. The lower half, the sample area, will display a model of how the
Analysis or Report will look, based on the present selections, when executed. The lower half may be
closed by clicking the divider line in order to make more room for explanation and options. A new click
on the divider line at the bottom of the work area will redisplay the Sample area. The OODA circle
shown to the right of the options represent the four phases a business process goes through. Hovering
a phase will highlight it and clicking a phase in the OODA circle will filter the Intelligent Analysis tool
to show the options relevant for the clicked phase. Clicking the 'More' button will reveal all available
options. Rarely used options are hidden in the normal list, but a clicked OODA part will show all items
relevant for the clicked part.
Intelligent Analysis 25
Explanation
The explanation initially says ‘I would like to…’ and the options section will present the major options,
‘…analyze…’ to use the wizard's user friendly options to build an Analysis with one or more Objects,
‘…create a dashboard showing …’ to create a dashboard, ‘…create a report…’ to create a Report, ‘…be
notified…’ to create a notification activity, ‘…schedule’ to schedule Analyses (as a picture file), data
from objects, Storyboards, Notification Agents and Reports, ‘…create a storyboard…’ to create a
Storyboard and display it as either a video, podcast or slideshow, ‘…search…’ to search through e-
mails, documents and websites for information that the selected analysis deals with. The search
functionality is based upon Microsoft Windows Desktop Search technology, and finally ‘…search for
Sentinels…’ to search for Sentinels to keep an eye on your data.
After selecting one of these major options, the option field will present more options for the user to
select from in order to accomplish the required task, and update the explanation with one or more
sentences that, in clear text, will explain the complete task as defined so far. When the mouse is
hovered over active elements of the explanation, the element will be highlighted to indicate that it
may be altered by clicking it. When options which require further input are brought back to edit mode,
a Remove button appears to remove the option from the report. Options which require no further
input are simply removed by clicking the item in the explanation.
The Back button will undo the choices made in reverse order. This means that the latest action is
canceled first, then the action before that, etc.
The Go button will use all the selections made in the Intelligent Analysis tool and perform the specified
task.
Sample
When the Intelligent Analysis tool is used to build an Analysis, Dashboard or a Report, the sample
area will show which elements has been included in the Analysis, Dashboard or Report so far. The
elements shown are placeholders to give an impression of what will be included in the final Analysis,
Dashboard or Report and how it will look when executed.
Note: The Sample area may be closed to make room for more options. This is done by clicking on the
dividing line. Reopening the Sample area is done in the same way.
Reentering Intelligent Analysis
Analyses and Dashboards generated with the Intelligent Analysis tool may be edited using the
Intelligent Analysis tool. By pressing the Toolbar „Intelligent Analysis? button, the Intelligent Analysis
tool is activated allowing edit of the selected options as described above. Some manual changes to the
Analysis as for example size of objects and globe rotations may not be preserved when the Intelligent
Analysis tool is used to make changes to an Analysis.
Reports generated using the Intelligent Analysis tool may be edited by entering the Intelligent
Analysis interface as long as no manual editing has been done in define mode. Reports created this
26 TARGIT User Guide
way can be saved as any other report. Included in the file is information used by Intelligent Analysis
when the report is opened again, meaning that a reopened report can be edited using the Intelligent
Analysis tool and rerun.
Options for creating an Analysis
After having selected the ‘…analyze…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
analyze…’ and the options area changes into ‘Select measure to analyze’ with all available measures in
one column and another column showing the chosen measures. Right above the measure columns the
drop-list ‘Select cube’ makes it possible to select from which cube the measures should be fetched.
Individual measures may be moved between the columns simply by clicking them. When satisfied with
the selections, pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen measures
and bring up a list of further options. Instead of going through a complete new Intelligent Analysis
setup, the user may instead press the Go button. This will activate the Analysis most often used to
analyze the chosen measure.
… grouped by…
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions to group by’ with all available dimensions in one column
and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension levels are
moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension level will
result in a separate Object in the final Analysis. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the resulting Object, may be changed simply by individually dragging
dimensions up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next
button will update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following
options:
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… selected by the following criteria
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work area
fulfilling the chosen options and activate it. If data for the Analysis should be filtered, activating this
option will open the „Criteria options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria
editor. When criteria are selected pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work
area fulfilling all the chosen options and activate it.
Intelligent Analysis 27
Options for creating a Dashboard
After having selected the ‘…create a dashboard showing ...’ option, the explanation field changes into
‘I would like to create a dashboard showing...’ and the options area changes into ‘Select measures’
with all available measures and KPI values in one column and a second column showing the chosen
items. Right above the columns there may be a drop-list ‘Select cube’ making it possible to select
from which cube the measures and KPI values should be fetched. Individual values are moved
between the columns simply by clicking them. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next
button will update the explanation area with the chosen measures and insert the text `with the
following goals´. Following the explanation area is a list of the selected measures and their default
goal of 20% above maximum. Clicking a measure will open the option to set three goal types;
dynamic goal (e.g. 20% above maximum), measure goal and no goal. Clicking the Go button after
setting the goals will generate a standard dashboard using the chosen measures, dimensions and
goals, but further options are available by clicking next.
…with the trend over …
This option brings up the ‘Select time dimension’ and show available time dimensions and their levels.
Selecting a Time dimension level brings up the following options:
…visualized with …
This option brings up the ‘Select visualization’ and displays a list of available visualization types. After
selecting one, a list of further sub options regarding the selected type may be presented to choose
from.
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… selected by the following criteria:
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work area
fulfilling the chosen options and activate it. If data for the Analysis should be filtered, activating this
option will open the „Criteria options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria
editor. When criteria are selected pressing the Go button will generate a new Dashboard in the Work
area fulfilling all the chosen options and activate it.
28 TARGIT User Guide
Options for creating a TARGIT Report
After having selected the ‘…create a report? option the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
create a report.’ and the options area presents a list of additional phrases that can be used to add
further contents to the report. Only the most relevant options are presented at first. By clicking the
More button all available options are shown. When the mouse is hovered over an option, the
corresponding contents on the sample page will flash to indicate how the option will affect the final
report.
… showing the fields …
Display a list of available measures and dimensions, which can be included in the report by clicking
them. The chosen fields will be used to construct the core part of the report. The sequence of the
selected fields determines the order in which the fields are placed on the report. This sequence can be
changed by dragging and dropping the fields to another location in the list or by using the CTRL+Arrow
up/down keys.
… with the title …
Presents an input field where the report title can be keyed in. The title will be placed in the header and
will be presented on each page in the report.
... using the template ...
This option is used to format the report with an existing template. Available templates are shown
below the `Select template´ text.
… with page numbers
Add page numbers in the bottom right corner of each page in the report.
… with the image …
Display a file open dialog, where a bitmap to be included in the report can be chosen. The image will
be displayed in the top right corner of each page in the report.
… with the header …
Ask for a text to be displayed in the top of every page in the report.
… with the footer …
Ask for a text to be displayed in the bottom of every page in the report.
Intelligent Analysis 29
… showing the chart object … for every …
This option gives the possibility to include Objects made in TARGIT or TARGIT NET in the Report.
Select the Analysis containing the desired Object by checking the name or click the More button to
bring up a file dialog and select an Analysis to import from. Choose the dimension that determines
how the Object will be repeated in the Report.
After clicking Next, a thumbnail version of the Analysis is presented and the object to include can be
selected by clicking it. If Next is clicked without selecting an Object, the whole Analysis is inserted in
the report.
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… grouped by …
Bring up a list of dimensions to choose from. The chosen dimensions will be used to group information
based on the values of the dimensions. If, for example, grouped by Year is chosen, the report will be
divided into sections - one for each year in the data. By selecting multiple dimensions, the grouping
will be nested accordingly. The nesting order can be changed by drag/drop of the fields or by using
CTRL+Arrow up/down. Note, that if a dimension previously selected in … showing the fields … is
selected again it will only be included once. If no dimensions were selected in …showing the fields …,
the last dimension selected will be added to the … showing the fields … list to avoid unnecessary
nesting of groups.
… showing the top … of …
This option is used to filter the report and only show the data with the highest values based on some
measure. Enter the number of values to include (default is 5) and choose the measure to select the
highest values from.
… showing the bottom … of …
Same as top except that it is the lowest values that are included in the report.
30 TARGIT User Guide
… ordered ascending by …
Select the dimension or measure to control the order in which the values are printed on the report.
This option will sort the values with the lowest value first and the highest value last.
… ordered descending by …
Select the dimension or measure to control the order in which the values are printed on the report.
This option will sort the values with the highest value first and the lowest value last.
… selected by the following criteria …
This option displays the Criteria editor and the criteria that should be applied to the whole report can
be entered.
… with grand total
Add a summary section that sums up the total value of the selected measures.
… with subtotals
Add a footer section to every grouping holding the subtotals for the selected measures.
… with a new page for every …
This option can be used to begin on a new page at the start of a specific group, e.g. whenever the
report is about to start on a new year, it should end the current page and begin on a new one. The
option gives the opportunity to choose from the dimensions listed in the … grouped by … option.
… with an explanation
This option inserts an explanation in each of the Reports sections which will inform about the criteria
which are active for the section in question.
Options to be notified
After having selected the ‘…be notified’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to be
notified...’ and the options area changes into:
Select measure to monitor
‘Select measure to monitor’ presents the active cubes. A click on a cube will present its measures
ready to select from. A second click on the cube will again display all available cubes.
Intelligent Analysis 31
Select Notification trigger
After having selected a measure to monitor, the options area presents ‘Select Notification trigger’ with
options for when an e-mail should be triggered based on the value of the measure at the time of the
notification execution. Press „Next? when trigger has been selected.
Set delivery method
After selecting trigger, the options area presents `Set delivery method´ with the option to write the e-
mail address where the notification should be sent to (Note: Html format cannot be sent by email).
Recipients are entered in the `To´ field and multiple recipients are separated by semi-colon (
. A
subject and message can be entered in the two text boxes below the `To´ field. Note: In order to be
able to send files via e-mail, the system administrator must have specified a mail server address in
the TARGIT Management Studio setup panel.
Schedule Notification Agent
When the delivery method has been specified the options area allows specification of the first
notification date and time and the monitoring frequency.
Pressing „Next? after defining the schedule makes more options available in the options area. At this
time, though, it is possible to press the „Go? button in order to schedule the Notification Agent in case
the remaining options are not required:
... for each ...
Selecting this option makes it possible to specify a dimension level for which all members will be
individually monitored using the selected trigger specifications
... selected by the following criteria
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will activate the notification fulfilling the chosen
options. If data for the notification should be filtered, activating this option will open the „Criteria
options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria editor. When criteria are
selected pressing the Go button will activate the notification fulfilling all chosen options and open the
Smartpad „Agents and Actions? tab with data about the newly created Notification Agent with options
to edit its specifications. The Work area will at the same time show a list of all Notification Agents with
the newly created Notification Agent highlighted.
Note: When a notification is created it can be edited in the Scheduled Jobs tab in the Smartpad. For
detailed explanation see the section about Administrating Scheduled Jobs.
Options to schedule
After having selected the ‘…schedule’ option you will be prompted to select the file or analysis object
to schedule. The following choices change based upon the selected file or object.
32 TARGIT User Guide
Select filename and format
After choosing what to schedule you will be prompted to write a filename for the schedule. Further, an
image format must be chosen. This image format depends on the file or analysis object that was
chosen for scheduling. If an analysis was chosen, the formats; PNG Image (.png), Jpeg Image (.jpeg),
GIF Image (.gif) or BMP Image (.bmp) are available. For an analysis object, the available file formats
are: MS Excel (.xls), XML file (.xml) or CSV file (.csv). For a report, the formats are: Adobe Acrobat
(.pdf), MS Word (.rtf) or Internet (.html) and for a storyboard: Windows media video (.wmv) or
Podcast (.wmv).
Set delivery method
After selecting filename and format, the options area presents `Set delivery method´ with the option
to choose the folder to save the exported file to. The available locations of saved files are configured
in TARGIT Management Studio. Another option is to choose to send by email (Note: Html format
cannot be sent by email). Recipients are entered in the `To´ field and multiple recipients are
separated by semi-colon (. A subject and message can be entered in the two text boxes below the
`To´ field.
Note: In order to be able to send files via e-mail, the system administrator must have specified a mail
server address in the TARGIT Management Studio Setup panel.
Set schedule
The last option is `Set schedule´, where the start date and start time can be chosen from the drop
down panels. The recurrence of the schedule is chosen by entering an integer and chose between
day(s), week(s) or month(s) at the `Repeat every´drop down panels.
Options to create a storyboard
After having selected the ‘…create a storyboard…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would
like to create a storyboard’ and the options area changes into ‘Select from the options to describe
what you wish to do’ and the options area presents a list of additional phrases that can be used to add
further contents to the storyboard.
…based on drillpad analyses…
This option brings up the ‘Select the analyses to include’ with the available analyses logged in the
drillpad. When satisfied with the selections, clicking the Next button will update the explanation area
with the chosen option and bring up the following option:
…based on document analyses…
This option brings up the ‘Select the analyses to include’ with all the available files saved in the
Shared and Personal folders. When satisfied with the selections, clicking the Next button will update
Intelligent Analysis 33
the explanation area and no further options are available. Clicking the Go button, allows you to create
a Video, a Podcast or a Slideshow.
Options to search
After having selected the ‘…search…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
search…:’ and all the saved analyses are displayed in the options area. Click one of the analyses and
pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen analysis. Click the Go
button to start the search. The search function uses the preferences setup in Windows Desktop
Search.
Options to search for Sentinels
After having selected the ‘…search for Sentinels…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would
like to search for Sentinels…’ and all the measures from a cube is displayed in the options area.
Another cube may be selected by clicking the displayed cube name. Clicking any of the analyses and
pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen analysis. Click the Go
button to start the search for Sentinels. This opens the 'Search for Sentinels' dialog which is the same
as clicking the Sentinels icon in the toolbar. For more information on the settings that may be applied
in this dialog please see the section about Sentinels.
Options to analyze uploaded data
After having selected the ‘…analyze uploaded data…’ option, a dialog is displayed to register for
TARGIT Cloud if unregistered. If already registered a browser window is opened with direct logged on
access to analyze the data already uploaded to TARGIT Cloud.
Note: In order to have access to TARGIT Cloud software maintenance is required.
Options to upload data
After having selected the ‘…upload data…’ option, a dialog is displayed to register for TARGIT Cloud if
unregistered. If already registered a browser window is opened with direct logged on access to upload
data to TARGIT Cloud.
Note: In order to have access to TARGIT Cloud software maintainance is required.
34 TARGIT User Guide
Designing Analyses
The Intelligent Analysis tool is designed to fulfill most requirements for designing analyses, but after
having created an analysis using this tool, all components of the analysis may be modified individually
in order to improve the Analysis. It is even possible to manually create complete analyses without
using the Intelligent Analysis tool.
Creating a new analysis
New analyses may be created either by using the Intelligent Analysis tool, or by selecting the 'File |
New analysis' menu item to start a manual design of an analysis.
Creating Objects
An Object is a window in the Work area that displays data and has options to specify which data is
displayed and how it is displayed. Within each Object window there are many options that affect the
representation of the data. The procedures for creating and using Objects are explained here.
Objects can be created using either the Toolbar or the menu. When a new Object is created, the
Smartpad is automatically changed into the 'Source data' tab ready for selecting data fields for the
new object. Simultaneously, a new Object window appears in the Analysis Work area.
Creating Objects from the Toolbar
The Toolbar contains buttons that will create new Objects.
New object. This option creates a new object which type is decided by the intelligent system.
New chart object. A chart object displays data graphically. There are many types of charts, and
the chart type is defined during object definition.
New cross tabulation. A Cross tabulation works just like a Table. It displays less data, but there
are more options concerning the layout of the data sheet.
New globe. Globes are used to display data based on geographical locations.
New gauge. Gauges are used to display data values, progress or trends relative to a fixed or
dynamic scale.
New layout object. Layout objects may be added to an analysis in order to improve its layout and
readability.
To create a new Object, simply click the button that represents the object type you wish to create.
Designing Analyses 35
Next to some of these buttons, there is a small down-arrow button. Clicking these opens submenus,
which will enable users to select other object types within that same category.
Creating Objects from the menu
Creating Objects may also be done using the 'Object | New object' menu item.
Organizing Objects
Objects in the Work area will automatically adjust their size so that they together will fill the available
Work area space.
Therefore, when there are two or more Objects in the Work area, there will often be a need to
organize them, both regarding placement and relative size. This application offers several tools to
facilitate this, the primary one being the “Auto-arrange” feature. This feature allows individual Objects
to be moved around on the Work area by dragging in the Objects title bar. When an Object is being
dragged, a semi transparent image of that Object is shown together with two sets of arrows pointing
up, down left and right. One set of arrows are at the borders of the work area and the other set of
arrows are shown in the object where the cursor with the dragged object is placed. Whenever the
cursor is over one of these arrows the semi transparent image of the dragged object changes into a
larger grey area indicating where the object will be dropped if released which is either above, under or
to the right or left of the object or work area depending on the arrow type. When the Object is
dropped, the surrounding Objects are resized in order to make room for the dropped Object.
An Object may be resized by dragging its borders, and such an action will automatically resize the
adjacent objects, such that the whole Work area space is filled with the available Objects. Note that
an object cannot immediately be stretched to more that the size of itself and the adjacent object. It
requires resizing of the other objects first. The Objects functions chapter describes functions, which
allows control over the height and width of Objects measured as fractions of the actual height or width
of the Work area. Furthermore, right-clicking an Objects border opens a menu where the horizontal or
vertical distribution of the Objects may be specified.
Object definition
Object definition is done using the Smartpad. When creating a new object the Smartpad automatically
changes to the 'Source data' tab allowing selection of data for the new Object. Simultaneously, a new
Object window appears in the Work area.
When the cursor is hovering over a dimension or a measure, one or more selection lines in the object
definition window will flash. Only selection lines where the data type fits will flash. Data fields may
now be selected for display simply by being dragged to the flashing selection line, or by clicking the
field, or by selecting an item in the right-click menu. In the same way, data may be removed from the
definition window simply by dragging the data field back onto the Smartpad 'Source data' tab, by
clicking the field in the tab or by removing the appropriate item using the right-click menu.
36 TARGIT User Guide
Selecting data
The drop-list at the top of the 'Source data' tab of the Smartpad is used to select the Cube which
contains the required data to be analyzed. Below this drop-list, available dimensions and measures for
the selected cube are shown. Dimensions and measures are descriptions of data, for example,
Revenue contains data values for revenue and Customers contains data about the customers. Some
dimensions may be hierarchical which is shown by a small plus or minus sign to the left of the
dimension name and a special hierarchical icon. Clicking the plus or minus sign will either reveal or
hide the next dimension level.
Selecting data for display
Because the Object is new, no selections are made. When the cursor is hovering over an active
dimension or measure in the Smartpad 'Source data' tab, it changes into a pointing hand and a
selection line in the Object definition window begins flashing. Only selection lines where the data can
be placed will flash. The active data field may now be selected for display simply by dragging it to the
flashing selection line. In the same way data may be removed from display simply by dragging the
data field back onto the Smartpad 'Source data' tab. Clicking the data field will move it back and forth
between the Smartpad and the definition window, and even right-click menu items exist for selecting
or deselecting data fields for display.
Note: It is not necessary to drag a given data field exactly onto the flashing selection line. Dropping
the field in the general area of the selection line is sufficient. Unavailable areas are hatched in the
definition window.
The screenshot below shows a Cross tabulation object with the dimension Item on the Y-axis and the
dimension Period on the X-axis. The numbers in the grid represent the measure Revenue.
Dimensions and measures in Object
The automatic descriptions of Objects work like this: Measure per/by Dimension. For example,
Revenue per Item by Period as shown above or Revenue per Store by Gender.
As mentioned, dimensions and measures can be placed manually or automatically into the definition
window. To place one in the window manually, drag it from the Smartpad 'Source data' tab onto a
flashing selection line. To have a dimension or a measure placed automatically, simply click it in the
'Source data' tab. When clicking, the data field chosen first will be placed on the first available
Designing Analyses 37
selection line in the row headers. The second data field will be placed on the first available selection
line in the column headers and so on.
Replace measures in objects
It is possible to replace a measure in an object with a different measure and at the same time
maintain the place and formatting of the replaced measure. This is done within the Smartpad Source
data tab simply by dragging the new measure on top of the measure to be replaced in the Source
data tab.
Displaying data
When the dimensions and measures required have been selected, the Object can be processed to
display actual data. This is done either by clicking the Fetch data/Define button in the Toolbar or
selecting `Toggle chart or data´ from the Object submenu . When the Object state is changed, the
Toolbar button will change too, and another click will take the Object back to define state. Next to the
Fetch/Define button is a small green button which may be used to refresh data in all objects in the
open analysis.
After the Refresh or Fetch button is clicked the Refresh button switches to a red button as long as
data are being updated. Pushing the red Abort button immediately stops the update process and frees
up your client for you to continue working and removes the job from the TARGIT Server, freeing up
memory and CPU.
Fetch data. Selects display mode of the selected Object.
Define. Selects definition mode of the selected Object.
Refresh data in all objects. Updates the data in all objects in an analysis.
Abort. Stops the update process and frees up ressources.
Object types
There are three main types of Objects: Graphical, Non-graphical and Layout. Examples of graphical
Objects are Pie charts, and Gauges. Non-graphical Object types consist of Tables and Cross
tabulations. Layout Objects are designed to improve layout and can only be changed into other types
within this category.
Object type change
Smartpad: Properties tab. Menu: Object | Object. Keyboard: CTRL + 0-9.
An active Object can easily be changed to another type using the menu or Smartpad Properties tab.
When an Object is changed, all Dimensions and Measures defined for the Object are converted to fit
38 TARGIT User Guide
perfectly with the properties of the new Object type. Changing the type of an Object is a strong
feature when having to decide how to most efficiently present data - or if the best way to present data
is liable for change. Please observe that a Layout Object can only be changed to another type of
Layout Object.
Non-graphical Objects
Non-graphical Object types consist of Tables and Cross tabulations.
Tables
Tables are used for displaying data in a simple row form. A Table is used to display large amounts of
data with many different data types.
Creating Table Objects is not like defining other Objects since there is only one selection line for
Dimensions and Measures in the new Object window. Placing a Dimension or Measure is done simply
by dragging it from the Smartpad 'Source data' tab onto the window and clicking it in the Smartpad or
using the right-click menu.
Removing a Dimension or Measure from the Table window is done by clicking it in the Smartpad,
dragging it back onto the Smartpad or using the right-click menu.
The order of the Dimensions and Measures placed in the window dictates how the data is displayed in
the Table.
Cross tabulations
Cross tabulations or Cross tab Objects behave much like Table Objects but may offer a clearer view of
the data. There are no practical limit to the number of dimensions and measures that can be displayed
in Cross tabs. Grouping data by placing more than one dimension on a row or column header is one
way to make complex data structures easier to comprehend. An example of this type of grouping is
shown in the next figures.
Designing Analyses 39
The New Cross tabulation window
Here, two dimensions and one measure have been placed in the Cross tabulation Object. The result
displayed is described in the title bar of the Object and shown in the screenshot below.
The Cross tabulation result
Graphical Objects
There are many types of graphical Objects. They can all be created by selecting the 'New Object'
function from the menu or Toolbar as described earlier. Once the Object is created, the type can be
chosen during definition of the Object. Available types of graphical objects are:
Pie chart is the default type. Mainly used for displaying percentages.
Bar chart. Displays data values in vertical bars.
Horizontal bar chart. This works just like the normal bar chart, but the bars
are horizontal.
Line chart. Displays data values as connected points in a system of co-
ordinates.
40 TARGIT User Guide
Area chart. Works just like the line chart except that the area under a line is
filled with the color of the line.
Scatter chart. Display data as points in a system of co-ordinates.
Bubble chart. Display data as variable size points in a system of co-
ordinates.
Radar chart. Display data around a chart in star-shaped figure.
Map. A map is used for displaying relations between geographical locations
and other data.
Globe. A globe is a three-dimensional map used for displaying data related
to geographical locations
Scalable map. A scalable map is used for displaying data related to
geographical locations.
Gauge. Displays a data value, progress or trend relative to a fixed or
dynamic scale.
When viewing graphical Objects, dimensions and measures are represented by graphics only. This
means that there will not be text on the graphical elements to describe the elements. In order to
identify each graphical element, a legend box may be shown at the right side of the graphical Object.
Holding the cursor over a graphical element will display a label with text information about the
element. The user may use the formatting options in the Smartpad Properties tab to specify which
data is displayed in the label.
The colors of the small boxes in the legend box match the colors of the corresponding graphical
elements.
Note: Graphical Objects may be rendered invisible if the legend or labels take up too much of the
available space in the graph window. The problem may be solved by either resizing the Object window
or removing the legend and/or labels.
Pie charts
Pie charts are used to display data values as percentages. In order to show how total revenue is split
between Stores, a Pie chart could be designed with the measure Revenue and the dimension Store.
The entire Pie represents the total Revenue and each piece of Pie represents the Revenue for a single
Store.
To achieve this, Store is dragged to the flashing selection line in the Pie chart definition window legend
area and Revenue is dragged to the flashing selection line in the middle of the pie chart accordingly.
Designing Analyses 41
Using Pie charts, it is easy to illustrate how a value such as Revenue is divided into pieces based on
any given grouping of data.
Bar charts and Horizontal bar charts
These two chart types are practically identical, the only difference being the direction of the bars. The
screenshot below shows the define state of a Bar chart. In this example, a Vertical bar chart.
New Bar chart definition window
In this example we would like the chart to show the annual Revenue for each Product. To achieve this,
we place Period on the selection line on the X-axis of the chart, Item on the legend selection line and
Revenue in the center selection line. These data types can be interchanged to get a slightly different
view of the data.
To specify what the bars should represent, Revenue is placed on the flashing selection line in the
middle of the definition window. When viewing actual data, the bar chart could look like shown below.
The order of the explanations in the legend box resembles the order of the bars of the chart.
The Bar chart result
42 TARGIT User Guide
By default the X-axis will meet the Y-axis at point zero (0) and the Y-axis top value will be adjusted to
the highest measure value, but specific values may be set in the Smartpad Properties tab. If a chart
contains more than one measure, it will also be possible to add an extra axis at the opposite end of
the coordinate plane and specify properties for this axis and define which measure relates to which
axis.
Line charts
The line chart is a system of coordinates where data is represented by points connected by lines.
To illustrate how Revenue changes monthly for each Product, Time is placed on the X-axis selection
line and Product on the legend selection line and Revenue is placed on the selection line in the middle
of the definition window. The lines will then represent the Revenue for each Product seen over Time.
By default the X-axis will meet the Y-axis at point zero (0) and the Y-axis top value will be adjusted to
the highest measure value, but specific values may be set in the Smartpad Properties tab. If a chart
contains more than one measure, it will also be possible to add an extra axis at the opposite side of
the coordinate plane and specify properties for this axis and define which measure relates to which
axis.
Area charts
This chart type is closely related to the line chart. The only difference between the two is that the area
beneath each line is filled with the color of the line.
Scatter charts
The scatter chart is a special kind of chart. It can display the same data as all other charts, but the
chart works differently with Dimensions and Measures. The following explains the way a Scatter chart
is used and the advantage of using it over using other chart types, e.g. bar charts.
If we wish to see Revenue, and the Contribution Margin percentage for each year, we could use a
normal bar chart. Revenue and Contribution Margin percentage are both Measures. This means that if
we want those data types to be represented on a bar chart, the values would be represented by the
height of the bars. The problem is that the Y-axis will be showing Revenue values from 0 to millions.
This means that the values of the Contribution Margin percentage, which are between 0 and 100,
would be almost invisible. The same would apply in line charts and area charts.
Designing Analyses 43
The scatter chart, however, allows placing Measures on both axes of the graph. This means that the
measure data, Revenue and Contribution Margin percentage, can be placed one on each of the axes of
the chart, while the required dimension, for instance Time is placed on the selection line of the legend.
It is now easier to see the data values for each item as dots in the scatter graph. Using the above
suggested dimensions and measures it would be desirable to have all the dots placed in the upper
right corner of the chart, which means that they all show high Contribution Margin percentages and
large Revenue values.
By default the X- and Y-axis will meet each other at point zero (0) and the axes top values will be
adjusted to the highest measure values. Specific values for each axis may be defined in the Smartpad
Properties tab.
Bubble charts
The bubble chart is basically the same as the scatter chart the only difference being, that in the
bubble chart the points may have variable sizes depending on a measure value. The bubble chart
therefore uses three measures, one for point sizes and one for each of the two axes.
By default the X- and Y-axis will meet each other at point zero (0) and the axes top values will be
adjusted to the highest measure values. Specific values for each axis may be defined in the Smartpad
Properties tab.
Radar charts
The radar chart is a two-dimensional chart consisting of two axes with the Y-axis displaying the value
range. The chart may display data from one dimension and one or more measures. When a dimension
is added to the chart, dimension members are plotted around the chart as a star-shaped figure. This
also limits the number of dimensions members being displayed in the chart, as too many members
makes it difficult to separate each member from each other. The placement of the members in the
chart depend on the measure value as members are placed farther from the center the higher the
value is. The center value depends on the member with the lowest value and the Y-axis top value is
adjusted to the highest measure value.
The recommended use for radar charts is to spot differences among a limited number of members in
one dimension. The differences may be spotted among several measures, but a limited number of
measures should be added to improve the readability of the chart. The variance among the data
shouldn't be to big, since it is difficult to spot differences from member to member if one measure
consist of values in the million range and another consist of values in the small thousand range. It is
also recommended to use measures with the same format (e.g. currency, percentages etc.) in the
chart to maintain readability, though it is possible to add measures with different formats.
44 TARGIT User Guide
The radar chart may be formatted like any other chart from the Smartpad Properties tab.
Maps
Maps are used to display data in relation to locations. Locations for Maps may be either geographical
coordinates or coordinates related to other types of background images as for instance floor plans.
Data values are represented by coloring of the locations dots.
There are three selection lines on the definition stage of a map object. The first one, placed at the top
of the map is a selection line for dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions to the
Map objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column. The colors of the
table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the location dots. To learn
more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
Calculations functions
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the map, is a selection line for dimensions. This
selection line is normally used to place dimensions related to a location. Any dimension can be placed
here, but in many cases they will not have a predefined location on the map. To learn how to set up
locations on a map, see the Map locations section in the Object functions chapter.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the map, is for measures.
Globes
Globes are basically three-dimensional maps, but Globes are used only to show data which are related
to geographical locations.
There are three selection lines in the Globe definition window. The first one, placed at the top of the
Globe is a selection line for Dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions to the Globe
objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column. The colors of the
table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the geographical location dots.
To learn more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the Globe window, is a selection line for dimensions
which are used to place dimensions related to geographical locations. Any dimension can be placed
here, but normally they will have a predefined geographical location. To learn how to set up locations
on a Globe, see the Globe locations section of the Object functions chapter.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the Globe window, is for measures.
Designing Analyses 45
The main difference between using a Globe instead of a map is that the Globe is three-dimensional.
When showing data, the Globe can be rotated by moving the mouse while holding down the right
mouse button. Alternately, the cursor keys of the keyboard can be used. The second feature of the
globe is the ability to zoom. This is done using the + or - keys of the numeric keypad.
Scalable maps
Scalable maps are based on areas instead of a single dot using GIS-technology (Geographic
Information Systems). The Scalable map is also used to display data in relation to locations and may
contain several layers of information. The further you zoom into a scalable map, the more details will
be available to you. If the necessary detail is available, you may zoom a map from the Continent level
via Countries, States, Regions, Zip Codes all the way down to street names and house numbers. The
level of detail is determined by the information within the GIS-maps. These maps are available,
usually at a cost, from local and international GIS-providers. The mapping between GIS-information
and dimension values is regarded an administrative task and is handled centrally in the TARGIT
Management Studio. Apart from the scalability of these maps, scalable maps also cover the demand
for representing e.g. countries as colored areas rather than just colored dots.
There are three selection lines on the definition stage of a scalable map object. The first one, placed at
the top of the map is a selection line for dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions
to the Scalable map objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column.
The colors of the table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the location
areas. To learn more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the Scalable map window, is a selection line for
dimensions which are used to place dimensions related to geographical locations. Any dimension can
be placed here, but normally they will have a predefined geographical location.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the map, is for measures.
Navigation and Zoom is a little different from the other objects. Use + and – keys or the mouse scroll
wheel to zoom in and out according to the current center of the map.To move the center of the map,
press and hold down the right mouse button while dragging the center of the map to a new position.
To change the properties of the scalable map see the formatting options section in the Object
functions chapter.
Gauges
46 TARGIT User Guide
Gauges are used to display the value, progress or trend of a measure or a calculation relative to a
fixed or dynamic scale. Gauge objects may contain one or more Gauges and are often used in
Dashboard Analyses.
When a new Gauge object has been added to the Work Area, the measure or calculation to be
displayed must initially be selected from the Add KPI option in Smartpad Properties. Selecting a single
measure or calculation and fetching data will create a complete Gauge object with several intelligent,
default settings:
Two gauges will be included: a Speedometer gauge and a Trend gauge.
The default Time dimension will automatically be included. The default Time dimension is
either the Time dimension that was last used in a gauge object or, if none has been used so
far, the Time dimension with the highest number of levels. The Time dimension will be
expanded to its second level.
The data displayed by the primary (broad) pointer in the Speedometer gauge will be from
the last period of the second level of this Time dimension.
The goal displayed by the secondary (narrow) pointer in the Speedometer gauge has been
calculated from the formula: “Goal = MaxValue + (MaxValue – MinValue) *0.2” where
MaxValue and MinValue are the highest and lowest values, respectively, within the available
periods.
The Speedometer gauge span, the minimum and maximum values of the Speedometer
gauge, has been calculated from these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest value of
either MaxValue*1.1 or Goal*1.1” and “MinSpan = the lowest value of either
MinValue*0.9 or Goal*0.9”. The Trend gauge is a graphical presentation of the overall
trend of data within the selected time span. It is based on the regression column which can
be seen when shifting to the data view of the gauge object. The formula for the regression is
best displayed by clicking the Explanation icon in the gauge object. A positive X multiplier
will display a positive trend, while a negative X multiplier will display a negative trend.
The Trend gauge span, the minimum and maximum values of the Trend gauge, has been
calculated from these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest absolute value of MaxValue
/2, MinValue/2 or Goal/2” and “MinSpan = -MaxSpan”. Goal is calculated as with the
Speedometer gauge, and even though Goal is not displayed in the Trend gauge it may have
an effect on the span of the Trend gauge.
SQL 2005 KPIs
The gauge object may also be based on a KPI that has been defined in Analysis Services for Microsoft
SQL Server 2005. If SQL 2005 KPIs have been defined in the Analysis Services database, they will
appear together with the list of available measures and calculations for the Gauge object definition.
Layout Objects
Menu: Object Right-click menu: New object Toolbar: Create a new layout object
Designing Analyses 47
Layout Objects are placeholders that may be added to an Analysis, just like any other Object in order
to improve the layout and readability. The type of the Layout Object can be changed from the
Smartpad Properties tab or from the Object menu, and can be either a blank box or it can contain
user supplied text, an explanation or a graphical image.
Note: When a trigger has been specified for a layout object, it may be selected by right-clicking and
clicking 'Select object'.
Blank area
The default Layout Object type is a blank area. A blank area Object can be inserted in an Analysis to
facilitate resizing of the other objects to a specific height or width and placement.
Text box
The Text box Layout Object type can be used to apply additional textual information to the Analysis.
The text to be displayed is entered in the Text field of the Smartpad Properties tab. Furthermore,
dynamic text may also be added from the dynamic content section below the text field. Dynamic text
is added by first selecting a cube and then a dimension. The dimension is inserted at the location of
the cursor in the text field in the format {reference
ostfix}, where the postfix may be first, last or all
depending on which values should be included in the caption:
Postfix Description
First The first value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
Last The last value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
All All values of the chosen dimension are inserted in the caption
separated by colons.
The default reference for a caption is cellvalue without a postfix.
The content of a Text box Layout Object may be formatted by using the Align and Formatting options
from the Smartpad Properties tab. Alignment of the text can be defined horizontally and vertically,
and options are available to change Background color, Border and Font in the same way as when
formatting the data page.
Explanation box
The Explanation box Object type will dynamically display the Global criteria that apply to the Analysis.
The content of an Explanation box Layout Object can be formatted by using the Align and Formatting
options from the Smartpad Properties tab. Alignment of the explanation can be defined horizontally
48 TARGIT User Guide
and vertically, and options are available to change Background color, Border and Font in the same
way as when formatting the data page.
Image
The Image Layout Object type can be used to display any image, e.g. a company logo. The image to
be displayed is chosen from the Background field of the Smartpad Properties tab.
Search Object
Microsoft Desktop Search may be integrated with TARGIT. This means that analysis data may be used
as search index on the user?s local machine. If the user performs a drill down in an analysis, on a
specific customer, to see his sales revenue, files related to the customer, like emails and such, will
appear together with other documents related to this customer. When using TARGIT the search icon in
the toolbar may be clicked to add an object with the Windows Desktop Search functionality. The
search includes metadata from the analysis as search criteria if 'Intelligent Search' is checked. These
metadata include measures and global criteria. Additional search terms may also be specified in the
text field 'Additional terms'. Several search objects may be added to an analysis if it contains data
objects (e.g. a crosstab).
TARGIT may also be connected to a Microsoft Search Server 2008 from TARGIT Management Studio
to extend the local search functionality to include corporate data details instead. When connected to a
Microsoft Search Server 2008, the search object in TARGIT appear as the Microsoft Desktop Search,
but the underlying search features, indexing methods etc. are controlled from the administration site
of the search server. For further information about these issues, please see the Microsoft Search
Server 2008 documentation.
Note: Windows operating systems include Windows Desktop Search except Windows XP where the
program must be downloaded from Microsoft's web site.
What-If
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data Toolbar: Add/remove What-If object
This unique feature gives the possibility to explore the hidden potential in the data warehouse. With
one single click a What-If object may be added and the effect of changes in figures may be predicted
based on information already available in the data warehouse. E.g. what if the sales revenue was 5%
higher? What would the numbers look like? This question may now be answered by adding a What-If
object to the analysis.
Designing Analyses 49
Adding a What-If object is easily done from the toolbar. When an analysis is open, click on the What-If
icon (pictured above) in the toolbar and the object is added. The object is represented as a cube with
a list of all the measures in the analysis. Each of the measures may be changed with the small plus or
minus icons. Each click on these icons will change the value one percent. It is also possible to double
click on the value to enable editing of the clicked value. Editing a value may also be done from the
Smartpad Properties tab or by right-clicking the measure or dimension and choose increase or
decrease. Note that totals are not changed since they are obtained from the cube and not
recalculated. To get a recalculated total a custom calculation must be inserted.
A What-If object may also be added by marking an object and selecting Object | Data | What-If from
the menu bar or by right-clicking the object and selecting Data | What-If. These options adds a What-
If object with all measures of the analysis and the last clicked hierarchy member or the first hierarchy
member if none was clicked. Further members may be added by right-clicking each of them in the
objects and select Data | What-If or use the corresponding selection in the menu bar. Another easy
way to add members to the What-If object is to use the properties tab in the Smartpad. Clicking on
the name of any of the dimensions changes the properties tab and dimension members may be added
by marking the check boxes and selecting for which measures the members must be added, that is,
for which measures should the dimension members be available in the What-If object.
The What-If object affects the appearance of the other objects in the analysis. Whenever a What-If
object is added to an analysis, the other objects in the analysis show the What-If modified values and
bar charts show both the original values and the What-If modified values.
To remove the What-If object from the analysis, click the blue cross in the upper right corner of the
object or click the What-If icon in the toolbar.
Multi-cube Analyses
When connecting to a Microsoft cube server (OLAP Services or Analysis Services) and the database
contains multiple cubes it is possible to generate Analyses with Objects simultaneously displaying data
from different cubes. This is accomplished by selecting a different cube in the Smartpad 'Source data'
tab. If there are any existing Objects from other cubes in the Analysis, a dialog is presented asking
whether these Objects should be removed or not. By answering no, new Objects can be added based
on data from other cubes.
Every Object in a Multi-cube Analysis will have a cube icon next to the explanation icon. Icons which
are not colored means that the Object belongs to a different cube than the selected Object. By
hovering the cursor over the icon, a description is displayed telling which cube the Object belongs to.
Multi-cube analyses imposes some limitations. When applying criteria either by using the criteria
editor or by drilling, only Objects connected to the same cube will be affected.
Biggest Opportunities and Problems
Menu: File | Document properties Toolbar: User preferences | Document properties
50 TARGIT User Guide
Biggest Opportunities and Biggest Problems are intelligent ways to browse through objects to highlight
remarkable good or bad trends. By default all analyses are included in the search for Biggest
Opportunities and Problems. When clicking any of the two options a search for candidate objects
among all analyses is initiated. The biggest options only consider gauge objects with a goal and a
trend and KPIs defined in the database. When the search is done the results are presented in gauges.
Objects from a Biggest Opportunities and Problems search is also presented automatically and kept up
to date in the TARGIT Desktop notification section.
To exclude an analysis from the search for Biggest Opportunities and problems check the option
'Exclude this analysis from biggest opportunities/problems' in the document properties menu.
Biggest Opportunities
Menu: Tools | Biggest Opportunities
When clicking the Biggest Opportunities option, all analyses (except anyone marked as excluded) and
all KPIs are immediately analyzed for Biggest Opportunities. To be considered an opportunity, the
current trend of the measured value must first of all be good (positive or negative depending on the
smiley settings). Furthermore, if the current value is on the good side of the goal, it will be prioritized
higher than those where the current value is on the bad side of the goal.
Biggest Problems
Menu: Tools | Biggest Problems.
When clicking the Biggest Problems option, all analyses (except anyone marked as excluded) and all
KPIs are immediately analyzed for biggest problems. To be considered a problem, the current trend of
the measured value must first of all be bad (negative or positive depending on the smiley settings).
Furthermore, if the current value is on the bad side of the goal, it will be prioritized higher than those
where the current value is on the good side of the goal.
Object Functions 51
Object functions
Activating functions
The most important functions for objects are available in the Smartpad Properties tab, the
Calculations tab and the Criteria tab. Most functions may also be activated from the menu, a right-
click menu or by keyboard shortcuts.
Note: In order to conserve space right-click menus may only show menu items relevant to the
position of the cursor when the right-click was initiated. If the right-click menu has been truncated, a
menu item „More? at the bottom will reveal all items when selected.
General functions
Locking Objects
Menu: Object | Object Right-click menu: Object
When an Object is locked it is no longer possible to change the appearance or behavior of the Object.
In other words, removing Dimensions and Measures or applying functions is disabled when the Object
is locked.
Note: Locking an Object does not affect the applying of Criteria or Drill downs to the Object. The Lock
function only affects the definition part of the Object properties, not the data part. To learn more
about Criteria and drilling, see the Criteria chapter of this guide. Locking and unlocking Objects is
available to Developer users only.
Locking all Objects
Menu: View.
As locking Objects is often used by Developer users to prevent Normal users from changing the
definition of shared Analyses, locking or unlocking all Objects in the Work area can be achieved using
the 'Lock all / Unlock all' function. This function is available to Developer users only.
Trigger Analysis
Smartpad: Properties tab
52 TARGIT User Guide
Trigger Analysis is a function where one Analysis can be linked to another Analysis or Report in such a
way that a click on an object in the first Analysis will trigger the other Analysis or Report to be
activated. The Analysis or Report to be activated can be selected from a dialog that is opened from
the 'Add trigger' link in the Smartpad Properties tab. Two options are available; 'Document' displays
the list of documents equal to the Documents tab in the Smartpad. The appropriate document must
be selected and if the option 'Include criteria when triggering' is checked the activated document is
assigned global criteria according to the dimension values of the element that was clicked in the
object.
The second option is to trigger an URL. This is done by entering an URL in the text field. Activation of
the URL is done similar to activation of a document - when clicking an element in the object with the
trigger, the URL is opened in a new browser window.
A selected trigger may be removed again by clicking the cross next to the trigger in the Smartpad.
Note: The trigger option is not only limited to data objects, but may also be applied to text boxes and
images to extend the flexibility.
Cut, Copy and Paste
Menu: Edit Keyboard: CTRL+X/C/V Right-click menu: Object | Cut/Copy/Paste
These functions are used to cut, copy and paste an active object for use in TARGIT or in other external
applications e.g. word processors. It is possible to cut, copy and paste both graphical and non-
graphical Objects (except What-if and Search objects). The function may also be used to copy
selections as comparisons to other objects.
Copying an object in TARGIT creates an exact copy of the object with all formatting (excluding any
criteria or what-if values) for insertion in the same analysis or another. All data objects may be copied
and also cross tables in reports may be copied from the cross table define mode to an analysis. Note
that locked objects are unlocked when copied.
Copied objects may also be pasted into any program which is able to handle images such as, but not
limited to, image editors and word processors. Copying Table and Cross table objects and also the
data page of graphical objects, will copy the characters (letters/numbers) of the Object to the
clipboard in a format, which is designed to be pasted into a spreadsheet application, e.g. Microsoft
Excel. This is achieved using tabulations - just like indenting text lines which also means, that the
clipboard data may be pasted into word processors and other applications with a sensible result.
Duplicate
Object Functions 53
Menu: Object | New object Right-click menu: New object | Duplicate
The function is used to create a new object in the work area which is an exact copy of the active
Object. The new Object is created in define mode ready to be edited. It is possible to duplicate both
graphical, non-graphical and layout Objects.
Actions
Menu: Object | Hyperrelate Right-click menu: Hyperrelate
Actions enable users to act upon the outcomes of their analyses. By using actions, end users can go
beyond traditional analysis and seek more information on discovered problems and deficiencies. The
two types of actions supported is HTML which transfer HTML to an Internet browser for direct display,
and URL which transfer an Internet URL address to the Internet browser in order to display its
content.
Actions are activated by right-clicking a graphical element or table/cross tabulation element for which
predefined actions should be executed. This brings up an Object menu where the Actions menu item
may be selected. After selection, the lower part of the object area will first show the selected
delimitations followed by a list of available actions. Clicking an action will execute it by opening the
default Internet browser and display HTML or an URL page. Clicking the ?Back to data page? button will
return the object to normal display mode.
When there is only one Action for the selected item, the „list of available actions? is not presented and
the Action is executed directly.
Note: In order to have access to actions, the system manager must have implemented Analysis
Services Actions at proper places in the active cube.
Export table data
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data
Table data or Cross tabulation data from Objects may be exported either directly to Microsoft Excel, to
a CSV (Comma separated) file or to an XML file. When the submenu items „Export to CSV? or „Export
to XML? is selected, a file save dialog opens for proper placement of the file. If the submenu item
„Export to Excel? is chosen, the Table or Cross tabulation data is copied to a new Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.
Hyper Relations
Menu: Object | Hyperrelate Right-click menu: Hyperrelate
54 TARGIT User Guide
A Hyper Relation is a relation from a measure value in an Object or in a report to an analysis that
provides more detailed information about that particular measure. TARGIT uses its built-in Intelligence
to determine which analysis will be the most suitable for providing additional information about the
measure.
Hyper Relations are activated from an analysis object by right-clicking an element in the Object, e.g. a
Revenue value in a cell in a cross table and selecting `TARGIT this´ from the right-click menu or from
Object | Hyperrelate in the menu. A suitable Revenue analysis will then be opened, and the dimension
values that related to the particular element in the source will be transferred as criteria to the target
analysis.
From a Report, in preview mode, Hyper Relations are activated by left-clicking an element in the
report, e.g. a Revenue value. A suitable Revenue analysis will then be opened, and the dimension
values that related to the particular element in the report will be transferred as criteria to the opened
analysis.
Scheduling
Scheduling may be applied to any output option from the TARGIT client. Reports, Analyses,
Dashboards, Storyboards, Notification Agents and even data export from individual objects may be
scheduled. Apart from using the Intelligent Analysis tool to schedule (see the section about Intelligent
Analysis), the Smartpad Documents tab and the right-click menu can also be used to schedule outputs
from TARGIT.
To schedule any of the output options mentioned above, right-click one of the saved documents in the
Smartpad Documents tab and select `Document | Schedule for export´. Data from a single object
may also be scheduled for export by right-clicking an object and selecting Data | Export table data |
Schedule for export. Selecting the menu item will bring up the Job Properties dialogue box where the
properties; Source, Scheduling, Format, Delivery and Batch may be defined:
Source
The Source page only needs to be edited if you want to schedule another source for the output (e.g.
Analysis, Report). This is done by selecting the appropriate file or file element in the file hierarchy.
Only files of the same type as the file originally chosen for export are available e.g. if an analysis was
chosen for export only other analyses in the file system are available. In the bottom of the page a
search field is available that may be used to find the relevant document to schedule. Also note that
only documents of the same file type are shown. The search operators supported in the search field
are the same as for the Documents tab.
If, for some reason, you want to schedule another type of source for export, the job properties dialog
box must be closed and another file must be chosen.
Schedule
On the top of the schedule page scheduling is enabled by clicking the checkbox. Furthermore, a name
for the scheduling may be typed. A default name of the element (analysis, report etc.), that was
chosen for export, is placed in the text box. The schedule page also contains the important definition
Object Functions 55
of frequency and the time of day for the scheduled job. The start date and time may be specified and
if the scheduling must be limited to a specific time interval, an end date may be enabled and entered
as well. Repetition may be specified both for the day the export takes place and for the overall
scheduling.
Format
On the format page the output filename, output format and output language may be changed. The
format options depend on the source used. If an analysis is scheduled, object titles may be hidden in
the output by checking the checkbox. Also the image size for a scheduled analysis may be selected
among the predefined resolutions or a custom resolution may be entered. When scheduling table data
for export, the three file formats; CSV, XML and Excel may be selected and formatted in the same
way as for ordinary table data export. Storyboards may be exported in three available formats;
1024x768, 800x600 and 640x480.
Delivery
On the delivery page two outputs may be selected, either to a folder specified in the TARGIT
Management Studio or by e-mail to one or more recipients. Multiple e-mail addresses are separated
by a semicolon. A subject and a message may be attached to the e-mail by writing in the text boxes.
Global criteria for the analysis/report may be included in the e-mail by checking the check mark
"Include criteria information".
Batch
Several outputs of the type chosen on the delivery page may be sent by using batch processing. This
feature makes it possible to use a chosen dimension and its members as criteria for export of several
analyses or reports. For example, if the dimension 'Salesperson' and two members 'John Rogers' and
'Susan Clarke' are chosen, two outputs are generated. One with the criterion 'Salesperson must be
John Rogers' and one with the criterion 'Salesperson must be Susan Clarke'. To enable this feature
mark the `Enable batch processing´ checkbox on the batch page. The cube must be the same as the
source cube. Choosing a cube will show all dimensions for the cube and selecting a dimension
presents a list of members of the selected dimension. In this list the members may be marked in the
following ways:
A member with this check mark has inherited its inclusion from its parent. For example, if a unique
pair of jeans with model number 123 is marked this way, then the higher level in the hierarchy (e.g.
Jeans) is either included in the scheduled export or inherits inclusion from an even higher level and so
on.
A member with this check mark has inherited its exclusion from its parent, that is, either the parent is
excluded from the scheduled export or inherits exclusion from a higher level and so on.
A member with this check mark is included in the scheduled export independent of the parent
properties.
56 TARGIT User Guide
A member with this check mark is excluded from a scheduled export independent of the parent
properties.
For each of the members included for scheduled export an output will be generated. For example if
three members have been marked as included, three files will be exported according to the properties
defined on the Delivery page. It should be noted, that for hierarchies an output is exported for each
marked lower-level member.
If the chosen dimension has member properties that includes e-mail addresses, the `Email member
property´ may be selected. This option will ensure that scheduled exports will be sent to the
appropriate persons e.g. each salesperson will receive an e-mail with an export of their revenue. In
addition a blind carbon copy (bcc) will be sent to the e-mail address specified on the Delivery page.
Note: To be able to use Batch processing the Corporate Communication Server edition license is
required and the user must have Developer rights. Also note that several e-mail addresses for each
dimension member is supported by separating the e-mail addresses by semicolon in the database.
Administrating Scheduled Jobs
Smartpad: Scheduled Jobs
If you want an overview of Scheduled Jobs select the „Tools | Scheduled Jobs? menu item or the
„Scheduled Jobs? tab in the Smartpad and the work area will change into displaying a list of all active
Scheduled Jobs, which may be sorted on any of its properties by a click in its column header. The size
of the column headers may also be changed by dragging the borders lines. A right-click menu is
available for each job in the list allowing „Run now?, „Open associated file?, „Delete? or 'Properties'
options to be chosen. Selecting a scheduled job in the work area displays the most used job properties
in the Smartpad and the job properties dialogue box will open when one of the small dialogue buttons
( ) or the `Schedule Job´ text is clicked. Selecting any other Smartpad tab will immediately return
the Work area to display the active analysis or report. A logging function is also integrated into the
schedule function and may be opened by highlighting a scheduled job and clicking the `Browse log´
text in the Job Properties tab in the Smartpad. A new window will pop up and display results, start
time, end time and possibly Last value for the jobs that have been processed.
Sentinels
Sentinels are digital watch dogs that may be scheduled to keep an eye on your data. Technically
Sentinels are rules that predict how data evolve based on how data have previously evolved.
To search for Sentinels in your data click on the Sentinels icon in the toolbar or right-click an analysis
and select 'Data | Search for Sentinels'. This opens the 'Search for Sentinels' dialog with the following
tabs:
Object Functions 57
Search Now!
This tab gives an overview of the search and shows the measure to base the prediction on and the
time level used for the Sentinels.
Prediction Measure
The prediction measure is the measure that you want to be warned about. It is typically of great
importance e.g. a KPI.
Time
On the time tab the lowest time dimension level may be defined. E.g. if you set it to month you will be
warned at least one month in advance of predicted changes. Criteria may also be applied to the time
dimension, but it is not recommended unless data are significantly different or faulty since Sentinels
are better, when they are based on as much data as possible.
Note: Dynamic time must be enabled in the cube for the period dimension. Otherwise the search
cannot be completed.
Source Cubes
The scope of the search for Sentinels may be limited to one or more cubes. Including several cubes
may cause more Sentinels to be found and a greater diversity especially if cubes from different areas
of the organization are selected. Only cubes with a shared period dimension are shown in the source
cubes list.
Criteria
This tab provides the option to setup criteria on the dimensions in the selected cubes. As with the time
dimension, setting criteria are not recommended unless data are unsuitable to include in the Sentinel
search. Criteria may also cause the search scope to be too narrow.
When the search has been defined click the 'OK' button and the search for Sentinels starts. The time
the search takes is highly dependent on the amount of data to be searched. When the search has
completed a list of all discovered Sentinels is shown. The Sentinels are sorted according to two things;
First, the confidence percentage, which is an indication of how reliable the Sentinel is based on the
data patterns in the prediction measure and the measures in the Sentinel. Second, a support level
that depends on how much data the Sentinel is based on. I.e. if measures cost and contribution have
similar patterns in 4 out of 5 situations it could be coincidence, but if similar patterns occur in 400 out
of 500 situations the risk that it is a coincidence is lower. The support level is not visible in the listed
Sentinels. The Sentinels with the highest quality (highest confidence and support level) are listed first
and since the Sentinels are based on two parameters the Sentinels are not necessarily listed according
to confidence. Already scheduled Sentinels are not visible in the list, but may be shown by enabling
the check box 'Show already scheduled Sentinel Agents' found in the bottom of the dialog. To select
all Sentinels for scheduling check the 'Select all' option also found below the list of Sentinels.
In the list of Sentinels small red and green arrows are shown next to the measures. For the prediction
measure this indicates that based on prior use of this measure a trend direction is calculated. E.g. if
increasing cost is always used as a negative result, then the arrow pointing upwards is red and the
other green. For the listed Sentinels the arrows indicate how the measures relate to the prediction
58 TARGIT User Guide
measure e.g. if a contribution measure in a Sentinel has a green arrow pointing upwards and a red
downwards, then the previously mentioned prediction measure cost increases a certain percentage if
contribution decreases a certain percentage. The colored arrows may be seen as an indication of the
nature of a measure e.g. cost is mostly seen as negative while contribution is mostly positive.
Visualize Sentinels
The list of Sentinels found in a search does not give an overview of the similarities found in the data.
To get a better view of this, the chart icon next to each Sentinel may be clicked. This opens a chart
where the Sentinel may be visualized. The chart actually includes several charts; one for each of the
source measures (the measures a prediction is based on) and one for the target measure (the
measure with a predicted change). An explanation object is also visible in the right side of the work
area explaining the Sentinel rule and the coloring of the charts. Notice that these Sentinel charts
always show an area chart with a measure and the Period dimension.
The coloring of a chart follow the trend of the measure in it e.g. if the measure cost decreases the
color of a period that adheres to the Sentinel rule is colored green and vice versa for e.g. revenue.
The trend of a measure may be reversed by clicking the smiley icon in the toolbar and select
'Configure'. In each of the charts 3 colors may be seen; a green color if it is a period where all
measures adhere to the Sentinel rule and the trend of the measure is good e.g. cost decreases. A red
color if it is a period where all measures adhere to the Sentinel rule and the trend of the measure is
bad e.g. cost increases. And at last yellow if the target measure does not adhere to the rule, but the
source measures do. When periods are colored yellow they are candidates for uncertainty as the data
patterns seen in the source measures are not seen in the target measure. Therefore, a lot of yellow
areas causes the uncertainty of the Sentinel rule to increase, which is indicated by a decrease in the
rule's confidence. All the grey areas are not colored because no patterns are seen in these periods
across the measures.
All the charts may be drilled like normal objects in an analysis and the object type may also be
changed. By default the criteria 'Period is less than or equal to this month' is set, but other criteria
may be applied from the criteria editor or the criteria bar. At any time when working with Sentinel
rules, the Sentinel icon in the toolbar may be clicked to see the list of Sentinels found in the last
search.
Note: Already scheduled Sentinels may also be visualized from the scheduled jobs list by right-
clicking the job and select 'Visualize Sentinel'.
Scheduling Sentinels
To schedule the Sentinels select them by checking the check box next to each of them. Then go to the
Schedule tab and enter one or more e-mail addresses along with the start time for the schedule.
Multiple e-mail addresses are separated by a semicolon. The schedule runs on the first day of the
period chosen in the Time tab e.g. first day of each month. When clicking 'Schedule' the schedule is
added to the Scheduled Job list, where additional settings may be applied by double-clicking the job
and then setting more detailed schedule and delivery settings.
Object Functions 59
Note: Detailed information about administrating scheduled jobs can be found in the section about
Scheduling and detailed information on the Schedule and Delivery options can be found in the section
about Notification Agents.
TARGIT Cloud
Toolbar: TARGIT Cloud icon Menu: Tools User Preferences menu
TARGIT Cloud is an add-on to TARGIT only available to customers with software maintenance. TARGIT
Cloud is a web portal (cloud.targit.com) where users may upload and analyze data ad-hoc as well as
share data with others. For more information on TARGIT Cloud please see the website.
The website may be opened from the menu, Intelligent Analysis tool and toolbar. The first time a
TARGIT Cloud reference is clicked a dialog appears where e-mail and password must be entered for
registration. After registering an e-mail is sent with an activation link and once activated TARGIT
Cloud is ready for use. For more information on uploading and analyzing data please see the website.
Notification Agents
Right-click menu: 'Notify me when...'
Notification Agents are useful when you need to monitor the development of key measures.
Notification Agents are scheduled to regularly check the current state of the measure. The current
value is then compared to the previous value, and if the pre-defined condition has been met the
Notification Agent will automatically send out an e-mail.
An easy way to create a new, scheduled Notification Agent is to base it on an element in an object in
an existing analysis. Simply right-click the element – a bar in a bar chart, or a cell in a cross table –
and select one of the three menu items „Notify me when...´ to create a new, context based
notification agent. Notification Agents may also be generated using Intelligent Analysis.
If any of the options above are used to apply a notification agent, the Job Properties dialogue box will
pop up and four properties may be changed; Condition, Criteria, Schedule and Delivery:
Condition
On the Condition page the measure to monitor and a corresponding member may be selected as the
source data. The value that triggers the notification may also be selected on the Condition page by
making an expression combined by values from the selection and input boxes. If a goal measure
exists this is set by clicking the `Select goal measure´ text and selecting a measure. If a time
dimension exist in the cube, this may be used to monitor the trend of the chosen measure. To set the
trend monitor, click the text `Monitor the trend of Measure´ and select the trend period. When the
trend is monitored the notification is based on changes in the trend value instead of changes in actual
data for the period where the notification agent is run. The trend value is based on a regression line
for the given measure over the time period.
60 TARGIT User Guide
Criteria
The Criteria page holds a list of the criteria that have been added to the notification. Criteria are
handled in the same way as described in the section about the Criteria editor.
Schedule
The notification is enabled on the Schedule page if the check box `Enabled´ is marked. Furthermore,
a name for the notification scheduling may be typed. As a default the name of the element (analysis,
report etc.), that was chosen for export, is placed in the text box. The schedule page also contain the
important definition of frequency and the time of day for the scheduled job. The start date and time
may be specified and if the scheduling must be limited to a specific time interval, an end date and
time may be enabled and entered as well. Repetition may be specified both for the day the export
takes place and for the overall scheduling.
Delivery
On the Delivery page an e-mail address must be supplied. Multiple e-mail addresses must be
separated by a semicolon. The notification e-mail by default includes a standard subject. This may be
exchanged with a custom text by selecting the button next to the empty text field and entering a text.
A longer text may be supplied in the Message field. This text will be the first text in the notification e-
mail. Default explanation and link to the context and properties for the notification are selected by
default and may be disabled by removing their respective checkmarks. The notification context is the
analysis where the source measure was selected from and the link to this analysis is automatically
inserted, but may be removed or another analysis may be selected. In the bottom of the dialog there
is an option to 'Prevent automatic notifications in Desktop clients'. Checking this option disables any
automatic notifications based on this notification that may appear in the Desktop client.
Note: Notification agents requires normal user rights. Detailed information about administrating
scheduled notification agents can be found in the section about Scheduling.
Add object Notification Agent
Right-click menu: Object
Object notifications are useful for defining exact notifications on data elements in an object. When
creating an object notification the condition and scheduling settings are specified in the job properties
dialog when applying the agent. Notification Agents may be inspected and edited in the Smartpad
„Scheduled Jobs´ tab.
Smiley
Object Functions 61
In the right side of the toolbar a smiley icon visualizes the overall trend for an analysis' data. Every
analysis is automatically rated based on a trend calculation given the most used measure and a time
dimension. The result is visualized by the smiley icon which has three states; happy, neutral and sad.
Hovering the mouse over the icon will show a popup box that explains the reason for the state. E.g. if
the measure is revenue and the dimension is period three different states could be: `I am happy
because revenue pr. period is increasing´, `I am sad because revenue pr. period is decreasing´ or `I
am inconclusive because revenue pr. period is unchanged´. If, for some reason, the trend calculation
cannot be calculated, the following text will be shown instead: `I am unable to determine the result of
revenue pr. period ´.
Clicking the smiley icon opens a smiley settings dialog with two options: Show Me... and Configure.
Selecting Show Me... creates a bar chart in the current analysis with details about the smiley data.
The Configure option makes it possible to enable/disable the smiley function and change the default
measure and dimension upon which the trend is calculated. The changes must be within the same
cube. The trend direction may also be changed. This may be applicable because of the different nature
of the measures e.g. increasing revenue is positive while increasing cost is negative.
Note: The smiley is based on completed periods only e.g. if period criteria is less than or equal to this
month, only months less than this month are considered in the smiley state.
Height
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
This function allows control over the height of the Object measured as a fraction of the actual height
of the Work area. Changing the height of an Object also changes the height of adjacent Objects. When
the available parameters are not fulfilling requirements, the mouse may be used to drag Object
borders to the required positions. Furthermore right-clicking a horizontal Object border opens a menu
where Vertical distribution of Objects may be specified.
Width
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
This function allows control over the width of the Object measured as a fraction of the actual width of
the Work area. Changing the width of an Object also changes the width of adjacent Objects. When the
available parameters are not fulfilling requirements, the mouse may be used to drag Object borders to
the required positions. Furthermore, right-clicking a vertical Object border opens a menu where
Horizontal distribution of Objects may be specified.
Maximize / Restore
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
62 TARGIT User Guide
Working with an Analysis with multiple objects it may sometimes be difficult to see the details of a
single object. Double-click the header of any Object to maximize this Object to the size of the Work
Area. Double-click the header again to restore the Object to its original size.
Map locations
Menu: Object | Map | Edit locations
Maps are used to display data in relation to geographical locations. Data such as Store or Country
would be a good choice of dimension when working with Maps. Map objects with unassigned locations
will show a 'Map locations' button in the title bar of the Object window. This button activates the
locations editor for defining the locations of unassigned dimension values and for changing the
coordinates of already assigned locations.
On the editors Map image there may be small dots, each of which corresponds to a location of a
record of the Country dimension. To reassign a location, simply drag the dot to a new location using
the mouse.
On the right hand side of the editor is a Locations column contains the values of the dimension used
for map locations. Dimension values in bold has already been assigned a location, whereas dimension
values in regular print has not yet been assigned a location on the map. To assign these values to
locations on the map, simply drag the values from the column to the location wanted. It is also
possible to assign position coordinates to a selected location by entering the X/Y coordinates in the
edit fields just below the locations column. The bottom left corner of the map has coordinates (0,0)
and the top right corner has coordinates (999,999).
If the map is a geographical map, it may be mapped to the globe simply by entering the globe
coordinates for the maps top left and bottom right corner in the appropriate edit fields and pressing
the 'Apply globe mapping' button just below.
In the Map object definition window, the selection line in the middle is used for the dimension used as
locations for the map. Records from other dimensions such as Time or Product would normally have
no defined locations on the map, but by adding custom images any dimension could be used with the
Map object.
Globe locations
Menu: Object | Globe | Edit locations
Globes are used to display data in relation to geographical locations. Data such as Store or Country
would be a good choice of dimension when working with Globes. Globe objects with unassigned
locations will show a 'Globe locations' button in the title bar of the Object window. This button
Object Functions 63
activates the locations editor for defining the locations of unassigned dimension values and for
changing the coordinates of already assigned locations. Defining Globe locations is performed in the
same way as defining Map locations, with a few exceptions. The process is described in the Map
locations section.
One difference from the Map locations editor is the location coordinates edit fields, as the Globe needs
the geographical coordinates with Longitude and Latitude instead of the X/Y coordinates used in the
Map editor. The coordinates must be entered in degrees, arc minutes and arc seconds East/West and
North/South. The coordinates for Hjørring, Denmark are shown as an example above the text box
where you can enter the coordinates for the selected dimension value, for instance: 10 degrees, 1
minute and 48 seconds East and 57 degrees, 26 minutes and 24 seconds North is written like this:
10o1’48”E; 57o26’24”N
Another difference is that the globe may be rotated and zoomed just like in the data object. Rotation
is achieved by dragging the mouse while the right mouse button is pressed, or with the keyboard you
can use Alt+Arrow keys to rotate the globe. You may zoom in or out with the + or - keys in the
numeric keypad.
Note: Editing Globe locations requires Developer user rights.
Gauge configuration
Smartpad: Properties tab | Gauge
Gauges are used to display the value, progress or trend of a measure or a calculation relative to a
fixed or dynamic scale. Configuring the look and span of a Gauge object is done from the Smartpad
Properties tab. Clicking Gauge in the Smartpad Properties tab changes the Smartpad to display
properties for the currently selected gauge object. The list of active gauges is displayed like a
hierarchical structure. Each gauge object may contain one or more gauges, and each gauge may
contain one or more values, which are the measures or calculations that are to be displayed in the
gauge.
Object property – Adding and removing gauges
When the top node, the „Gauge? line, in the Active gauges list has been selected, use the ?+ Add
gauge? option to add a new gauge to the current gauge object. Likewise, when a specific gauge has
been selected, use the ?–? option to remove the gauge from the current gauge object.
Object property – Arranging gauges
The gauge arrangement property is only available when two or more gauges have been added to the
gauge object. By default the gauges are arranged automatically. The Auto arrange option may be
overridden by selecting Horizontal or Vertical arrangement.
64 TARGIT User Guide
It is also possible to move a selected gauge up and down in the hierarchical structure by using the
„Move gauge up/down” buttons. Such an action will change the position of the gauge in relation to the
other gauges in the gauge object.
Object property – Hyperrelate
This property contains a check box to enable/disable automatic hyperrelate when the object is clicked.
By default a hyperrelate is performed when a gauge object is clicked. Disabling this property selects
the object instead when it is clicked.
Gauge property – Title
Add a title for the selected gauge or change the existing title. The gauge title will be displayed above
or below the gauge in the gauge object according to the user?s choice. Furthermore the title may be
formatted with regard to font, font size, style and color.
Gauge property – Small gauge
The Small gauge property is only available when two or more gauges have been added to the gauge
object. Use this option to shrink the selected gauge to 50 % of its original size. Other gauges in the
object will use the freed space and may as a consequence grow in size.
Gauge property – Visualizations
When a gauge is highlighted in the `active gauges´ area in the Smartpad, use this option to select the
type of gauge. Each type is useful in different contexts and for different purposes. Also, as will be
described later, each type is defined via different properties:
Speedometer: The Speedometer gauge is the classical gauge where the measured value is
displayed as a needle on a speedometer type background. The Speedometer gauge is a
single, static image where only the location of the needles will change according to data.
The user may add multiple values to be measured or to be set up as a goal. Each of the
added values will result in an extra needle in the Speedometer gauge.
Icon: The Icon gauge is an alternative gauge where the gauge image itself will reflect the
value of the measured data. The Icon gauge is typically based on multiple images where
each image has been related to a certain relative data range. Typical Icon gauge images
may be Smileys or Traffic lights. The user may add another measure to be set up as a goal,
but the Icon gauge is only capable of displaying information about one measure value.
Progress bar: The Progress bar gauge displays the progress of the measured value. The
progress bar has been defined by a minimum and a maximum value and the relative
progress is displayed as a colored bar between these two boundaries. The Progress bar
gauge is a single, static image where only the displayed progress will change according to
data. The user may add another measure to be set up as a goal, but the Progress bar gauge
is only capable of displaying information about one measure value.
Object Functions 65
Gauge property – Scale
Many gauges may initially not have a scale present. E.g. a gauge without a scale might be a
Speedometer without numbers along the perimeter. The Scale property makes it possible to add a
scale to the gauge perimeter. The scale is automatically derived from the minimum and maximum
values of the gauge span, and formatting, such as number format, font size, prefix and postfix may
furthermore be changed.
Gauge property – Value
The Value property makes it possible to display the current value of one of the measures or
calculations that have been added to the gauge. The value will be displayed somewhere inside the
gauge.
Gauge property – Minimum and Maximum span
Click the More properties option to go to the second level of gauge properties. In this level of the
gauge properties the user may define the gauge span by defining the minimum and maximum values
of this span which may be defined either automatically, manually or dynamically:
Automatic: This is the default option defined by these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest
value of either MaxValue*1.1 or Goal*1.1” and “MinSpan = the lowest value of
either MinValue*0.9 or Goal*0.9” where MaxValue and MinValue are the highest and
lowest values, respectively, among the available values.
Manual: This option allows the user to enter a user defined gauge span, using fixed
minimum and maximum values.
Dynamic: This option allows the user to select different measures as minimum or maximum
values of the gauge span. For example, if Revenue is measured, then it might be desirable
to set up Budget as the maximum gauge span. Not only other measures, but also
calculations, may be defined as Dynamic minimum or maximum. Furthermore, if a
dimension has been added to the object, e.g. Time, the user may define if this maximum
value should be derived from the last element, a specific element or from a range of
elements in this dimension.
Gauge property – Visualization and Rotation
Click the More properties option to go to the third and last level of the gauge properties. From the
Visualizations options the user may choose the preferred graphical presentation of the gauge. A
number of predefined visualizations are available for Speedometer gauges, Icon gauges and Progress
bar gauges. Each gauge type has its own set of visualizations. Other rotations may be selected in case
the default rotation is not suitable.
66 TARGIT User Guide
Gauge property – Adding and removing values
When one of the gauges in the Active gauges list has been selected, use the ?+ Add value? option to
add a new value to the current gauge. Likewise, when a specific value has been selected, use the ?–?
option to remove the value from the current gauge.
Value property – Selecting source data
The value to be displayed in the gauge may be selected from the list of available source data. The way
to display the selected value may be chosen from several options:
The selected value below: This option selects the value to be displayed as the measurable
value in the gauge. As a needle in a Speedometer gauge, as the value that determines the
proper image in the Icon gauge or as the progress of the bar in the Progress bar gauge.
A static value as goal: This option allows the user to enter a static goal for the selected
measure. This goal will be taken into consideration when determining Biggest Opportunities
or Biggest Problems.
Auto adjusted goal for the selected value: This option will calculate an automatic goal
for the selected measure. This goal will be taken into consideration when determining
Biggest Opportunities or Biggest Problems. The formula to calculate this goal is Goal = Max
Value + (MaxValue – MinValue)*0.2.
The selected value below as goal: This option allows the user to select a different
measure or a calculation to become the goal for the selected measure. For example, if
Revenue is the selected measure, then it might be desirable to set up Budget as the goal.
The trend for the selected measure: This option is relevant only when the gauge should
work as a Trend gauge. When this option is selected, a regression calculation is
automatically added to the gauge object. This regression is the basis of the trend direction.
Depending on the measure upon which a trend is displayed, it may be necessary to change
the direction of the trend. E.g. Positive trend is good is normally true for Revenue and
Contribution Margin, while Negative trend is good is normally true for Costs and Complaints.
Value property – Use default gauge span
When working with just one value in a gauge, this value will be displayed relative to the default gauge
span, i.e. the gauge span as defined by the gauge properties. When working with multiple values in
one gauge, the user has an option to disable the default gauge span for the individual values. Once
the default gauge span has been disabled for a value, it can be defined, for this value only, in a
manner similar to the gauge span definition.
Value property –Value Visualization (for Speedometer gauge
type only)
For Speedometer gauges the needles may have two different appearances: A thick needle and a thin
needle – selected as Default and Alternative 1 respectively.
Object Functions 67
Value property –Gauge Intervals (for Icon gauge type only)
Icon gauges work in intervals, with one image associated to each interval. When a value has been
selected for an Icon gauge a number, equal to the number of images in the Icon gauge, of evenly
distributed intervals will be created.
Use the Add interval option to add intervals to the Icon gauge. The added interval will split the
currently selected Gauge Interval into two equally sized intervals. It is most often only relevant to add
as many intervals as the number of different images in the Icon gauge.
Use the Edit Interval select the image for the interval and to redefine the range or the image of the
selected interval. The upper and lower values of the intervals are relative values on a 0 % to 100 %
scale. The actual span of the Icon gauge is determined by the minimum and maximum values of the
Icon gauge span definition. The Threshold value is always the lower value of the interval. When
editing an interval, expanding the icon image will display all available images for this Icon gauge. The
Inclusive option determines whether the Threshold value should be included in the current interval or
not.
Formatting functions
Auto Agent
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Object Keyboard: CTRL+A Right-click menu: Object
Auto Agent is a variation of a Color Agent. As opposed to the user defined Color Agent, the Auto Agent
processes the Object automatically and adds coloring to the Object elements based on the average,
minimum and maximum values of the Measure.
There are three states of this function, the first time the Agent is activated for the Object, the coloring
scheme is red for the smallest value, green for the largest value and shades of these colors for the
intermediate values. The second time the Agent is activated for the Object the coloring scheme is the
opposite, green for the smallest values, red for the largest value and shades of these colors for the
intermediate values. The third time the Agent is activated all Auto Agent coloring is removed.
Show criteria
Menu: Object | Criteria Right-click menu: Object | Criteria
When this function is activated, the bottom part of the Object will be used to display the criteria which
influences the data presented by the Object. In order to preserve space for the actual data
68 TARGIT User Guide
presentation, the criteria are displayed as one long text string. A Show or Hide criteria in all Objects is
available in the View menu.
Regression
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Data | Regression Right-click menu: Data | Regression
This function adds a regression column to the data page. The function is a toggle. If clicked once a
linear regression is added to the object and if clicked once more the regression is changed to a best fit
polynomial regression. The best fit regression is added as a 1. to 4. degree polynomial depending on
what describes the data best. If the best fit is actually a 1. degree polynomial (linear regression) for
the displayed data the regression function only toggles between the best fit linear regression and
none. The object explanation displays the type of regression added and also the regression formula
and variation among the time periods.
Regressions may also be added for several measures. In this case the regression line is colored in the
same color as the corresponding measure.
Note: The Time dimension must be on the X-axis in order to activate the Regression menu item.
Linear correlation
Smartpad: Properties tab
This function adds a linear correlation to a scatter or bubble chart. The linear correlation is a line
calculated from the values in the chart and expresses their relation. The object explanation shows the
line formula and a percentage of how well the line explains the value relationship (higher is better).
Show legend
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function toggles the hide/show status of the legend box at the right side of graphical Objects. The
legend may also be placed in different spots in the object by changing position in the chart properties
dialog.
Vertical axis labels
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right click menu: Chart
Object Functions 69
This function changes the angle of the text on the X-axis of graphs. The option may be used when the
explaining text lines on the X-axis of a chart are too long or if there are too many of them. Either one
of these cases will affect the text lines making some of them hidden due to lack of space. Pressing the
'X-axis text angle' button will turn the text lines 90 degrees counterclockwise to make room for all the
text lines. The trade-off is that there will be less room for the graphical elements of the chart.
Show labels
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Chart Keyboard: CTRL+L Right-click menu: Chart
Labels are used to display data values on graphical Objects. When the 'Show labels' option is enabled,
there will be yellow labels on all the active graph elements. Labels are also shown as hints when
hovering the mouse over an active element of a graphical Object.
There is a wide range of available formats of labels and hints. The format may be edited using the
Smartpad Properties Labels and hints editor, see below.
Show axis titles
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This option may be used to add a title to the axes. The titles shown will be the name(s) of the
measure(s) that belongs to the axis.
3D chart
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used on pie, bar, line and area charts. The '3D effect' function is used to switch
between three different views of the graphical Object: 2D, 3D and static 3D. The difference between
3D and static 3D is that turn and tilt functionality is available for 3D Objects using the mouse or arrow
keys.
The function may be used on an Object both during definition of the Object and when displaying
actual data.
Cylindrical
70 TARGIT User Guide
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used to toggle cylindrical shape of a bar chart on or off. The default shape of a
bar chart is rectangular.
Note: For the cylindrical function to take effect, the bar chart must be viewed in 3D mode.
Gradient rendering
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used on graphical objects to make the colors of an object gradient. This will give
the objects a shaded look.
Multi series
Smartpad: Properties tab (in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
The 'Multi series' function is available to some of the graphical Objects. It will rearrange the graphical
elements on a chart making the values of the data more visible. The rearrangement of the graphical
Object will have no effect on which data the axes represent. However, the value range of the axes
may be changed to fit the new arrangement of the Object.
The effect of this function will vary depending on 2D or 3D view as well as the number of dimensions
selected. There will be a number of different ways to arrange data depending on the chart type. The
available multi series settings are Side by Side, Back-to-Back, Stacked and Stacked percentage.
Globe projection
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Map
The 'Globe projection' function offers multiple ways of graphically presenting Globes. Beside the
classic Globe, a Globe Object can be shown in two different kinds of map-style layouts. Changing the
projection of a Globe will not affect the locations selected for the Object.
Average crosshair
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog)Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
Object Functions 71
This function adds two lines to a Scatter chart object, a vertical and a horizontal (crosshair) in order to
show the average values for the X- and Y-axis.
Align
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Align Right-click menu: Align
This function may be used to align text in Layout Objects. There are options for Left, Right and
Horizontal center alignment plus for Top, Bottom and Vertical Center. The individual options may be
selected as submenu items or by clicking buttons in the Smartpad Properties tab.
In Layout Objects of type Image, the selected background image may also be specified to align as
described above. In case the background image should cover the whole Object area independent of
Object proportions, selecting the 'Ignore proportions' option will stretch the image to fill the whole
Object area both vertically and horizontally.
Formatting options
Smartpad: Properties tab.
Formatting options on the Smartpad Properties tab consist of a series of links that opens a dialog or
changes the Smartpad to display more options. 'Title and Explanation', 'Chart properties', 'Cross
tabulation', 'Visibility', 'Labels and hints', 'Numbers', 'Dynamic captions' and 'Element colors'.
Title and explanation
This dialog may be opened for all graphical or table object types and is used to set titles and
explanations on objects. By default an automatic title is generated from the data in the object. A
Custom title may be entered in the text field and translated to all supported languages by clicking the
globe. The last option is to hide any titles from being displayed in the object.
A custom explanation may be entered in the large text field and translated in the same way as the
title by clicking the globe and entering a translation. It is displayed in the object explanation.
Chart properties
The content of the chart properties dialog may change depending on the selected chart type, but the
three tabs; Chart, Axes and Background are always present.
Chart
The chart tab includes options to enable/disable the legend and select the legend position in the
object. 3D effect, cylindrical bars and gradient may also be enabled/disabled for some charts.
72 TARGIT User Guide
The 'Multi series' function is available to some of the charts. It will rearrange the graphical elements
on a chart making the values of the data more visible. The rearrangement of the graphical object will
have no effect on which data the axes represent. However, the value range of the axes may be
changed to fit the new arrangement of the object. The effect of this function varies depending on 2D
or 3D view as well as the number of dimensions selected. There is a number of different ways to
arrange data depending on the chart type. The available multi series settings are Side by Side, Back-
to-Back, Stacked and Stacked percentage.
Axes
In the axes tab dimension grid lines may be enabled/disabled. Options to display axis titles and
vertical axis labels are also available. For more information on these options, please refer to the 'Show
axis titles' and 'Vertical axis labels' sections in this chapter.
Show axis titles
Vertical axis labels
Measures and calculations are placed on the same axis by default. In the list of measures and
calculations the axis may be specified for each. This makes it easier to view data where the span in
data values across measures/calculations is large.
Charts contain a coordinate plane with X- and Y-axes. The properties of these axes are set
automatically based on the span of data values and the type of graph. Some of these properties, such
as show/hide grid lines, number format, upper and lower limit and minimum step size may be
formatted by clicking the links below the measures/calculations list to improve the graphical
visualization.
Background
In the background tab any of the backgrounds added through TARGIT Management Studio may be
inserted as object background.
Map
The map dialog provides an option to select one of the maps added in TARGIT Management Studio.
Scalable map
Connections to several scalable maps may exist. In the scalable maps dialog one of the connected
maps may be selected for the object. Automatic zoom is enabled by default on a map and causes the
scalable map to zoom according to the data in it. For example, if criteria is set on a map, such that
only data for Denmark and Germany is represented, then the map is automatically zoomed to a point
that exactly contains Denmark and Germany.
Object Functions 73
Below is a list of layers with visibility properties. Each layer may be set to one of the properties
'Show', 'Only data' (only elements in layer if data are available) or 'Hide'. If a group layer is available
in the GIS-map, settings may be applied for the entire group layer instead of applying the same
settings to all individual layers.
Cross tabulation
This feature allows individual rows or ranges of rows in a Table object, Cross tabulation object or the
data page of a graphical object to be formatted. When a data object has been selected for formatting
the following options are available; Background color, Border and Font. Selecting the Background
color option opens a small color selector with options to enter HSV, RGB or HTML color values or
select a color from the spectrum or the predefined colors. Selecting Border provides options to change
the border width and color it with the same color picker as for background color. The Font option
opens a new dialog where all of the fonts installed on the system may be selected. Other options such
as font size, color and style may also be selected and in the bottom of the dialog an example text box
shows the formatting of the current selections. In the right side of the dialog all recently used fonts
are shown not just in this analysis but across the application. Note that checking the 'Use default font'
checkbox overrides the selected font and size. For each data object the formatting may be copied and
inserted in other data objects. These options are available below the three aforementioned formatting
options.
Visibility
Measures in the object may be hidden either completely or for a specified range of dimension values.
In case of hierarchical dimensions, there will be options to hide / show individual dimension levels,
and even calculated columns or rows may be hidden. Results of the selections may immediately be
observed in the selected Object in the Analysis Work area.
Labels and hints
The editor opened by this link allows specifications of the content of labels and hints. Hints are labels
which will be shown when the mouse is hovered over an active element of a graphical Object. Labels
are hints which may be permanently visible in the Object. The editor?s first element is a button to
Show / Hide labels. The format section of the editor shows the „All? radio button followed by a list of
measures and calculated fields in the object, each preceded by a checkbox and a radio button. The
checkbox controls if the label is shown or not, and an active radio button indicates that the Formatting
options in the section below are relevant for this measure or calculated field, or all if that radio button
is active. The Formatting options section shows a checklist of available options. Checked items are
made visible in the label and the hint for the selected measure(s) and / or calculation(s) or all.
74 TARGIT User Guide
Numbers
This link opens a dialog where a measure or calculation may be selected if there are several measures
or calculations (numbers) in the selected object. After selecting a number to format, the dialog
changes and formatting of the number shown in the top of the dialog may be performed or another
number may be selected by clicking the number.
Three formatting options exist for measures; Database default, Numeric and Time. The database
default keeps the formatting set in the database. Numeric formatting enables advanced formatting of
numeric values (see the subsection below for description) and for time formatting the source time unit
in the database may be selected and a display unit to be displayed in the object may also be selected.
For each number the cell alignment may be set and if the object is of the type Bar, Line or Area chart
the object type may be interchanged between these three types.
To the right of the formatting area two fields are shown. The upper field 'Copy from...' makes it
possible to copy the formatting from other formatted numbers in the object. If the object has chart
axes it is also possible to copy the formatting of the left and right chart axes to the current number
formatting. The lower field 'Recently used' displays the five most recently used format strings for the
user.
Numeric formatting
When the numeric formatting is selected a frame with a format string is available. By default the
database default is selected. The 'Format string option provides a text field and a drop box. The drop
box contains several predefined formatting options. The text field shows the selection from the drop
box. A custom format may also be entered according to the numeric value string format for MDX or
the custom format in Microsoft Excel. Some of the formatting characters are shown in the following
table and for further information please refer to the MDX or Excel documentation.
A user-defined format expression for numbers can have anywhere from one to four sections separated
by semicolons. If the expression contains one section the format expression applies to all values, for
two sections the first section applies to positive values and zeros, the second to negative values, for
three sections the first section applies to positive values, the second to negative values, and the third
to zeros and for four sections the first section applies to positive values, the second to negative
values, the third to zeros, and the fourth to null values. If the 'Advanced format' text is clicked in the
numeric formatting frame, each section may be specified individually and the result is displayed in the
'Format string' drop box.
Character Description
0 Represents a digit placeholder that displays a digit or a zero (0). If
the number has a digit in the position where the zero appears in the
format string, the formatted value displays the digit. Otherwise, the
formatted value displays a zero in that position. E.g. 0.0 represents a
number followed by one decimal (1234.5)
Object Functions 75
# Represents a digit placeholder that displays a digit or nothing. If the
expression has a digit in the position where the number sign (#)
appears in the format string, the formatted value displays the digit.
Otherwise, the formatted value displays nothing in that position E.g.
#.# represents a number followed by one decimal (1234.5) or no
decimals if there are no decimals in the original number (1234).
. Represents a decimal placeholder that determines how many digits
are displayed to the left and right of the decimal separator e.g. #.##
(1234.56). If the format expression contains only number sign (#)
characters to the left of the period (.), numbers smaller than 1 start
with a decimal separator. To display a leading zero displayed with
fractional numbers, use zero (0) as the first digit placeholder to the
left of the decimal separator. Notice that on some languages a
comma is used as a decimal separator.
, Represents a thousand separator that separates thousands from
hundreds within a number that has four or more places to the left of
the decimal separator e.g. #,#.# (1,234.5). Standard use of the
thousand separator is specified if the format contains a thousand
separator enclosed in digit placeholders (0 or #). Note that the
thousand separator may also be used to round thousands e.g. the
number format 0, rounds the number 1234567890 to 1234568 and
0,, rounds it to 1235 and so on.
% Represents a percentage placeholder. The expression is multiplied by
100. The percent character (%) is inserted in the position where the
percentage appears in the format string e.g. #.00 % (0.12 is
formatted as 12.00 %).
"AB" Displays the string inside the double quotation marks ("Percentage"
#.00 % is formatted as Percentage 12.00 %).
When selecting one of the predefined strings or creating a custom string, the example below the drop
box shows how the format takes effect (note that the General Number string displays numbers
without thousand separator and with the number of decimals available from the data source, which is
not necessarily the 2 decimals shown in the example). The decimal and thousand separators are
formatted according to the client regional settings and the currency format string is formatted
according to the currency language set in TARGIT Management Studio. The format may also be
reversed by selecting the 'Reverse sign' check box. This reverses all numbers, e.g. 1234,56 is
displayed as -1234,56, except for the English (Worldwide) currency where the number is enclosed in
parentheses instead.
In the advanced format the format string may be customized in the same way as in the basic format,
but each of the four aforementioned sections may be specified individually. Clicking the 'Specify' text
changes the dialog to show additional settings for the selected section. The settings include: Leading
text - adds the specified text in front of the number, Group thousands - groups thousands by adding
76 TARGIT User Guide
thousand separators, Min. number of digits - specifies the minimum number of digits missing digits
are replaced by zeroes, Min. number of decimals - specifies the minimum number of decimals, Trailing
text - appends the specified text after the number, Percentage (multiply by 100) - multiplies the
number by 100 and adds the percentage character to the end of the number, Unit size - divides the
number by the selected unit size.
Note: To be able to format all numbers on the client side the setting 'Client-side number formatting'
must be enabled in TARGIT Management Studio. If this option is not enabled the formatting is based
on the system language of the server running the TARGIT Server. Of course this formatting may be
changed in the client, but only for individual objects or reports. By enabling 'Client-side number
formatting' the number formatting is done on the client according to the regional settings language
thereby enabling the formatting to be effective in all existing objects and reports without any changes
to them. It should be noted that scheduled analyses and reports are formatted according to the
language selected in the scheduled job and the default language is the client language.
Dynamic captions
This feature can be used to create manually defined dynamic captions. There are 2 ways to set
Dynamic captions. You can right click your crosstable on the heading that you wish to make dynamic
or when your object is active you can find “Format dynamic captions” under Properties in the
Smartpad. If you use the last option, the Properties tab in the Smartpad will change and show
captions for the elements of the highlighted object e.g. measures or calculations. Clicking one of the
elements changes the Smartpad again such that the caption for the chosen element can be
configured. Using the first option to set dynamic captions provides two options; setting dynamic
captions for a single member or all members on a level. After making an appropriate choice the
Smartpad changes and the dynamic captions may be configured.
Editing captions is done in the text box in the top of the Smartpad. Captions may be entered manually
or chosen from the list of references placed below the text box. Captions are entered in the format
{referenceostfix}, where the postfix may be first, last or all depending on which values should be
included in the caption:
Postfix Description
First The first value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
Last The last value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
All All values of the chosen dimension are inserted in the caption
separated by colons.
The default reference for a caption is cellvalue without a postfix.
Note: Dynamic captions for a member may be reset to the original caption by clicking on the caption
in the Smartpad and clicking 'Reset to original caption' under the caption text box.
Object Functions 77
Element colors
Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart | Format element colors
A dialog opens with options to set the object color or shared color for each dimension member.
Clicking the assigned color or the 'Assign color' text opens the color picker, where a color may be
chosen by moving the color slider and selecting a color from the color square. Standard or recent
colors may also be selected and HSV, RGB or HTML color codes may be entered to set a specific color.
Note: The difference between using the visibility and color formatting options and their corresponding
Visibility and Color Agents is as follows: the formatting options are used for promptly, unconditional
formatting of measures, dimension values or calculated values. Intelligent Agents are designed to
automatically apply the formatting according to certain conditions, as defined by the user.
Any color agents or auto agents override the manually formatted colors. Editing shared colors is
limited to users with Developer rights.
Intelligent Agents
Smartpad: Properties tab
Intelligent Agents are designed to implement actions which are based on certain conditions in actual
data in the Data Warehouse. Standard conditions such as above or below average and positive or
negative values are predefined and easily selectable. If more elaborate conditions are required,
options are supplied for user designed conditions using the same formula syntax as in the Advanced
Calculations Editor.
There are two types of Intelligent Agents, Color and Gauge Agents and Visibility Agents,
both accessible on the Smartpad Properties tab. One or more Intelligent Agents may be specified for
each measure, dimension value or calculated value, and in case two or more Agents exist for the
same value, there will be an option for rearranging them in order to control the sequence in which
they are applied.
Color and Gauge Agents
Color and gauge agents are used on cross tables and may be represented in many forms e.g. as small
gauges, icons or colored text in individual cross table cells. Color and gauge agents may be applied to
all objects, but the visual effects e.g. gauges or colors are only applied to the underlying cross table.
When the 'Color and Gauge Agents' link is clicked a new properties area is opened in the Smartpad. If
the list with color and gauge agents is empty a new agent is created by clicking any of the Smart
Agents listed. After clicking a Smart Agent a variant of that specific Smart Agent must be chosen and
the measure or calculation to apply the agent on must be chosen. Either a color or a gauge agent has
78 TARGIT User Guide
now been created depending on the choice of Smart Agent. The color or gauge agent is now listed in
the color and gauge agent list. The purpose of the Smart Agents is to be able to create agents with
ease and in very few clicks. If the need arise to add more details to an agent simply click its condition
in the list of agents and the agent properties dialog opens.
The agent properties dialog consist of four tabs on the left side. each of the tabs are described below:
Condition
The agent condition specifies when an agent should be triggered. The syntax is the same as used
when creating calculations and can be seen in the chapter 'Formula syntax'. For easy reference some
standard and recently used conditions are listed to the right of the condition editor. Simply click any of
these to insert the corresponding expression in the editor.
Action
The action tab specifies the action to be taken by the agent once the condition is fulfilled. For each
action one or more options are available.
Gauge
If choosing an action where an icon is displayed in a cell, the gauge tab contains several icon series
e.g. thumbs, arrows and traffic lights. When the appropriate icon series has been chosen, the size of
each of the icons in the series may be set. If choosing a speedometer or progress bar several gauges
are available and when selecting a gauge different sizes are also available.
Color
The color tab gives access to defining colors or color ranges for use in the cross table cells either as
standalone colors or coloring of progress bars, gauge needles etc. When creating a Smart Agent one
or more colors are present in the list of colors. If the color agent must change over a color scale e.g.
from red to yellow to green more colors may be added by duplicating the existing color. This is done
by clicking the '+' icon. Standard color series and recently used series are available to the right of the
color list. Several colors may be added and the preview color bar shows the color scale based on the
selected colors. The value range where the colors are applied is by default set to automatic, but a
custom range may be defined by adding a manual minimum and/or maximum value.
To get an overview of the properties of each agent refer to the table below.
Smart
Agent
Description
Default Clicking this agent opens the agent properties dialog. By default the agent condition is
set to 1 (all values), the action is set to 'Color an element' and the color is set to green.
Color
element
The color element agent puts a colored square into cross table cells similar to the auto
agent. The agent has four options; Default - opens the agent properties dialog as
mentioned above, Color element (2 states) - adds two agents, a green for positive
values and a red for negative values, Color element (3 states) - adds three agents, a
green for values significantly above average, a yellow for values within an average range
Object Functions 79
(average +/ standard deviation), a red for values significantly below average, Color
element automatically - Colors all values automatically according to a red/yellow/green
scale.
Icon The icon agent puts an icon into cross table cells. Several icon based Smart Agents exist:
Classic LED, Classic Arrow and Classic Smiley with 2, 3 or 5 states, Thumbs (1 or 2
states), Colored LED and Colored arrow. The only differences among these agents are
the number of states and the icon used.
Gauge The gauge agent puts a gauge into cross table cells. Three gauge based Smart Agents
exist: Progress bar - a progress bar with rounded frame and a red/yellow/green color
range, Default Speedometer - Default Speedometer with a red/yellow/green color range,
Classic Speedometer - Classic Speedometer with a red/yellow/green color range. For all
gauge types the color range is shown in the gauge depending on the cell value.
Background The Background Smart Agent colors the background of the cross table cell. The coloring
may be done with either 2 or 3 states. Another option is to color the cell as a progress
bar i.e. a part of the cell is colored according to the value in the cell.
Note: Coloring as a progress bar does not apply in TARGIT NET. Instead the whole cell is
colored according to the chosen colors.
Text The Text Smart Agent colors the text in the cross table cells. The agent has 2 and 3 state
variants and a variant that colors the text automatically with a red/yellow/green color
scale.
Note: Several Smart Agents may be added to the same cells, but combining icons with a background
progress bar causes the background of the icons to become white if the cross table is exported as a
report in pdf.
Visibility Agents
Visibility Agents are used to control visibility of measures, dimension values or calculated values when
the visibility is dependant on user specified conditions based on actual data values.
Format table functions
Format table functions is accessed via the 'Object | Table' menu for the active object. These functions
can also be accessed by right-clicking the object, and selecting 'Format table' from the right-click
menu. And finally, as a handy shortcut, hold down the CTRL key while right-clicking the object to open
the 'Format table' menu directly.
80 TARGIT User Guide
Sorting and ordering
The sequence of rows in Table Objects, Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects data page may
be changed by right-clicking a column header. There are three basic collating sequences, the source
data order, ascending order and descending order. An arrow up indicator in the column header means
that the column is sorted ascending, an arrow down indicator means the column is sorted descending,
and the source data order. Consecutive shift + right-clicks in the column header will toggle between
the three basic collating sequences.
If several columns must be sorted, sort one of the columns and for other columns that need to be
sorted right-click their column header and select 'Add to sort list'. When more than one column is
added to the sort order, the column headers show a number. This number represents the order of the
sort list. All members are sorted according to the column header with the number '1' first. If some
members have the same value in this column they are sorted according to the values in the column
with the number '2' in the header and so on. The collating sequence of a column may be changed by
right-clicking the column header and selecting 'Add to sort list'.
Note: Calculations may depend on the sorting order.
Custom order
The sequence of rows and columns may also be arranged by dragging individual elements to the
desired position. The same may also be achieved by keyboard commands, first use the Insert key to
select the element to be moved, then use up / down arrows to move the element to the desired
position and press Enter to do the actual insertion.
If such custom ordering has been applied to an Object, this custom order replaces the source data
order in above three sorting orders. Activating the Remove custom order function will reset this
collation to source data order.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Format row style
Menu: Object | Table | Format this member Right-click menu: Table | Format this member
Font, Font Style, Borders and Background properties may be specified for individual rows or ranges of
rows in a Table object, Cross tabulation object or the data page of a graphical object. Activating this
menu item will open the Properties tab 'Format data page' editor making it possible to edit these
properties.
Object Functions 81
Use right-click, or CTRL + right-click, on any row to edit row style properties for that particular row or
for that particular dimension level.
Measures Down
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Table
The 'Measures down' function offers the possibility of changing the way Dimensions and Measures are
presented in non-graphical Objects and in the Data view of Graphical Objects. The most noticeable
effect of using the 'Measures down' function is obtained when an Object consists of many Measures
and one or more Dimensions with relatively few values. By having Measures listed vertically instead of
horizontally, having to scroll the Object to see all Measures for a given Dimension value may be
avoided.
Word wrap
Menu: Object | Table
If column or row headers are too long to fit in a cell in the cross table, this function will enable
automatic word wrap such that text is fitted on successive lines.
Hierarchical collation
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
If a Table Object, Cross tabulation Object or a graphical Objects data page containing a hierarchical
dimension has been sorted, this option becomes available and set by default. This means that the
rows will be sorted, but the original hierarchy will be maintained. If this option is turned off the
hierarchy will be broken, and the order of rows will be decided by the values in the sorted column
alone.
Note: Turning off hierarchical collation will hide totals and subtotals.
Compact hierarchies
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Object | Table
By default, tables with hierarchical (multi-level) dimensions display the dimension hierarchy with one
column for each level of dimension values. The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a
hierarchical dimension to be displayed in a single column using indention to illustrate the dimension
82 TARGIT User Guide
levels. This option may also be set in the User Preferences menu, in this case the feature will be
activated for all new objects.
Indent hierarchies
Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Table
The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a hierarchical dimension to be displayed in a
single column using indention to illustrate the dimension levels. The indention may be toggled on / off
by using this function.
Grand totals
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table |
Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether the grand totals are shown or not. This only affects cross tabulation
objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Subtotals
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table |
Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether the subtotals are shown or not. This only affects cross tabulation objects
or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Remove custom order
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
Columns and rows in Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when in data mode may be
rearranged by dragging individual elements to the desired position. This option removes all such
custom ordering and reset the Object to default ordering.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Ignore custom order
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
Object Functions 83
Columns and rows in Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when in data mode may be
rearranged by dragging individual elements to the desired position. This option toggles such custom
ordering on/off.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Row totals after members
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether totals and subtotals should be shown before or after the members. This
only affects Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is not available if there is more than one dimension on the X-axis.
Text row
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data
This function may be used to add extra rows to a crosstable with customized text. The text may be
entered in the Smartpad in the same format as dynamic captions or as regular text.
Column totals after members
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether totals and subtotals should be shown above or below the elements. This
only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is not available if there is more than one dimension on the Y-axis.
Multidimensional subtotal columns
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether subtotals columns should be shown for secondary dimensions on the X-
axis. This only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data
mode.
Note: This option is only relevant if there is more than one dimension on the X-axis.
84 TARGIT User Guide
Multidimensional subtotal rows
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether subtotal rows should be shown for secondary dimensions on the Y-axis.
This only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is only relevant if there is more than one dimension on the Y-axis.
Calculations functions
The Calculations tab offers two major function types, 'Smart calculations' and `Top list´ plus a button
to open the Advanced Calculations Editor. Before working with any of these, it is necessary to select
the Object to which the chosen functions should apply.
Smart calculations
Smartpad: Calculations tab
The 'Smart calculations' window on the Calculations tab first lists all existing Smart calculations for the
active object. To add/modify an existing calculation, click it and add/modify it as described below.
Add calculation
There are several predefined calculations listed under Add calculation. When a predefined calculation
is chosen, it must be determined first under which conditions the calculation should be added. This is
done via a number of logical steps, which are common for all predefined calculations. The number of
steps will vary, depending on the number of measures and dimensions in the selected object. This
process is made as self explanatory as possible, and if the object for instance is built with one
measure and one dimension only, the chosen predefined calculation will be automatically applied in
the correct place simply by clicking it.
Here is a list of available Smart calculations:
Total: This function will calculate the sum of the chosen measure(s) across the X- or Y-axes
according to the choice of dimension.
Average: This function will calculate the average of the chosen measure(s) across the X- or
Y-axes according to the choice of dimension.
Standard deviation: This function will calculate the standard deviation of the chosen
measure(s) across the X- or Y-axis according to the choice of dimension.
Accumulated sum: This function will calculate the accumulated sum, from top to bottom or
from left to right, of the chosen measure(s) of the last column or last row according to the
choice of dimension.
Object Functions 85
Accumulated average: This function will calculate the accumulated average, from top to
bottom or from left to right, of the chosen measure(s) of the last column or last row
according to the choice of dimension.
Difference: This function will calculate the difference of the chosen measure(s) in the last
two columns or the last two rows according to the choice of dimension.
Growth percent: This function will calculate the „Growth percent? of the chosen measure(s)
in the last two columns or the last two rows according to the choice of dimension.
Measure difference: This function will calculate the difference of two chosen measures in
the last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Note that you will be
requested to choose an A-measure and subsequently a B-measure. The calculation will be A-
B.
Index percent: This function will calculate the index percent of the chosen measure in the
last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value will be
calculated as a percentage of the topmost or leftmost measure value.
Percentage: This function will calculate the index percent of the chosen measure in the last
column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value will be
calculated as a percentage of the total of all measure values.
Index of average: This function will calculate the index of average of the chosen measure
in the last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value
will be calculated as a percentage of the average of all measure values.
Custom calculation: This function makes it possible to add ones own customized
calculation. In the „Enter calculation? box the desired formula may be entered.
Modify a calculation
Once a calculation has been added to an object, it will appear at the top of the 'Smart calculations'
pad. If an added calculation is clicked, the following properties may be changed:
Calculation title: Change the title of this calculation.
Range: Define the range, e.g. from first column to last column, to which this calculation
must apply.
Source: Define the referenced column/row for the calculation, either „current? or another
relatively referenced column/row.
Source (Measure): Change the measure for the calculation.
Move Calculation to the other axis: A calculated column will become a calculated row,
and vice-versa.
Swap X and Y references: If the formula has a defined range, e.g. calculation of average
of all measures from first column to last column of last row, you can swap X and Y
references to calculate the average of all measures from first row to last row of last column
instead. This property is only available for calculations that are added as a new measure.
Advanced Calculations Editor
Smartpad: Calculations tab.
86 TARGIT User Guide
It is possible to add calculated columns and rows to all objects. This may be done either by using the
predefined Smart calculations in the Smartpad or by using Advanced Calculations Editor to manually
add columns or rows to a cross tabulation object and design formulas to define the contents of the
data fields of the added columns and / or rows. This feature also applies to the grid of the 'Data page'
of graphical objects.
Before working with the Advanced Calculations Editor, it is necessary to understand the basic
structure of the cross tabulations and how to reference rows, columns and specific data fields within
the cross table.
Syntax description
The general syntax for referencing cells in a cross table is: cells(x coordinate, y coordinate,
measure#). The x coordinate refer to columns, while the y coordinate refer to rows. The measure
reference is necessary as there may be more than one measure in a cross table.
The current column or row can be referenced by replacing the x coordinate or y coordinate
respectively with '0'. If e.g. a calculated column has been added, the current row can be referenced as
cells(x coordinate, 0, measure#), and if a calculated row has been added, the current column can
be referenced as cells(0, y coordinate, measure#). As shorthand, column cells in the current row
may also be referenced as: cols(x coordinate, measure#), and row cells in the current column may
likewise be referenced as: rows(y coordinate, measure#).
Referencing columns, rows and data
When designing a formula with a reference to a specific cell, the syntax must be cells(d#, d#, m#).
Note that column and row references have been prefixed with a 'd', for “dimension reference”, while
'm' is for “measure reference”.
The dimension reference 'd' must be followed by either a positive or a negative integer which defines
the referenced column?s or row?s position in the table. Positive integers indicate that the table columns
and rows are referenced from left to right and from top to bottom respectively. E.g. cells(d1,d1,m1)
refers to the upper left cell in the table. Negative integers indicate that the table columns and rows
are referenced from right to left and from bottom to top respectively. E.g. cells(d-1,d-1,m1) refers
to the lower right cell in the table. Please observe that calculated columns and rows are not counted
when using 'd-1'.
The measure reference 'm' must be followed by a positive or negative integer which defines the
measure?s position in the table. Positive integers indicate that the measures are referenced from left
to right or from top to bottom. Negative integers indicate that the measures are referenced from right
to left or from bottom to top. E.g. 'm1' refers the leftmost or topmost measure and likewise 'm-1'
refers the rightmost or bottommost measure, independent of type, calculated or not.
Object Functions 87
The calculation reference 'c' can be used to refer to a previously inserted, calculated column or row,
and follow the same referencing rules as measure references. E.g. cells(c1,d1,m1) refers to the first
calculated column, while cells(d1,c1,m1) refers to the first calculated row.
Relative references
Cell references may also be used without the 'd' prefixes, thereby being a positive or negative integer
(incl. zero). This means that the referenced cells are relative to the cells into which the result of the
actual calculation is placed. As mentioned above '0' means current row or column; negative integers
means previous rows or columns; and positive integers means next rows or columns.
E.g. cells(d1,-1,m1) refers to the cell containing measure 'm1' in the previous row of the first
column.
Cell range references
It is also possible to refer to ranges of cells in cross tabulations. Cell ranges consist of a start and an
end cell reference separated by colon.
E.g. cells(d-1,d1:d3,m1) refers to cells containing measure 'm1' in the first three rows of the last
column.
Often you would like to define a range of all cells from top to bottom or from left to right. This can be
done by defining the range as d1:d-1 (from first to last column or row). Alternatively the keyword 'all'
can be used.
E.g. cells(d2,all,m2) refers to cells containing measure 'm2' in all rows of the second column.
Scope
The method used for referencing cells, as described above, enables calculations to always work within
the current “scope”. For instance in a cross table with one or more hierarchical dimensions, it is
possible to expand a dimension to its next level, for example a Time dimension can be expanded from
the Quarter level to the Month level. Thus the scope has changed from 'Quarter' to 'Month'. A formula
will in this expanded level only reference dimension values concerning the new scope, 'Month', and
not dimension values in the “upper” scope: 'Quarter'.
Even though the expanded scope may now contain more rows or more columns than the original
scope, the formulas, if properly designed, will automatically adapt to the new scope. E.g. an 'all'
reference will now simply address all months rather than all quarters, a 'd-1' reference will still refer
to the last row or last column, which now contains month values rather than quarter values etc.
Grand totals are considered to be in a scope level separate from the dimension values.
Top list
Smartpad: Calculations tab
The Top list function offers an easy-to-use approach to isolating either negative or positive values in a
result set. As indicated by the terminology, a Top list consists of the best or worst part of values of an
Object. For instance, if it is desirable to focus on the revenue for the 5 best months of the year, a
88 TARGIT User Guide
positive Top list can be build for the Revenue pr. Time Analysis. The column to be used for Top list
can be selected in the drop-list just below the Top list edit field.
Note: Top lists are based on the present sorting of the Object. This means that if the Object is sorted
on the Time column, a 5 item Top list will show Months 1-5. If the object is “unsorted”, i.e. no explicit
sorting has been chosen then activating the Top list function will cause the object to be sorted
automatically according to the right-most column. Also consider that setting Top list to 5 and sort the
object ascending on the right-most column will actually result in a Bottom list (and vice versa).
Top percentage (Pareto analysis)
The 'Top percentage' function is a variant of the Top list function. For instance, it can be used to
perform a Pareto analysis on the Revenue of all products. The classic thesis is that 80% of the
Revenue is based on only 20% of the products. To try this, using the 'Top percentage' function, enter
80 in the Top list edit field and click the percentage button. The result will be a Top list of those
products contributing with at least 80% of the total revenue.
Note: Clicking the percentage button repeatedly will cause the functionality to toggle between 'Top
percentage' and Top list.
Criteria 89
Criteria
Criteria, Drill down and Comparisons are mechanisms used to control which data is displayed by the
Objects, Analyses and Reports in the Work area.
Global criteria
Global criteria are available as basic criteria represented by a Criteria bar or as Advanced criteria
specified in the Criteria editor. The fact that the criteria are global means that selected values
influence all unlocked Objects in the Work area. All global criteria may be removed by clicking
'Remove all global criteria' in the Criteria tab in the Smartpad.
Basic Global criteria
Menu: View | Criteria bar
The Criteria bar may be shown or hidden by selecting the Criteria bar item in the View menu or by
pressing the magnifying glass button in the Toolbar.
Shows/hides the Criteria bar.
When the Criteria bar is visible it appears beneath the Toolbar or the Menu bar if the Toolbar is
hidden. The Criteria bar consists of drop-down boxes with different content. The most central drop
downs contain dimension values available for criteria selection. When selecting one or more values the
objects in the analysis are immediately reflected. For example if an analysis consists of two objects
e.g. Revenue per Item and Revenue Per Period and in the Customer Country drop-list a criteria has
been set to Denmark, then the two objects in the analysis only show data for Denmark.
Multiple values may be selected at the same time by check marking each of the desired values and
then close the drop-down list by clicking the down arrow to the right of the drop-list. A click on one of
the item names in the list selects this one value as criteria and closes the list box. For some
dimensions it may be convenient to only allow a single selection. This is done by right-clicking the
dimension in the criteria bar and selecting 'Single selection'. Note that in the criteria editor this
dimension still appears with multiple selections. To get a quick overview of the criteria in a dimension
click the icon to the left of the dimension name, which opens a yellow information box. Sometimes a
small orange information icon is shown to the right of the dimension name. This icon is shown when
other criteria, that cannot be displayed in the criteria bar, apply e.g. dynamic periods. More
information on the criteria that apply may be obtained by clicking the icon.
The 'disable immediate refresh' button at the right end of the Criteria bar may be used to suppress
fetching of data each time criteria are selected. When all required criteria has been selected in the
Criteria bar drop-lists, a new click on this button, now called Automatic refresh, will start fetching data
90 TARGIT User Guide
according to the specified delimitations. The refresh button may also be found in the menu opened by
right-clicking the criteria bar.
The dimensions available as drop-lists in the Criteria bar can be changed using the Smartpad. This is
done simply by dragging dimensions between the Smartpad 'Source data' tab and the Criteria bar in
the same way as when defining Objects or by right-clicking a dimension in the criteria bar or
Smartpad and selecting the appropriate menu item. Drop downs in the criteria bar may be rearranged
by dragging them to an appropriate place or use the right-click menu in the source data tab in the
Smartpad. Global criteria may be removed by right-clicking in an empty area of the criteria bar and
selecting 'Remove all global criteria' to remove all global criteria in the analysis or report or 'Remove
bar criteria' to remove only the criteria in the criteria bar. Note that the dimensions are not removed
from the criteria bar.
Note: The Criteria bar dimension drop-lists cannot display criteria of types “Greater than” or “Less
than”, or any combinations thereof, use the Criteria editor for this type of action. Also note that
criteria drop downs are populated at the time of drop down. For large dimensions this may take some
time.
Free text filtering
In order to make it easier to find and select dimension values in a drop-list with many entries, a free-
text filtering of dimension values using wildcards (*) is available just by typing a selection string in
the drop-list. The operators available are equal to the ones used in the criteria editor and for easier
access to the criteria editor a search field using the same operators is also available in the bottom of
the drop down. Searches in this field may be transferred to the criteria editor for advanced criteria
handling by clicking the 'Editor' text.
Auto-filter Criteria bar
In order to make it even easier to select criteria in the Criteria bar, the Criteria bar drop-lists may be
filtered to contain only the dimension values that would be present in a data object influenced by
already selected criteria. This may be activated by selecting the „Auto-filter Criteria bar? option in the
Tools | User Preferences submenu. This setting enables auto-filtering in the criteria bar for the user
until it is disabled again. Another option to auto filter the criteria bar is to right-click the bar and select
'Auto-filter'. This setting keeps auto-filtering during the session (until log out) or until it is disabled
again.
Stored criteria selector
A stored criteria selector may be added to the criteria bar by right-clicking the bar and select 'Add
stored criteria selector'. This adds a drop down to the criteria bar automatically including any stored
document criteria. The criteria displayed in the stored criteria selector may be changed by right-
clicking the selector and select 'Properties'. This opens a dialog with a list of Shared and Document
criteria. Clicking a stored criteria adds it to the left box containing criteria displayed in the selector.
The order of the stored criteria may be changed by selecting a stored criteria and clicking the arrows.
Criteria 91
Measure selector
For an easy way of changing measure in an analysis, a measure selector may be added to the criteria
bar by right-clicking the criteria bar and selecting 'Add measure selector'. Opening the drop down
shows a list of all the measures in the cube and a measure to substitute on top. If several measures
are available in the analysis the measure to substitute may be clicked and another measure may be
selected. The measure displayed in the measure selector may also be substituted by another
measure, by dragging the measure from the Source data tab in the Smartpad onto the measure
selector.
If only a few measures should be available for selection in the measure selector, a properties dialog
may be opened by right-clicking the selector and click 'Properties'. This opens a dialog with all
measures in the cube placed in the right side and all of the measures in the selector on the left side.
Measures are added by clicking them and the order of the measures in the selector may be changed
by highlighting a measure and moving it with the blue arrows. The name of the selector may also be
changed by editing the text field and translations for any of the available languages may be added by
clicking the globe and entering appropriate translations.
Dynamic periods
When a period dimension has been added to the criteria bar, dynamic periods may be used by right-
clicking the dimension drop down and select 'Use dynamic periods'. This enables the drop down to
show predefined dynamic periods available for easy selection. To further edit the listed dynamic
periods or add other dynamic period criteria to the analysis click the 'Editor' link in the bottom of the
drop down. This opens the criteria editor where more advanced criteria may be specified.
To further improve the usability of 'Dynamic Periods' it is possible to set its origin. A dynamic date
origin selector may be added to the criteria bar by right-clicking the bar and select 'Add dynamic date
origin'. The selected date only takes effect when dynamic periods are used. To set the 'Dynamic date
origin' click the arrow in the drop down box and select a date in the calendar. Month and year may be
selected by clicking each respectively. The 'Dynamic date origin' is active for the whole analysis or
report but is not saved with it. To save the Dynamic date origin for the whole session click the clock
icon next to the drop down.
Note: Use of dynamic periods is only available if it has been set up in the cube.
Ignore initial criteria
Menu: File | Document properties Toolbar: User preferences | Document properties
In the Roles management in TARGIT Management Studio initial criteria may be set on dimensions of
each cube. Initial criteria are applied as global criteria on all analyses and reports based on data from
the cube where the initial criteria have been applied. The initial criteria may be removed from the
analysis or report, but will be re-added once the analysis or report is opened again. This setting may
be used for analyses or reports to ignore any initial criteria set. After changing the setting the
analysis/report must be saved and if the applied initial criteria shouldn't be shown when opening the
92 TARGIT User Guide
analysis/report they must be removed before saving it. When creating a new analysis the initial
criteria are also applied, but the cube with the initial criteria must be selected in the Source data tab
before creating the analysis i.e. adding an object to a new analysis and then changing cube does not
apply the initial criteria.
Note: When hyper relating or trigger from an analysis or report with initial criteria, the initial criteria
are included in the opened analysis despite that the ignore initial criteria setting is enabled in this
analysis. This is also the case when performing magic drops.
Criteria tab
Smartpad: Criteria
The Criteria tab in the Smartpad is used to gain an overview of existing criteria and add or edit new
advanced criteria. When no object is highlighted only global criteria are shown and when highlighting
an object global and local criteria and comparisons for that specific object are shown. If dynamic
period criteria are applied to the object 'Dynamic date origin' may also be set in the Smartpad Criteria
tab. For more information on how to apply criteria, see the section 'Criteria editor'.
Criteria editor
Menu: Tools | Criteria editor Keyboard: CTRL+R
The Criteria editor is the main dialog to work with criteria. It may be used to add and edit global or
local criteria. To add or edit global criteria open the criteria editor either by selecting its menu item in
the Tools menu, by clicking the small down-arrow button next to the Criteria bar magnifying glass in
the Toolbar or by clicking an existing global criterion or adding a new one in the Criteria tab in the
Smartpad.
Either of the above opens a dialog with a list of existing criteria or a view where criteria may be
selected. In the list of existing criteria a criterion may be edited by clicking a dimension member or it
may be deleted by clicking the garbage can. In the bottom of the dialog three icons provide options to
store criteria for later use (they appear in the Stored criteria list to the left - see subsection below), to
copy criteria to another editor (e.g. local criteria editor, notification editor or comparison editor) or
paste copied criteria into this editor.
Note: Criteria in the list of selected criteria are intersected e.g. if a criterion is Period = 2009 and
another is Period >= 2008 the analysis shows empty results for all objects, since these two criteria
cannot be fulfilled at the same time. Instead use the 'equal to' criteria type and select all the periods
manually.
Criteria 93
Adding criteria
To add criteria click the 'Add criteria' text in the bottom of the dialog. This changes the list of criteria
to a list of dimensions and hierarchies for the database used in the analysis. Selecting any dimension
or hierarchy changes the dialog to display a list of criteria types and a list of dimension members.
When working with advanced criteria it is a user responsibility to make sensible criteria. For instance a
criteria could be „Month must be less than 06?, which would make sense. Another example is „Product
must be less than shirts?, which would make no sense.
When criteria type has been selected, one or more dimension members may be ticked off in the list
depending on the selected criteria type. All selected members are shown above the member list and if
clicked the member name is highlighted in the list. For the types 'between...' and 'not between...' a
range must be provided as from and to members, which may be included in the range by checking the
'Include' boxes. The dimension member list may also be shown according to the members available in
the analysis e.g. if criteria have been applied such that data is only shown for Period members in 2007
it is not necessary to show all Period members from 2006-2009. By checking the 'Auto-filter member
list' box only members included in the data set are shown. If members are selected, but should be
filtered by the auto-filter they are still shown but highlighted with a grey background and parentheses
around their names.
In hierarchies selected members may not be easy to spot. Therefore an option, 'Show selected', is
available. If the link is clicked only selected members and their upper levels are shown. 'Show all'
returns to the full view of all members. If a dimension level contains more than 50 members only the
first 50 are shown. To see the rest click the 'Show all xx members' in the bottom of the list.
Adding criteria on member properties
If a dimension includes member properties, criteria may also be applied to these. When 'Add criteria'
has been selected, the check box 'Add criteria on a member property' must be checked. Dimensions
with member properties are then shown and a member property must be selected. The criteria are
entered in the text field according to the following operators and separated by comma:
Operator Description
< Less than
> More than
Different from
= Equal to
! Negation
So if the criteria, first 6 months in 2009, must be applied it may be written; =2009,
A Business Intelligence (BI) System
TARGIT
User guide
Disclaimer
TARGIT provides this publication “as-is” without warranty of any kind.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of TARGIT
Copyright
The software, which includes information contained in any databases, described in this document is
furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of
the agreement.
It is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in the license agreement.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying or recording, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of TARGIT.
© 2011 TARGIT. All rights reserved, including the right of reproduction in whole or in part, or in any
form.
TARGIT
Aalborgvej 94, 9800 Hjørring
Denmark
Tel: +45 96 23 19 00
Fax: +45 96 23 19 99
Manual Revision: 2K11, SR1
Content i
Contents
TARGIT ................................................................................................................. 1
A Business Intelligence (BI) System ........................................................................ 1
What is a BI System? ............................................................................................ 1
What is a Data Warehouse? ................................................................................... 2
Data warehousing techniques ............................................................................. 3
Relational Data Warehouse ............................................................................. 3
Multidimensional Data Warehouse ................................................................... 3
Overview of this user guide ................................................................................... 3
The Basics ............................................................................................................. 5
Working with TARGIT ............................................................................................ 5
User Levels .......................................................................................................... 5
Starting TARGIT ................................................................................................... 5
TARGIT Main Window ............................................................................................ 6
The Menu ......................................................................................................... 6
The Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 6
The Navigation Bar ............................................................................................ 6
Using the Navigation Bar ................................................................................ 6
Defining the Navigation Bar ............................................................................ 7
The Smartpad................................................................................................... 9
Documents ................................................................................................... 9
Source data ................................................................................................ 11
Properties ................................................................................................... 12
Calculations ................................................................................................ 12
Criteria ....................................................................................................... 12
Drillpad ...................................................................................................... 13
Scheduled Jobs ........................................................................................... 13
The Work area ................................................................................................ 13
Thumbnail Navigator .................................................................................... 13
The Statusbar ................................................................................................. 14
TARGIT Report Main Window................................................................................ 14
TARGIT Report Elements .................................................................................. 14
Bands ........................................................................................................ 14
Components ............................................................................................... 14
Objects ............................................................................................................. 15
Object Explanation .......................................................................................... 15
Analyses and Reports .......................................................................................... 15
Save and Open Analyses and Reports ................................................................ 15
Organizing Analyses and Reports ...................................................................... 16
Tools................................................................................................................. 17
Intelligent Analysis .......................................................................................... 17
Schedule ........................................................................................................ 17
Notifications ................................................................................................... 17
ii TARGIT User Guide
Reporting Services web ................................................................................... 17
Gauge Builder Wizard ...................................................................................... 18
New gauge ................................................................................................. 18
Modify gauge .............................................................................................. 18
Launch TARGIT Desktop ................................................................................. 19
Report templates ............................................................................................ 19
Criteria editor ................................................................................................. 19
Select language .............................................................................................. 19
User Preferences ............................................................................................. 19
Appearance ................................................................................................ 19
Behavior ..................................................................................................... 20
Documents ................................................................................................. 21
Flush Intelligence ............................................................................................ 22
Logging ......................................................................................................... 22
Query logging ............................................................................................. 22
View query log ............................................................................................ 22
Log query results ......................................................................................... 22
Getting help ....................................................................................................... 22
Intelligent Analysis ............................................................................................. 24
The Intelligent Analysis tool ................................................................................. 24
Explanation ................................................................................................. 25
Sample ...................................................................................................... 25
Reentering Intelligent Analysis ...................................................................... 25
Options for creating an Analysis ........................................................................ 26
… grouped by…............................................................................................ 26
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 26
… selected by the following criteria ................................................................ 26
Options for creating a Dashboard ...................................................................... 27
…with the trend over … ................................................................................ 27
…visualized with … ....................................................................................... 27
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 27
… selected by the following criteria: ............................................................... 27
Options for creating a TARGIT Report ................................................................ 28
… showing the fields … ................................................................................. 28
… with the title … ......................................................................................... 28
... using the template ... ............................................................................... 28
… with page numbers ................................................................................... 28
… with the image … ..................................................................................... 28
… with the header … .................................................................................... 28
… with the footer … ...................................................................................... 28
… showing the chart object … for every … ....................................................... 29
… with … on the criteria bar .......................................................................... 29
… grouped by …........................................................................................... 29
… showing the top … of … ............................................................................. 29
… showing the bottom … of … ........................................................................ 29
… ordered ascending by … ............................................................................ 30
Content iii
… ordered descending by …........................................................................... 30
… selected by the following criteria … ............................................................. 30
… with grand total ....................................................................................... 30
… with subtotals .......................................................................................... 30
… with a new page for every … ...................................................................... 30
… with an explanation .................................................................................. 30
Options to be notified ...................................................................................... 30
Select measure to monitor ............................................................................ 30
Select Notification trigger ............................................................................. 31
Set delivery method ..................................................................................... 31
Schedule Notification Agent .......................................................................... 31
... for each ... ............................................................................................. 31
... selected by the following criteria ............................................................... 31
Options to schedule ......................................................................................... 31
Select filename and format ........................................................................... 32
Set delivery method ..................................................................................... 32
Set schedule ............................................................................................... 32
Options to create a storyboard.......................................................................... 32
…based on drillpad analyses… ....................................................................... 32
…based on document analyses… .................................................................... 32
Options to search ............................................................................................ 33
Options to search for Sentinels ......................................................................... 33
Options to analyze uploaded data ..................................................................... 33
Options to upload data .................................................................................... 33
Designing Analyses ............................................................................................. 34
Creating a new analysis ....................................................................................... 34
Creating Objects................................................................................................. 34
Creating Objects from the Toolbar ..................................................................... 34
Creating Objects from the menu ....................................................................... 35
Organizing Objects .......................................................................................... 35
Object definition ................................................................................................. 35
Selecting data ................................................................................................ 36
Selecting data for display ................................................................................. 36
Replace measures in objects ............................................................................ 37
Displaying data .................................................................................................. 37
Object types ...................................................................................................... 37
Object type change ......................................................................................... 37
Non-graphical Objects ......................................................................................... 38
Tables ........................................................................................................... 38
Cross tabulations ............................................................................................ 38
Graphical Objects ............................................................................................... 39
Pie charts ....................................................................................................... 40
Bar charts and Horizontal bar charts .................................................................. 41
Line charts ..................................................................................................... 42
Area charts .................................................................................................... 42
Scatter charts ................................................................................................. 42
iv TARGIT User Guide
Bubble charts ................................................................................................. 43
Radar charts ................................................................................................... 43
Maps ............................................................................................................. 44
Globes ........................................................................................................... 44
Scalable maps ................................................................................................ 45
Gauges .......................................................................................................... 45
SQL 2005 KPIs ............................................................................................ 46
Layout Objects ................................................................................................... 46
Blank area .................................................................................................. 47
Text box ..................................................................................................... 47
Explanation box........................................................................................... 47
Image ........................................................................................................ 48
Search Object .................................................................................................... 48
What-If .......................................................................................................... 48
Multi-cube Analyses ............................................................................................ 49
Biggest Opportunities and Problems ...................................................................... 49
Biggest Opportunities ................................................................................... 50
Biggest Problems ......................................................................................... 50
Object functions .................................................................................................. 51
Activating functions ............................................................................................ 51
General functions ............................................................................................... 51
Locking Objects .............................................................................................. 51
Locking all Objects ....................................................................................... 51
Trigger Analysis .............................................................................................. 51
Cut, Copy and Paste ........................................................................................ 52
Duplicate ....................................................................................................... 52
Actions .......................................................................................................... 53
Export table data ............................................................................................ 53
Hyper Relations .............................................................................................. 53
Scheduling ..................................................................................................... 54
Administrating Scheduled Jobs ...................................................................... 56
Sentinels........................................................................................................ 56
Visualize Sentinels ....................................................................................... 58
Scheduling Sentinels .................................................................................... 58
TARGIT Cloud ................................................................................................. 59
Notification Agents .......................................................................................... 59
Condition .................................................................................................... 59
Criteria ....................................................................................................... 60
Schedule .................................................................................................... 60
Delivery ..................................................................................................... 60
Add object Notification Agent ........................................................................ 60
Smiley .............................................................................................................. 60
Height ........................................................................................................... 61
Width ............................................................................................................ 61
Maximize / Restore ......................................................................................... 61
Map locations ................................................................................................. 62
Content v
Globe locations ............................................................................................... 62
Gauge configuration ........................................................................................ 63
Object property – Adding and removing gauges .............................................. 63
Object property – Arranging gauges............................................................... 63
Object property – Hyperrelate ....................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Title ................................................................................. 64
Gauge property – Small gauge ...................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Visualizations .................................................................... 64
Gauge property – Scale ................................................................................ 65
Gauge property – Value................................................................................ 65
Gauge property – Minimum and Maximum span .............................................. 65
Gauge property – Visualization and Rotation ................................................... 65
Gauge property – Adding and removing values................................................ 66
Value property – Selecting source data .......................................................... 66
Value property – Use default gauge span ........................................................ 66
Value property –Value Visualization (for Speedometer gauge type only) ............. 66
Value property –Gauge Intervals (for Icon gauge type only) ............................. 67
Formatting functions ........................................................................................... 67
Auto Agent ..................................................................................................... 67
Show criteria .................................................................................................. 67
Regression ..................................................................................................... 68
Linear correlation ............................................................................................ 68
Show legend .................................................................................................. 68
Vertical axis labels .......................................................................................... 68
Show labels .................................................................................................... 69
Show axis titles .............................................................................................. 69
3D chart ........................................................................................................ 69
Cylindrical ...................................................................................................... 69
Gradient rendering .......................................................................................... 70
Multi series .................................................................................................... 70
Globe projection ............................................................................................. 70
Average crosshair ........................................................................................... 70
Align ............................................................................................................. 71
Formatting options .......................................................................................... 71
Title and explanation .................................................................................... 71
Chart properties .......................................................................................... 71
Map ........................................................................................................... 72
Scalable map .............................................................................................. 72
Cross tabulation .......................................................................................... 73
Visibility ..................................................................................................... 73
Labels and hints .......................................................................................... 73
Numbers .................................................................................................... 74
Dynamic captions ........................................................................................ 76
Element colors ............................................................................................ 77
Intelligent Agents ............................................................................................ 77
Color and Gauge Agents ............................................................................... 77
vi TARGIT User Guide
Visibility Agents ........................................................................................... 79
Format table functions ........................................................................................ 79
Sorting and ordering ....................................................................................... 80
Custom order .............................................................................................. 80
Format row style ............................................................................................. 80
Measures Down .............................................................................................. 81
Word wrap ......................................................................................................... 81
Hierarchical collation ....................................................................................... 81
Compact hierarchies ........................................................................................ 81
Indent hierarchies ........................................................................................... 82
Grand totals ................................................................................................... 82
Subtotals ....................................................................................................... 82
Remove custom order...................................................................................... 82
Ignore custom order ........................................................................................ 82
Row totals after members ................................................................................ 83
Text row ........................................................................................................ 83
Column totals after members ........................................................................... 83
Multidimensional subtotal columns .................................................................... 83
Multidimensional subtotal rows ......................................................................... 84
Calculations functions ......................................................................................... 84
Smart calculations........................................................................................... 84
Add calculation ............................................................................................ 84
Modify a calculation ..................................................................................... 85
Advanced Calculations Editor ............................................................................ 85
Syntax description ....................................................................................... 86
Referencing columns, rows and data .............................................................. 86
Top list .......................................................................................................... 87
Top percentage (Pareto analysis) ................................................................... 88
Criteria ................................................................................................................ 89
Global criteria .................................................................................................... 89
Basic Global criteria ......................................................................................... 89
Free text filtering ......................................................................................... 90
Auto-filter Criteria bar .................................................................................. 90
Stored criteria selector ................................................................................. 90
Measure selector ......................................................................................... 91
Dynamic periods .......................................................................................... 91
Ignore initial criteria .................................................................................... 91
Criteria tab ..................................................................................................... 92
Criteria editor ................................................................................................. 92
Adding criteria............................................................................................. 93
Stored criteria ............................................................................................. 94
Dynamic Periods .......................................................................................... 95
Timeslider object ............................................................................................ 96
Play ........................................................................................................... 97
Global criteria via Trigger Analyses .................................................................... 97
Global criteria via Magic Drops .......................................................................... 97
Content vii
Global criteria via Hyper Relations ..................................................................... 97
Local criteria ...................................................................................................... 97
Drilling .............................................................................................................. 98
Hierarchies ....................................................................................................100
Stopping drills ...............................................................................................101
Drill through ..................................................................................................102
Drillpad ............................................................................................................102
Criteria priority..................................................................................................102
Comparisons .....................................................................................................102
Add Comparisons ...........................................................................................103
Comparison Elements .................................................................................103
Storing a comparison ..................................................................................104
Drag-Drop Comparisons ..................................................................................105
Storyboards ...................................................................................................... 106
What are Storyboards? .......................................................................................106
Designing Storyboards .......................................................................................106
Use Intelligent Analysis ...................................................................................106
Import from the Drillpad .................................................................................106
Add snapshots to the clipboard ........................................................................107
Edit Storyboard .............................................................................................107
Forecasting ....................................................................................................... 109
What is Forecasting? ..........................................................................................109
Using Forecasting ..............................................................................................109
Designing TARGIT Reports ................................................................................ 110
Creating a new report ........................................................................................110
Bands ..............................................................................................................110
Band Types ...................................................................................................110
Page Header ..............................................................................................111
Title ..........................................................................................................111
Column Header ..........................................................................................111
Group Header ............................................................................................111
Detail ........................................................................................................112
Crosstab ....................................................................................................112
Crosstab Header .........................................................................................112
Crosstab Footer ..........................................................................................112
Group Footer .............................................................................................112
Summary ..................................................................................................112
Page Footer ...............................................................................................112
Insert Band ...................................................................................................113
Select Band ...................................................................................................113
Resize Band ..................................................................................................113
Delete Band ..................................................................................................114
Band Properties .............................................................................................114
Background color ........................................................................................114
Align to bottom of page ...............................................................................114
Force new page ..........................................................................................114
viii TARGIT User Guide
Force new column.......................................................................................114
Reprint on new page ...................................................................................115
Prevent orphans .........................................................................................115
Page break before ......................................................................................115
Font ..........................................................................................................115
Use parent font ..........................................................................................116
Style .........................................................................................................116
Text color ..................................................................................................116
Borders .....................................................................................................116
Order by ....................................................................................................116
Sorting ......................................................................................................117
Dimension order .........................................................................................117
Top list / Bottom list ...................................................................................117
Components .....................................................................................................117
Insert Component .......................................................................................118
Select Component ......................................................................................118
Resize Component ......................................................................................118
Delete Component ......................................................................................118
Data Fields ....................................................................................................118
Format numbers .........................................................................................119
Text .............................................................................................................119
Text ..........................................................................................................120
System Variable .............................................................................................120
Variable.....................................................................................................120
Leading Text ..............................................................................................120
Memo ...........................................................................................................120
Edit Text ...................................................................................................120
Criteria Box ...................................................................................................121
Shape ...........................................................................................................121
Shape type ................................................................................................121
Line ..........................................................................................................121
Line Color ..................................................................................................121
Fill ............................................................................................................121
Fill Color ....................................................................................................122
Image ..........................................................................................................122
Load Image ...............................................................................................122
Zoom to actual size ....................................................................................122
Zoom to fit ................................................................................................122
Analysis Object ..............................................................................................122
Load object ................................................................................................123
Background color ........................................................................................123
Analysis Crosstab ...........................................................................................123
Common Properties ...........................................................................................123
Position and size ............................................................................................124
Position .....................................................................................................124
Size ..........................................................................................................124
Content ix
Cut, Copy and Paste .......................................................................................124
Border ..........................................................................................................124
Format dynamic captions ....................................................................................125
Align ............................................................................................................125
Align Left/Top/Bottom/Right ........................................................................125
Align Vertical Center ...................................................................................125
Align in band .................................................................................................125
Align Left/Top/Bottom/Right in band .............................................................125
Align Vertical/Horizontal Center in band ........................................................126
Space Equally Vertical/Horizontal..................................................................126
Send to back ..............................................................................................126
Bring to front .............................................................................................126
Text Properties ..................................................................................................127
Background color ........................................................................................127
Text alignment ...........................................................................................127
Transparent ...............................................................................................127
Automatic Sizing ........................................................................................127
Font ..........................................................................................................128
Style .........................................................................................................128
Text color ..................................................................................................128
Page Setup .......................................................................................................128
Ruler ............................................................................................................128
Title .............................................................................................................129
Border ..........................................................................................................129
Paper size .....................................................................................................129
Format ......................................................................................................129
Orientation ................................................................................................129
Size ..........................................................................................................129
Units .........................................................................................................130
Margins ........................................................................................................130
Columns .......................................................................................................130
Character set.................................................................................................130
Font .............................................................................................................130
Defining a Report Collection ................................................................................130
Adding Reports to a Collection ......................................................................131
Preview TARGIT Reports ................................................................................... 132
Preview the report .............................................................................................132
Zoom ...............................................................................................................132
Navigation ........................................................................................................132
Printing, Exporting and Sending ....................................................................... 133
Printing Analyses and Reports .............................................................................133
Printer setup ..............................................................................................133
Printing Analyses ........................................................................................133
Printing Objects ..........................................................................................133
Printing TARGIT Reports ..............................................................................133
Export analysis ..................................................................................................133
x TARGIT User Guide
Image file .....................................................................................................134
Email ............................................................................................................134
Microsoft PowerPoint ......................................................................................134
Exporting Reports ..............................................................................................135
Exporting TARGIT Reports ...............................................................................135
PDF ..........................................................................................................135
HTML ........................................................................................................135
RTF (Rich Text File) ....................................................................................135
Exporting table data ..........................................................................................135
Microsoft Office Excel ..................................................................................136
Text File ....................................................................................................136
XML ..........................................................................................................136
Sending Analyses and Reports ............................................................................136
TARGIT Desktop ................................................................................................ 138
Installing Desktop..............................................................................................138
Desktop interface ..............................................................................................138
Adding objects to Desktop ...............................................................................139
Adding shared objects to Desktop .................................................................140
Desktop preferences ..........................................................................................140
Appendix A: Keyboard shortcuts ....................................................................... 142
Primary controls ................................................................................................142
Graphical Objects ..............................................................................................142
Non-graphical Objects ........................................................................................143
Report design mode ...........................................................................................144
Appendix B: Formula syntax ............................................................................. 145
Arithmetic operators ..........................................................................................145
Boolean operators .............................................................................................145
Other operators .................................................................................................145
Aggregation functions ........................................................................................146
Element sets .....................................................................................................146
Measure references............................................................................................147
Element references ............................................................................................147
Element reference scope modifiers ......................................................................149
Template metadata ............................................................................................150
Appendix C: Glossary ........................................................................................ 152
TARGIT 1
TARGIT
A Business Intelligence (BI) System
This software package is developed for Business Intelligence and Business Analytics.
Several key benefits of Business Intelligence software:
Improves decision-making at all organizational levels
A better rate of return on investment in systems, such as ERP, SCM and CRM
Better customer retention and satisfaction
Quicker response to sudden changes in market
More successful and efficient products and services
Performance monitoring
Gives your offices consistent information and statistics
Allows employees to use their time more efficiently
The goal of this software is both ambitious and simple: To make use of unique technology to provide
the best possible conditions for making the right decisions using as few clicks as possible.
Key competitive advantages of the TARGIT:
The best user-friendly technology on the market (designed for non-technical users)
Dashboards, Analyses and Reports with fewer clicks than ever before
Flexible and efficient
Needs much less consulting and implementation support than other reporting tools
Set up is easy and fast to deploy (typically you are up and running within five working days)
Scalable for future growth of both data and users
The software is affordable and the overall cost of ownership is low
TARGIT is a complete software tool kit covering all the Business Intelligence tools you may
need
This software and the context in which it is used, is unique. The program suite, called TARGIT, brings
data to life making it easy to use as a strategic management tool.
What is a BI System?
Having the best and most expensive computer systems on the market is not enough when you cannot
use the stored information in a fast and efficient manner to help you in your daily decisions.
2 TARGIT User Guide
Business Intelligence allows companies to centralize data for easy and fast analysis - thereby
providing the opportunity to make better business decisions by intelligently using corporate
information.
By means of Business Intelligence software, managers and key personnel can analyze all crucial
information right at their own desktop or via the Internet without affecting the original data sources.
Business Intelligence software has become vital to the survival of each and every successful business
because it is capable of fulfilling all needs in terms of
Analyzing data
Monitoring data
Sharing data
Reporting data
A computer based BI System is designed to generate information in a user-friendly way. This offers
decision-makers with limited knowledge of computers the ability to specify their own analysis. Good
Business Intelligence Systems offer tools to apply any imaginable delimitation to data before
displaying them in comprehensible forms, thereby helping identification of possible problem areas.
With a BI System it is possible to analyze many factors, both internal and external, which may affect
the corporation. The only requirement is that there is relevant data to analyze. The foundation of a
Business Intelligence System is therefore the ability to periodically extract data from several sources
(databases) into one analysis database usually referred to as the Data Warehouse.
It is not just a question of displaying data after extraction but also being able to apply delimitations in
form of Drill downs to the data and thereafter visualize the results in comprehensible forms. Drill
downs may also be used for evaluation of possible solutions to problems. One way to put focus on
problem areas is by applying specific colors to data when it has a certain value. Data about a product
with low sales could for instance be colored red.
The major design goal of Business Intelligence Systems is to create better foundations on which to
make decisions both strategic and administrative which have to be made within a corporation.
Organizations that effectively use Business Intelligence to manage and impact decision-making will
have the greatest competitive advantage.
What is a Data Warehouse?
Data Warehousing is all about centralizing data from possibly different systems. Having data from
different systems makes it possible to analyze data across those systems.
Data Warehouse is often defined as a collection of data in support of management and employees
decision-making processes. A Data Warehouse solution should ensure consistent and cleansed
information at all levels.
TARGIT 3
A Data Warehouse can be viewed upon as a periodical intelligent extract of relevant data from a
corporation's enterprise wide operational databases. Before being used for analysis, data should be
optimized for fast access facilitating speedy analysis. Other reasons for extracting data into a separate
analysis database (Data Warehouse) is to make sure that data remains static during the analysis
phase, and secure that the analysis itself does not affect data integrity at the information sources.
In other words, a Data Warehouse is a database designed specifically to meet the needs of decision-
makers and their use of Business Intelligence Systems such as TARGIT.
Data warehousing techniques
There are two basic ways of organizing Data Warehouse data. TARGIT supports both, and they are
briefly described in the following.
Relational Data Warehouse
The relational data model represents the classic approach to database design. Most operational
systems in use in businesses today are based on this principle - ERP systems included. Traditionally,
this approach has therefore also been applied to Data Warehousing databases.
Multidimensional Data Warehouse
Multidimensional databases are based on the need to build databases for high performance analysis
on large amounts of data. The basic principle is to sum up data in the database ensuring a higher
level of readiness for the queries from the programs using the data for building analytical reports.
TARGIT supports several different database platforms for implementing multidimensional Data
Warehouses.
Overview of this user guide
TARGIT provides plenty of functionality, which is centered around the three main functions: analyzing,
reporting and exporting. This user's guide covers all the details of these functions and gives you all
the information needed to analyze and display your data in fewest clicks.
The following list sums up the contents of the individual sections in this guide. Click on a heading to
navigate to the section.
• The Basics
This section describes how to start TARGIT and the fundamental concepts in the user interface.
• Intelligent Analysis
The Intelligent Analysis tool is used to create analyses fast and intuitively with few clicks. This
section describes the options in this tool.
• Designing Analyses
4 TARGIT User Guide
Analyses consist of objects. Objects come in many types and may be created in many ways.
This section explains how to create objects and the differences among object types.
• Object functions
This section explains the wide range of options for objects.
• Criteria
To gain control of which data is displayed, criteria may be applied to objects, analyses and
reports. This section explains how criteria may be applied and to which objects.
• Storyboards
Storyboards are dynamic snapshots of data. This section explains how storyboards may be
created and distributed.
• Forecasting
Forecasting is a way of predicting future data based on historical data. This section describes
when and how forecasting may be applied.
• Designing TARGIT Reports
This section first describes how TARGIT Reports are created, then the different band and
component types are described.
• Preview TARGIT Reports
This section explains the navigation options when previewing the report.
• Printing, Exporting and Sending
Analyses and reports may be printed or exported in various formats. This section explains how
to print and export and which formats are available.
• TARGIT Desktop
Objects may be presented as a part of the Windows Desktop for real time data awareness.
This section explains how to install, use and configure the TARGIT Desktop.
• Keyboard shortcuts
Helpful shortcuts to main functions are listed in this section.
• Formula syntax
Advanced calculations uses a special syntax for referencing elements and measures. This
syntax and other operators are listed in this section.
The Basics 5
The Basics
Working with TARGIT
This application is designed to help analyze and visualize corporate data from the Data Warehouse. To
achieve this, it offers tools to apply any imaginable delimitation to data before display in
comprehensible graphical forms. This will help to identify possible problem areas, but of course also
recognizing factors causing good results.
In many situations it is necessary to print out important information from a Data Warehouse system
in a standard paper report. TARGIT Report, imbedded in TARGIT, provides a flexible and intuitive
reporting tool that meets all needs for high quality customizable reports. In addition, all data
displayed in TARGIT may be exported to folders or via e-mail in several output formats to meet all
needs.
User Levels
TARGIT users can have different levels of access to the application functions. Normal users have
access to the majority of functions, but some of the more advanced functions are restricted to other
types of users. Functions that are available only to users of other types than Normal will be marked
accordingly.
Starting TARGIT
The application is started by double clicking the TARGIT icon on the Windows desktop or selecting it
from the Windows 'Start Programs' menu. This brings up the logon screen where the desired TARGIT
Server may be entered or selected in a drop-list. Depending on the security system of the desired
server, the user has several options to log on. If the desired TARGIT Server uses standard
authentication, a valid Username and Password must be entered in the edit fields followed by a click
on the key button to start the logon procedure.
If the desired TARGIT Server uses Windows authentication, the 'Use Windows Authentication'
checkbox must be checked. If the user?s PC is part of the same domain as the TARGIT Server, just
click the key button to start logon procedures. If the TARGIT Server is on a different domain than the
user, a click in the 'Specify credentials' checkbox, allows the user also to enter the name of the
domain of the desired TARGIT Server and valid Windows user name and password, before clicking the
key icon to start the logon procedure.
6 TARGIT User Guide
TARGIT Main Window
The main window consists of five elements: 1. the Menu just beneath the program title bar, 2. the
Toolbar beneath the Menu, and under this, 3. the Smartpad to the left and 4. the Work area to the
right. At the bottom: 5. the Statusbar.
The Menu
The menu contains buttons for easy access to all application functions and settings. The menu may be
hidden to enlarge the size of the work area. This can be done either by clicking View | Menubar or
pressing F10.
The Toolbar
The Toolbar contains buttons for activating the primary functions of the application. The four buttons
at the left of the Toolbar represent standard functions such as: New, Open, Save and Print. The
remaining buttons may vary and represent functions for creating Objects and Reports and working
with them. The Toolbar may be hidden to enlarge the size of the Work area. Next to some of the
buttons there is a small down-arrow button which will open submenus that enable users to select
other function types within the same category.
The Navigation Bar
The purpose of the Navigation Bar is to give all users a dynamic and context sensitive navigation tool.
It is placed between the toolbar and the criteria bar and its content may be defined by users with both
Windows and report developer user rights and may be used by users with all user rights. The
Navigation bar consist of a collection of interlinked menus each of which contains a number of
buttons. Each of the buttons may be used to open a document, an URL or simply display an image or
some text.
Using the Navigation Bar
When a developer has defined a Navigation bar with menus and buttons, users will see a start menu
in the Navigation Bar when logging in. The start menu as well as other menus contain buttons that
may have three purposes: Information, opening a document and/or opening another menu in the
Navigation Bar. The typical use of buttons is triggering of documents either with or without criteria of
the currently opened document depending on how the button was defined or as navigational buttons
to open other menus (e.g. back/forward buttons). If a button triggers a document and opens another
menu, that menu is also opened if the same document is opened from Smartpad Documents or
somewhere else within the client while the button is displayed in the Navigation Bar, such that the
navigational context is retained no matter where the document was opened from. Right-clicking the
Navigation Bar opens a menu with options to go back to the previous menu, the start menu or hide
the Navigation Bar.
The Basics 7
If there is not enough space for the buttons in a menu it is divided into several pages and an arrow is
displayed on the right border to go to the next page.
Note: The Navigation bar may be hidden from the View menu or by pressing Alt + F6.
Defining the Navigation Bar
The Navigation Bar may be defined by opening the Navigation Bar dialog from 'Tools | Navigation Bar'
or by right-clicking the Navigation Bar and select Properties. The dialog consists of a button bar in the
top, a menu structure to the left and a settings area where the settings of the selected button or
menu may be changed.
Defining menus
The left side of the Navigation Bar dialog displays a tree structure with the Navigation Bar element at
the top followed by menu items. Selecting the Navigation bar displays height and margin settings that
applies to all menus and buttons in the Navigation Bar. The start menu may also be set and
determines the menu to open when users log on to the client. The start menu setting may also be set
by right-clicking a menu and enable the 'Use as start menu' item.
Selecting a menu in the tree structure displays a name text field and a button spacing selector. The
button space is set for all buttons in the selected menu.
A new menu may be created by right-clicking an item in the tree structure and select 'New menu' or
'Duplicate menu' if an existing menu should be duplicated with all content and settings. A convenient
way to create interlinked menus is to right-click a button in a menu and select 'New submenu' which
adds a new menu to the navigation bar and automatically creates a submenu link from the selected
button to the menu - whenever the button is clicked the submenu is opened. A menu may be removed
using the right-click menu.
Defining buttons
When a menu is selected in the tree structure, buttons may be added to the button bar on top of the
menu and settings areas. By default new menus contain one button. New buttons are created by
right-clicking the button bar and selecting 'New button' or right-clicking a button and selecting
'Duplicate button' to copy an existing button including settings. It is also possible to cut/copy/paste
buttons or copy/paste button styling from the right-click menu. When styling is copied only the
settings from the three tabs; Style, Hover and Selected are copied to another button. Buttons may be
organized on the button bar by using drag and drop movements or by right-clicking an object and use
the 'Move button left/right' options. A new button may also be added by dragging a document from
Smartpad Documents to the Navigation Bar. The new button obtains the same properties as the
button to the left of where the document was dropped. Note that the Navigation Bar is divided into
several pages if there is not enough space for the buttons. Switching page is done by using the arrow
in the right side of the menu.
Left-clicking a button selects it and the button is highlighted. The settings area contains five tabs that
may be used to format the selected button:
8 TARGIT User Guide
Button
The button may be given a title that appears on the button. The entered text may include codes that
refer to document name ($d), path ($p) and trigger URL ($u). The same codes may also be used in
the hint text box. The codes may be displayed in the dialog by clicking the information icon. Both title
and hint may be translated by clicking the globe icon and enter text in the translation dialog.
By default no icon is displayed on a button, but three icon options are available in the image selector;
Document, displays a small document image as used in the Smartpad. Thumbnail, displays the
thumbnail of the selected trigger analysis in the Action tab. The Custom option makes it possible to
select an image from the list of available images. New images may be added by clicking the 'Add'
button and select the image. For each image option the image placement and spacing between text
and image inside the button may be set. The height of the image may also be set for the thumbnail
and custom options - the height is limited by the height of the Navigation Bar and margins.
Note that images may be managed by right-clicking a menu or the Navigation Bar to the left and
selecting 'Manage images'. The settings area changes to a list of currently added images with
information about format and size. For each image a number may be displayed in parenthesis to
display how many buttons the image is used in. Buttons may be added, replaced or removed using
the options in the bottom in the dialog.
The button width is automatically set to fit the contents. The width may also be set to a fixed number
of pixels or to fill the empty space in the Navigation Bar.
Action
In the Action tab a trigger may be defined. The trigger is similar to the trigger that may be set for
objects in an analysis. Clicking the 'Add trigger' link opens a dialog with two options; 'Document'
displays the list of documents equal to the Documents tab in the Smartpad. The appropriate document
must be selected and if the option 'Include criteria when triggering' is checked the activated document
is assigned global criteria of the document that was open when the button was clicked in the
Navigation Bar. The second option is to trigger an URL. This is done by entering an URL in the text
field. Activation of the URL is done similar to activation of a document - when clicking an element in
the object with the trigger, the URL is opened in a new browser window. A selected trigger may be
removed again by clicking the cross next to the trigger.
The Submenu option makes it possible to open another menu in the Navigation Bar when the button is
clicked. All other menus than the currently selected are available. Options to go to the previous menu
or the start menu are also available in the submenu drop down.
Style
In the Style tab the button text font may be set. Clicking the font opens a new dialog where all of the
fonts installed on the system may be selected. Other options such as font size, color and style may
also be selected and in the bottom of the dialog an example text box shows the formatting of the
current selections. In the right side of the dialog all recently used fonts across the application are
displayed. Note that checking the 'Use default font' checkbox overrides the selected font and size.
The Basics 9
The button background is by default set to none (transparent) and may be formatted in three ways:
As a solid color, as a gradient with from and to colors and a left-to-right or top-to-bottom direction or
as an image with four fill options. Repeat - repeats the image across the button as many times as
space allows, Stretch - stretches the image to fill the whole button without regard for dimension
change, Fit - resizes the image to fit either height or width and keeps the dimensions, Actual size -
inserts the image in the center with its actual size.
Button borders may have either rectangular shape or rounded rectangle shape. Both shapes have a
color option and the rounded rectangle shape also has a corner radius option to specify how rounded
the corners should be.
Hover
The Hover tab contains the same options as the Style tab, but each of the Font, Background and
Border settings contain an override option that must be checked to override the values of the Style
tab, when a button is hovered.
Selected
The Selected tab contains the same options as the Style tab, but each of the Font, Background and
Border settings contain an override option that must be checked to override the values of the Style
tab, when a button is selected.
Note: Sometimes a developer may edit a menu where a button triggers a document that the
developer does not have access to (e.g because of roles). In this case the button is displayed with an
orange information icon and the same icon is displayed next to the trigger document in the Action tab.
In the Navigation Bar this button is hidden for users that don't have access to the document.
The Smartpad
The Smartpad covers the left fourth of the main window. The Smartpad has seven tabs: Documents,
Source data, Properties, Calculations, Criteria, Drillpad and Scheduled Jobs. These tabs are used in a
wide variety of the functions and will therefore be described along with the functions in the following
sections. The Smartpad may be hidden by pressing F4 to enlarge the size of the work area. The
Smartpad may also be hidden by double clicking the right frame line that separates the Smartpad
from the analysis objects. Note that in some situations the tabs may have several pages. When
browsing these pages it is always possible to go back to the first page by clicking the Smartpad tab.
The basic functionality offered by the mentioned tabs is:
Documents
The Documents tab contains four sections; Favorites, Shared, Personal, Recent.
The Favorites section contains user defined links to documents ie. a document can only be removed
from the Favorites section and not deleted - Favorites may be seen as shortcuts to popular
documents. Since a Favorites document is only a link, copying or cutting it will in both cases make a
copy of the original document if it is pasted into another folder than the Favorites. If it is copied or cut
and pasted within the Favorites folder, the links are copied and cut in the usual copy/cut manner. A
10 TARGIT User Guide
document may be added to Favorites from each of the other three sections by dragging it directly to
Favorites or right-clicking a Document and selecting 'Document | Add to favorites'. This opens a new
dialog where the placement of the document may be selected and new folders may be created. A third
option is to add a currently open document to the Favorites root by clicking the Favorites icon in the
toolbar. To remove a document from Favorites right-click it and select 'Remove from favorites'. Note
that if the source document a Favorites document is linked to is deleted, the explanation icon of the
Favorites document changes color to orange to indicate a broken link. The right-click menu items that
require the source document are also disabled.
The shared section contains documents that are available to all users. Only users with developer
rights may save documents and create folders in this section.
The Personal section contains documents that are only available to the logged in user.
The Recent section contains a chronological list of documents that have recently been opened. The list
may be cleared by right-clicking and select 'List | Clear'.
Moving or copying documents may also be done by dragging them. Dragging documents between the
Shared and Personal sections causes the documents to be cut and pasted while dragging to or from
the Recent or Favorites sections causes documents to be copied and pasted. A document may also be
copy-pasted between the Shared and Personal folders by pressing 'Ctrl' while dragging the document.
When dragging a document, the cursor actively displays what action will be performed if the document
is dropped in the hovered placement.
In each section a right-click menu is available with general options to Open, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete
and Rename (note that not all options are available in each section). An explanation dialog may also
be opened with a thumbnail preview of the document and information on the elements and criteria in
the document. The time of the last modification and the user name of the user who modified it are
stamped in the bottom of the dialog. The dialog may also be opened by clicking the icon next to each
document in the Smartpad. Note that the thumbnail image and user stamp is not be displayed until
the document is saved if upgrading from older versions of TARGIT, where document explanations are
not available. Also note that clicking the thumbnail opens the document.
When a document is right-clicked a document submenu is available with options to add the document
to favorites (only other sections than Favorites), Schedule the document for export and enable the
document to load on startup.
An Open submenu is also available. It contains three options; 'Open' - opens the document as it was
saved. E.g. if an analysis is saved in define mode it is opened in the new 'without data' mode and if it
was saved with data loaded in two out three objects it is opened in the same state. This is the same
as clicking the document. 'Open with data' - opens the document with all data loaded, no matter if
some objects or the whole document were in define mode when saved. 'Open without data' - opens
the document without data. For reports and report collections this means a thumbnail preview with an
option to load data. For analyses the objects are visualized as a shaded version of the object type and
without data. This option is convenient if changes must be made before load intensive data are
loaded. Note that the last two open options are not available for Storyboards.
The Basics 11
Each section also contain a List submenu in the right-click menu with options to Refresh or Clear the
list. The name of the folders and documents may be changed by selecting `Use translations´ from the
List submenu. This will toggle between the file system names of the folders and analyses and the
names translated in TARGIT Management Studio. The translations are shown in the language selected
from the Tools menu. Each section, except the Recent list, has the options 'Folders first' and 'Sort by
type'. These options are also available from the dialog opened by clicking the Properties menu item.
For more information on these and other document properties see the User Preferences section.
Searching Documents
In the bottom of the Documents tab a search field is available. The search field is always available no
matter which section or folder the user has navigated to and the search field will always search for
documents throughout the Documents tab. The search operators supported are the same as for the
criteria editor with the exception that A B is searched as A & B (and) instead of A | B (or).
The search string entered is used to search through all the document properties that are used in the
search algorithm. The properties are listed according to a precedence order where document
filenames and descriptions are ranked highest, then data fields (e.g. measures and dimensions) and
at last user generated text (e.g. custom titles and explanations) and criteria data. Search results are
ranked according to this precedence. E.g. if the search string is 'Revenue', all documents with
'Revenue' in the translated filename are displayed at the top. If there are more than one document
with 'Revenue' in the translated filename, these documents are listed according to how many search
string occurrences they have across all the search properties. If this number is also the same, they
are listed alphabetically.
Notice that it may take some time before newly created/changed documents are included in the
search since the indexing of the documents takes time.
Source data
This tab is used to select data from the Data Warehouse. The path at the top is used to select a cube
from a data source and browse all connected cubes. The area below contains the dimensions and
measures for the selected cube available to be used for creating analyses or reports. In case of
designing a report, the bottom of this tab has buttons for adding text and graphical components to the
report.
Right-clicking in the Source data tab brings up a menu with options to add measures and dimensions
to the active analysis or dimensions to the criteria bar. Another options is 'TARGIT this'. It makes a
hyperrelation based on the clicked dimension or measure.
'Show explanation' opens a small box with information about the clicked data element. This includes
name, description and the location of the element, the approximate member count for dimensions
(Forced/initial criteria not taken into account and all members included as this number is obtained
directly from the cube), Dynamic time status for period dimensions. For cubes the explanation
includes name, description and location of the cube and the number of dimensions, hierarchies,
measures and KPI's contained in the cube (these numbers are only displayed when a cube has been
12 TARGIT User Guide
selected and is right-clicked from the source data path in the top of the tab). The last processing time
is also stamped into the box.
'Search for documents' opens the Documents tab and displays all documents containing the clicked
cube/measure/dimension. In the bottom of the right-click menu the List menu item contains three
subitems for sorting the Source data content; 'Display folders first' which displays folders before any
measures or dimensions in the cube, 'Sort by type' sorts folders, measures and dimensions according
to type, 'Group by type' groups dimensions and measures by separating them in the Source data tab.
Note that at all times when data may be added to the work area, data elements are colored blue. E.g.
when switching to a cube that has not been used in the analysis all data are colored black. The same
applies for search results. When doing multi cube search only data from the same cube as the
selected object are colored blue and may be added to the object.
Searching Source data
In the bottom of the Source data tab a search field is available to search for data elements. When a
cube is selected a search string may be entered and when clicking the search icon a list of data
elements containing the search string is displayed. To search across cubes, the multi cube icon must
be clicked and the search is redone across all available cubes. Note that multi cube search is default
and cannot be changed when placed in the Source data root.
Single cube search results are sorted in alphabetical order and multi cube search sorted in cube order
and within each cube in alphabetical order. If search results can be added to the selected object they
are colored blue and may be clicked to add them to the object. The containing cube name is also
displayed underneath each search result in grey and may be clicked to navigate to the cube. The
right-click menu is also available for search results.
The search function in Source data supports the same operators as the search function in the
Documents tab.
Properties
Contain the primary functions and settings, including type specification, formatting and Intelligent
Agents, for the active Object and in case of designing a report, for the active item.
Calculations
Contains a 'Smart calculations' dialog for the active Object making it easy to add or edit predefined
calculations. In the bottom of the tab is a button giving access to the Advanced Calculations editor.
This tab is not used when working with Reports.
Criteria
The Criteria tab provides options for defining Global and Local criteria as well as defining Comparisons.
A criterion, whether that is Global, Local or a Comparison element, is defined by selected dimension
values from one dimension. The selection of values is furthermore defined by the selection operator,
The Basics 13
e.g. 'equal to', 'different from', 'less than' etc. Use the 'Disable/Enable immediate refresh' toggle to
stop the objects from refreshing every time a criterion is added or changed – this is especially useful
when working with large or complex data structures with long query response times.
Drillpad
The „Drillpad? tab will automatically log whenever criteria, Global or 'Drill down' criteria, are changed
for the active Analysis. Changes in Global criteria are logged for Reports. The log will be displayed as a
list of nested criteria in a chronological sequence. Any of the logged entries in this list can be clicked
to bring the user back to the exact state of the Analysis or the Report according to the selected
'Drillpad' entry. Back and Forward buttons are available to traverse the „Drillpad? one step at a time.
Scheduled Jobs
The „Scheduled Jobs? tab provides options to edit existing scheduled jobs i.e. reports and storyboards.
When this tab is open the Work area will display a list of all active scheduled jobs and selecting one by
a click will present its data in the Smartpad Scheduled Jobs ready to inspect and edit.
The Work area
The Work area is the part of the window where the actual work is done. All Analyses, Reports and the
Intelligent Analysis wizard are placed in the work area.
Thumbnail Navigator
The Thumbnail Navigator is an animated navigator placed below the Intelligent Analysis tool on the
front page. The Navigator displays thumbnails of all documents in the Documents Favorites by default.
Switching between documents is done by clicking on documents to the left or right of the centered
document or by sliding the mouse wheel. Clicking on the centered document opens it. The centered
document also displays an information box where the document explanation may be opened by
clicking the information 'i' or the document icon. The information box also contains the name of the
document and the folder it is placed in. Above the thumbnails the path of the displayed documents is
shown. The Thumbnail Navigator may also display documents in the Recent section. The section to
display may be changed in User Preferences.
User Preferences
Note: If upgrading from versions that don't have thumbnails a generic thumbnail is displayed instead
of a document preview until the document is saved. Each time a document is saved the thumbnail is
updated.
14 TARGIT User Guide
The Statusbar
The Statusbar shows information about the current status of the tasks being performed by TARGIT.
This information is shown in the left side of the bar. The Statusbar may be hidden to enlarge the size
of the work area.
TARGIT Report Main Window
The TARGIT Report Main Window when manually designing Reports consists of five elements: Menu,
Toolbar, Smartpad, Work area and Statusbar.
TARGIT Report Elements
This section gives an overview of the different elements of a TARGIT Report. The actual use and
functionality of the elements are covered elsewhere.
Bands
A TARGIT Report consists of a number of bands running across the paper. A band is a rectangular
portion of the report area, covering the total width of the report (except when creating multi-column
reports). When the report is processed for output each band will be repeated a certain number of
times given by the context. In the bands various items can be placed to make up the actual contents
of the report. The purpose of having bands is to be able to group the information and determine how
often each band is repeated.
Components
TARGIT Report offers a series of components to be used in the report. The Components holds the
definitions of the actual contents of reports and components are placed inside bands.
Data Fields
The most important part of TARGIT Report is of course the possibility to present (dynamic)
information from the data warehouse. This is accomplished in TARGIT Report by giving access to the
measures and dimensions defined in either a relational data model or the multi-dimensional cube. The
list of available measures and dimensions is kept in the Smartpad and by drag/drop they can be
placed on the report.
Text Components
The Text Components makes it possible to place static or semi-dynamic text on a report. Some Text
Components will hold a text that will never change during or between executions of the report, while
other types of components will change either during the execution (e.g. page number) or between
executions (e.g. date and time).
The Basics 15
Graphical Components
The Graphical Components could be used to insert images or simple drawings. It also includes the
possibility to place TARGIT objects or whole Analyses in the report.
Objects
Objects are basically windows within the TARGIT Work area that display data. An Object can show
data in many ways, for instance as a pie chart or a table. Within each Object window it is possible to
influence which data is displayed and how it is displayed. Objects can be used on their own or more
likely for composing Analyses consisting of one or more Objects.
Object Explanation
Menu: Object | Object | Explanation Keyboard: CTRL+I
A very important concept of TARGIT is the ability to perform advanced analyses consisting of a variety
of Objects, Criteria and Calculations and with large quantities of data without loosing track of the
individual elements and actions performed to build the analyses. In order to make sure that this is
unlikely to happen, all Objects can “explain themselves” to the user. An Object Explanation contains
information about the Dimensions and Measures of the Object, which Criteria and Drill downs affect
the Object, which Drill downs affect other Objects and whether and how Intelligent Agents may
influence the Object.
In order to improve legibility there is an option in the Smartpad Properties tab which may be used to
add custom information to the automatically supplied explanation.
Analyses and Reports
An Analysis consists of one or more Objects placed in the work area. All Objects in an Analysis are
connected, allowing one Object to be used to specify or influence data shown in other Objects.
Combining Objects into Analyses make automatic 'Drill down' searches possible.
Reports are used to produce dynamic printable reports from the data warehouse data based on
certain parameters and selection criteria. Both Analyses and Reports may be built either by using the
user friendly Intelligent Analysis tool, or by manual design.
Save and Open Analyses and Reports
Saving Analyses and Reports is an important part of using TARGIT. It is the key function to enable
sharing of information among different users. Only the object definitions are saved in an Analysis file -
not the data. When the Analysis is later opened it will be refreshed to show the current data at the
time of the opening.
16 TARGIT User Guide
The Toolbar contains buttons that will save and open Analyses and Reports.
Use this button to save the current Analysis or Report.
Use this button to open a saved Analysis or Report or double-click on the file in the Documents
tab of the Smartpad.
Saving and opening Analyses and Reports is implemented using dialogs. TARGIT offers the option to
save Analyses and Reports as Personal or Shared in a Virtual File System (VFS). When an Analysis or
a Report is saved in the VFS it is transferred to and stored in a folder on the server. This means that
the Analysis or Report is immediately available to other users connected to that server both via a web
and a Windows client.
When an Analysis or a Report is saved as Shared, it will be available to all users on any client. Note
that the user needs to have developer rights to be able to save in the Shared section.
When an Analysis or a Report is saved as Personal it is available only to the user, who saved it. It will
still be available on any client, but only when the user who originally saved the Analysis or Report logs
on.
In the Save dialog the user has the option to create subfolders similar to the ordinary Windows file
system. This makes it possible to organize and group Analyses and Reports, and the user has the
option to rearrange saved Analyses and Reports by using drag/drop in the Documents tab in the
Smartpad.
Analyses and Reports may be saved in any other location by selecting the text 'or save to file location'
in the bottom of the dialog and then browsing to the location in the Windows save dialog.
Analyses and Reports saved as Shared and Personal are available through the Documents tab of the
Smartpad. By double-clicking on the Analysis or Report, it is retrieved and displayed based on the
current information in the Data Warehouse. Alternatively, Analyses and Reports may be opened with
the open dialog via the File menu or the toolbar. Note that a search field is available in the open
dialog to search for documents in the Documents tab. Analyses and Reports may also be opened from
another file location by selecting 'or open from file location' in the bottom of the Open dialog.
The Recent section of the Documents tab will after some use present a list showing the most recently
used Analyses and Reports for easy access.
Organizing Analyses and Reports
Analyses and Reports saved in the Virtual File System (VFS) may be organized by simple drag-drop
actions in the Smartpad Documents window. Drag-drop of an Analysis or Report to a different folder
while holding down the CTRL-key will make a copy of the file in the target folder of the Smartpad
Documents and leave the original file untouched. Analyses and Reports may be deleted from the VFS
by selecting the „Delete? option in the right-click menu.
The Basics 17
Tools
The Tools menu offers easy access to major tools of the application including preferences settings and
logging.
Intelligent Analysis
Menu: Tools | Intelligent Analysis
This menu item shows or hides the Intelligent Analysis tool, the same action which may be achieved
by pressing the 'Intelligent Analysis' button in the Toolbar.
Schedule
Menu: Tools | Schedule
This menu item offers a shortcut to the Intelligent Analysis 'Options to Schedule a Report' tool.
Notifications
Menu: Tools | Notifications Smartpad: Scheduled jobs
This menu item offers a shortcut to open the Smartpad `Scheduled Jobs´ tab and present a list of
active Notification Agents in the Work area.
Reporting Services web
Menu: Tools | Reporting Services web Smartpad: Documents
This menu item and the link in the Smartpad Documents opens the web interface to the Reporting
Services Server in the Work area. The URL path to the Reporting Manager Web Interface must be
defined in the TARGIT Management Studio.
The Reporting Manager Web Interface will display a list of reports that have been promoted to the
Reporting Services Server, e.g. after having been designed in MS Visual Studio.
18 TARGIT User Guide
Gauge Builder Wizard
Menu: Tools | Gauge Builder Wizard
This menu item opens the Gauge Builder Wizard. The Gauge Builder Wizard is a unique tool that
enables the user to create customized gauges based on user defined graphics. To start the Gauge
Builder Wizard go to the Tools item in the menu bar and click the `Gauge Builder Wizard´ button. A
new dialog box is opened with two choices; `New gauge´ and `Modify gauge´.
New gauge
If `New gauge´ is chosen a new screen will appear with three types of gauges to chose from: The
speedometer gauge and progress bar, which are used to represent values and icon gauge used to
represent value ranges. After choosing the type of gauge, one or more images (bitmap, JPEG, PNG or
GIF) may be chosen to represent the gauge depending on the selected gauge type. The image size
(pixels) should reflect the size of the object where it should be used. If the image is too small, scaling
the object causes the image to pixelate, while using an image that is too big causes larger rendering
time when scaling the image down.
After choosing the images and clicking `Next´ a name for the gauge can be typed before pressing
`Create´ to create the gauge. When the gauge is created the gauge builder editor will be shown with
the gauge in the main window and a pane with a gauge section and a properties section in the left
side. The top of the pane on the left side controls the visibility of the gauge. Marking the checkboxes
will include the gauge item in the final gauge. Options to change the order of the gauge items and
adding or removing items can be found below the gauge items.
Clicking the name of any gauge item will enable a properties pane below the gauge items, where size,
placement, title, description and other properties can be set for the individual items. Options to move
the items will also appear in the main window. When satisfied with the gauge clicking the `OK´ button
in the bottom of the pane will add the gauge to the existing gauges in TARGIT and making it available
to all users.
Note: It is possible to work with multiple images in multiple layers for backgrounds, scales, needles,
icons etc.
Modify gauge
If `Modify gauge´ is chosen from the Gauge Builder Wizard a list of gauges is shown. Some of the
gauges are system gauges and can only be copied while custom made gauges can be modified. When
a gauge has been selected for modification the Gauge Builder editor will appear with the gauge in the
main window and the gauge items in the left pane. The modification of a gauge is done in the same
way as explained above when creating a new gauge.
Note: Building and editing gauges requires Developer user rights.
The Basics 19
Launch TARGIT Desktop
Menu: Tools | Launch Desktop
This menu item launches TARGIT Desktop, an independent program that gives access to TARGIT
information before the TARGIT client is opened. If already launched, selecting this menu item will
close TARGIT Desktop.
Report templates
Menu: Tools | Report templates
By clicking this menu item a new window opens, where saved report templates can be selected for
further use. When selecting a template three options appear in then bottom of the dialog. The delete
button deletes the template. The edit button opens the template for editing only and the Use button
opens it for use when creating a new report. Templates may also be opened from the `New Report´
menu item in the toolbar.
Criteria editor
Menu: Tools | Criteria editor Keyboard: CTRL+R
This menu item activates the Criteria editor, the same action which may be achieved by pressing the
'Criteria editor' button in the Toolbar or keying CTRL+R.
Select language
Menu: Tools | Select language
Selecting this item will bring the user to the login screen, where the preferred language may be
selected from a drop-list of available languages.
User Preferences
Menu: Tools | User Preferences
This tool enables the user to change some of the application's default settings. The available options
are described below.
Appearance
The appearance tab provides the following options for changing the visual aspect of the application:
20 TARGIT User Guide
Small smartpad tabs
Click 'Small smartpad tabs' to toggle the Smartpad tabs from their large, default size to small size,
where they are displayed as icons in a single line at the bottom of the Smartpad. Use this function to
save space in the Smartpad, which is useful for some of the space demanding functions.
Week starts on Sunday
Per default, the calendar settings of TARGIT is set to start weeks on mondays. Using this function the
weeks will start on Sundays.
Scroll grid headers
Per default, only data fields of tables are scrollable leaving column and row headers viewable when
scrolling. Enabling this option will cause entire tables, including column and row headers, to be
scrollable.
Compact hierarchies
Per default, tables with multi-level dimensions will display the dimension hierarchy with one column or
one row for each level in the dimension. The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a
multi-level dimension, to be displayed in a single column or row. Setting this option in the Preferences
menu will enable this feature in all new objects. Per default, this option is disabled. The 'Object |
Formatting' menu has a similar option to enable / disable this feature in individual Objects.
Behavior
The behavior tab provides the following behavioral options:
Always logon to current server
Enabling this option will cause the login screen, upon opening the application, to be automatically
processed with the current server and user information. Per default, this option is disabled.
Auto-filter criteria bar
When this option is enabled, the Criteria bar drop-lists are filtered to show only the dimension
members that would be present in a data object being influenced by the selected criteria.
Auto-filter criteria editor
When this option is enabled, the Criteria editor is filtered to show only the dimension values that
would be present in a data object being influenced by the selected criteria.
Member list threshold
When this option is enabled a threshold is put on the number of members shown in criteria bar drop
lists. The number of members shown may be specified in the value field. If the option is disabled all
members are shown.
Drillpad mode
Three options are available for the drillpad mode: Always show drillpad, which makes it possible to
enable the drillpad by clicking it. This splits the Smartpad in two - one part for the selected tab in the
Smartpad and one for the drillpad. The drillpad may be disabled again by clicking the tab again. Show
The Basics 21
drillpad on use is the default selection and shows the drillpad when drilling takes place. Never change
to drillpad does not change to the drillpad on drilling and the drillpad tab has to be clicked in the
Smartpad to show the drillpad.
Expansion and chart type
When this option is enabled and an object is auto-expanded for instance as a result of a drill action or
by applying criteria, the type of chart will automatically change in accordance with the level of
expansion. This option has three states: Always, auto expands an object and changes the chart type
to the one most often used for the dimension according to the built in intelligent analysis. This is done
when applying a criterion, when hyper relating or drilling. If for example the criterion JEANS is applied
(from the criteria editor/bar, from hyper relating or from drilling) the object is auto-expanded to show
all children of the JEANS hierarchy level and the chart type that is most often used for this dimension
is used to display all the children. The setting When TARGITing also auto expands the object and
changes the chart type, but only when hyper relating. The setting Never disables all auto expansion
and changing chart type.
Note: Expansion and chart type is only active if the object has one dimension on the Y-axis of the
data page.
Print explanation on last page
When using Print Special options: "Chart and explanation" or "Data and explanation" explanations are
by default printed at the bottom of each page. This option allows the user to print the explanation on
the last page only.
Note: If the explanation spans more than 50% of the page height, it will automatically be moved to
the last page.
Snap to grid
When placing elements in a report, the placement is decided by an underlying grid. The grid size may
be changed by this function and thereby change the size of the steps when moving elements with the
keyboard keys. e.g. a 4 x 6 grid causes elements to be moved in steps of 4 pixels along the X-axis
and 6 pixels along the Y-axis.
Documents
The documents tab provides the following options:
Load document
When right-clicking a document in the Documents tab there is an option to load the document
whenever the client is started. If this option is enabled on a document, the name of the document is
displayed here. Loading the document on start up may be disabled by clicking the red cross.
Start in Folder
When starting the client the Documents tab is displayed in the Smartpad. This option decides what
content to initially display in the Documents tab. Favorites is default. Note that if the specified folder is
empty the root of Documents is displayed.
22 TARGIT User Guide
Show folders first
This option is enabled by default and causes folders to be displayed first in the Documents tab. The
option may also be changed from the right-click menu in the Documents tab.
Sort by type
This option is disabled by default and causes all content in the Documents tab to be sorted by type
(default sorting is alphabetical). The option may also be changed from the right-click menu in the
Documents tab.
Folder
This option is set to 'Auto' by default. This setting displays Favorites in the Thumbnail Navigator, but if
there are no Favorites the Recent documents are displayed instead. Options to display 'Favorites' and
'Recent' are also available.
Flush Intelligence
Menu: Tools | Flush Intelligence
The application does, in an intelligent way, remember and reuse the user?s preferred selections. E.g. it
remembers the preferred Object types for certain combinations of dimensions and measures. Clicking
the 'Flush intelligence' option will cause this memory to be reset.
Logging
Menu: Tools | Logging
Query logging
Enabling this option will cause the application to write all MDX actions into a log file in HTML format.
This may be especially helpful for advanced users that need to know the MDX syntax for specific
actions.
View query log
This option will only be available if 'Query logging' has previously been enabled. It will open a browser
to display the present contents of the log file.
Log query results
This is an extension of the 'Query logging' option that will include query results in the log file.
Getting help
The Basics 23
Menu: Help Keyboard: F1
TARGIT has an integrated help function. This may be activated by pressing F1, by clicking `Help |
TARGIT help´ in the menu bar or by clicking the small icon showing a question mark in the right side
of the toolbar. Activating the help function will open a new window with a tree structure on the left
side and a view frame to the right. Different tabs are also available above the tree structure with
access to an index and a search functionexactly like the one with this user's guide.
Two other options are available from the help menu. The first option is a `Contact Us´ menu item.
Clicking this item opens the default browser with contact information. The other option is `About
TARGIT´, which opens a new window with license and user information and the license agreement.
24 TARGIT User Guide
Intelligent Analysis
TARGIT offers two methods of designing analyses and reports. First the traditional way, where all
content and formatting is specified in a number of manual steps or secondly the user friendly
Intelligent Analysis tool which will create powerful analyses, dashboards and reports just with a few
clicks of the mouse.
The Intelligent Analysis tool
Traditionally, analysis and report generators require numerous manual steps to create perfect results,
which can be tedious and time-consuming. This application is actually no different as it provides the
user with all the necessary tools and features to do exactly that. But it also offers a unique way of
creating analyses and reports which shields the user from having to deal with the less attractive
details.
The Intelligent Analysis tool is designed to fulfill most requirements for designing analyses,
dashboards and reports. For a detailed description of all components of an Analysis or a dashboard,
and how to add or change components and their properties in order to manually improve the Analysis,
please refer to the Designing Analyses chapter.
When more control of a TARGIT Report layout and content is required, than is available through the
Intelligent Analysis tool, it is possible to enter manual define mode, which is described in the chapter
Designing TARGIT Report.
The Intelligent Analysis tool can be started by clicking on the 'New...' or 'Intelligent Analysis' button
on the Toolbar or by selecting the File | New… menu item.
Start a new Intelligent Analysis.
Shows/hides Intelligent Analysis.
When this feature is activated the work area changes from the standard define mode to the Intelligent
Analysis interface. The Intelligent Analysis tool divides the Work area into two areas. The upper half
contains first an explanation of the analysis in readable text followed by options that may be selected
in order to accomplish the task. The lower half, the sample area, will display a model of how the
Analysis or Report will look, based on the present selections, when executed. The lower half may be
closed by clicking the divider line in order to make more room for explanation and options. A new click
on the divider line at the bottom of the work area will redisplay the Sample area. The OODA circle
shown to the right of the options represent the four phases a business process goes through. Hovering
a phase will highlight it and clicking a phase in the OODA circle will filter the Intelligent Analysis tool
to show the options relevant for the clicked phase. Clicking the 'More' button will reveal all available
options. Rarely used options are hidden in the normal list, but a clicked OODA part will show all items
relevant for the clicked part.
Intelligent Analysis 25
Explanation
The explanation initially says ‘I would like to…’ and the options section will present the major options,
‘…analyze…’ to use the wizard's user friendly options to build an Analysis with one or more Objects,
‘…create a dashboard showing …’ to create a dashboard, ‘…create a report…’ to create a Report, ‘…be
notified…’ to create a notification activity, ‘…schedule’ to schedule Analyses (as a picture file), data
from objects, Storyboards, Notification Agents and Reports, ‘…create a storyboard…’ to create a
Storyboard and display it as either a video, podcast or slideshow, ‘…search…’ to search through e-
mails, documents and websites for information that the selected analysis deals with. The search
functionality is based upon Microsoft Windows Desktop Search technology, and finally ‘…search for
Sentinels…’ to search for Sentinels to keep an eye on your data.
After selecting one of these major options, the option field will present more options for the user to
select from in order to accomplish the required task, and update the explanation with one or more
sentences that, in clear text, will explain the complete task as defined so far. When the mouse is
hovered over active elements of the explanation, the element will be highlighted to indicate that it
may be altered by clicking it. When options which require further input are brought back to edit mode,
a Remove button appears to remove the option from the report. Options which require no further
input are simply removed by clicking the item in the explanation.
The Back button will undo the choices made in reverse order. This means that the latest action is
canceled first, then the action before that, etc.
The Go button will use all the selections made in the Intelligent Analysis tool and perform the specified
task.
Sample
When the Intelligent Analysis tool is used to build an Analysis, Dashboard or a Report, the sample
area will show which elements has been included in the Analysis, Dashboard or Report so far. The
elements shown are placeholders to give an impression of what will be included in the final Analysis,
Dashboard or Report and how it will look when executed.
Note: The Sample area may be closed to make room for more options. This is done by clicking on the
dividing line. Reopening the Sample area is done in the same way.
Reentering Intelligent Analysis
Analyses and Dashboards generated with the Intelligent Analysis tool may be edited using the
Intelligent Analysis tool. By pressing the Toolbar „Intelligent Analysis? button, the Intelligent Analysis
tool is activated allowing edit of the selected options as described above. Some manual changes to the
Analysis as for example size of objects and globe rotations may not be preserved when the Intelligent
Analysis tool is used to make changes to an Analysis.
Reports generated using the Intelligent Analysis tool may be edited by entering the Intelligent
Analysis interface as long as no manual editing has been done in define mode. Reports created this
26 TARGIT User Guide
way can be saved as any other report. Included in the file is information used by Intelligent Analysis
when the report is opened again, meaning that a reopened report can be edited using the Intelligent
Analysis tool and rerun.
Options for creating an Analysis
After having selected the ‘…analyze…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
analyze…’ and the options area changes into ‘Select measure to analyze’ with all available measures in
one column and another column showing the chosen measures. Right above the measure columns the
drop-list ‘Select cube’ makes it possible to select from which cube the measures should be fetched.
Individual measures may be moved between the columns simply by clicking them. When satisfied with
the selections, pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen measures
and bring up a list of further options. Instead of going through a complete new Intelligent Analysis
setup, the user may instead press the Go button. This will activate the Analysis most often used to
analyze the chosen measure.
… grouped by…
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions to group by’ with all available dimensions in one column
and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension levels are
moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension level will
result in a separate Object in the final Analysis. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the resulting Object, may be changed simply by individually dragging
dimensions up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next
button will update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following
options:
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… selected by the following criteria
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work area
fulfilling the chosen options and activate it. If data for the Analysis should be filtered, activating this
option will open the „Criteria options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria
editor. When criteria are selected pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work
area fulfilling all the chosen options and activate it.
Intelligent Analysis 27
Options for creating a Dashboard
After having selected the ‘…create a dashboard showing ...’ option, the explanation field changes into
‘I would like to create a dashboard showing...’ and the options area changes into ‘Select measures’
with all available measures and KPI values in one column and a second column showing the chosen
items. Right above the columns there may be a drop-list ‘Select cube’ making it possible to select
from which cube the measures and KPI values should be fetched. Individual values are moved
between the columns simply by clicking them. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next
button will update the explanation area with the chosen measures and insert the text `with the
following goals´. Following the explanation area is a list of the selected measures and their default
goal of 20% above maximum. Clicking a measure will open the option to set three goal types;
dynamic goal (e.g. 20% above maximum), measure goal and no goal. Clicking the Go button after
setting the goals will generate a standard dashboard using the chosen measures, dimensions and
goals, but further options are available by clicking next.
…with the trend over …
This option brings up the ‘Select time dimension’ and show available time dimensions and their levels.
Selecting a Time dimension level brings up the following options:
…visualized with …
This option brings up the ‘Select visualization’ and displays a list of available visualization types. After
selecting one, a list of further sub options regarding the selected type may be presented to choose
from.
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… selected by the following criteria:
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will generate a new Analysis in the Work area
fulfilling the chosen options and activate it. If data for the Analysis should be filtered, activating this
option will open the „Criteria options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria
editor. When criteria are selected pressing the Go button will generate a new Dashboard in the Work
area fulfilling all the chosen options and activate it.
28 TARGIT User Guide
Options for creating a TARGIT Report
After having selected the ‘…create a report? option the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
create a report.’ and the options area presents a list of additional phrases that can be used to add
further contents to the report. Only the most relevant options are presented at first. By clicking the
More button all available options are shown. When the mouse is hovered over an option, the
corresponding contents on the sample page will flash to indicate how the option will affect the final
report.
… showing the fields …
Display a list of available measures and dimensions, which can be included in the report by clicking
them. The chosen fields will be used to construct the core part of the report. The sequence of the
selected fields determines the order in which the fields are placed on the report. This sequence can be
changed by dragging and dropping the fields to another location in the list or by using the CTRL+Arrow
up/down keys.
… with the title …
Presents an input field where the report title can be keyed in. The title will be placed in the header and
will be presented on each page in the report.
... using the template ...
This option is used to format the report with an existing template. Available templates are shown
below the `Select template´ text.
… with page numbers
Add page numbers in the bottom right corner of each page in the report.
… with the image …
Display a file open dialog, where a bitmap to be included in the report can be chosen. The image will
be displayed in the top right corner of each page in the report.
… with the header …
Ask for a text to be displayed in the top of every page in the report.
… with the footer …
Ask for a text to be displayed in the bottom of every page in the report.
Intelligent Analysis 29
… showing the chart object … for every …
This option gives the possibility to include Objects made in TARGIT or TARGIT NET in the Report.
Select the Analysis containing the desired Object by checking the name or click the More button to
bring up a file dialog and select an Analysis to import from. Choose the dimension that determines
how the Object will be repeated in the Report.
After clicking Next, a thumbnail version of the Analysis is presented and the object to include can be
selected by clicking it. If Next is clicked without selecting an Object, the whole Analysis is inserted in
the report.
… with … on the criteria bar
This option brings up the ‘Select dimensions for the criteria bar’ with all available dimensions in one
column and another column showing the chosen dimensions. Individual dimensions or dimension
levels are moved between the columns simply by clicking them. Each selected dimension or dimension
level will result in a drop-list in the criteria bar. The sequence of the chosen dimensions, which
influences the place of the drop-list in the criteria bar, may be changed simply by dragging dimensions
up or down in the chosen column. When satisfied with the selections, pressing the Next button will
update the explanation area with the chosen dimension data and bring up the following option:
… grouped by …
Bring up a list of dimensions to choose from. The chosen dimensions will be used to group information
based on the values of the dimensions. If, for example, grouped by Year is chosen, the report will be
divided into sections - one for each year in the data. By selecting multiple dimensions, the grouping
will be nested accordingly. The nesting order can be changed by drag/drop of the fields or by using
CTRL+Arrow up/down. Note, that if a dimension previously selected in … showing the fields … is
selected again it will only be included once. If no dimensions were selected in …showing the fields …,
the last dimension selected will be added to the … showing the fields … list to avoid unnecessary
nesting of groups.
… showing the top … of …
This option is used to filter the report and only show the data with the highest values based on some
measure. Enter the number of values to include (default is 5) and choose the measure to select the
highest values from.
… showing the bottom … of …
Same as top except that it is the lowest values that are included in the report.
30 TARGIT User Guide
… ordered ascending by …
Select the dimension or measure to control the order in which the values are printed on the report.
This option will sort the values with the lowest value first and the highest value last.
… ordered descending by …
Select the dimension or measure to control the order in which the values are printed on the report.
This option will sort the values with the highest value first and the lowest value last.
… selected by the following criteria …
This option displays the Criteria editor and the criteria that should be applied to the whole report can
be entered.
… with grand total
Add a summary section that sums up the total value of the selected measures.
… with subtotals
Add a footer section to every grouping holding the subtotals for the selected measures.
… with a new page for every …
This option can be used to begin on a new page at the start of a specific group, e.g. whenever the
report is about to start on a new year, it should end the current page and begin on a new one. The
option gives the opportunity to choose from the dimensions listed in the … grouped by … option.
… with an explanation
This option inserts an explanation in each of the Reports sections which will inform about the criteria
which are active for the section in question.
Options to be notified
After having selected the ‘…be notified’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to be
notified...’ and the options area changes into:
Select measure to monitor
‘Select measure to monitor’ presents the active cubes. A click on a cube will present its measures
ready to select from. A second click on the cube will again display all available cubes.
Intelligent Analysis 31
Select Notification trigger
After having selected a measure to monitor, the options area presents ‘Select Notification trigger’ with
options for when an e-mail should be triggered based on the value of the measure at the time of the
notification execution. Press „Next? when trigger has been selected.
Set delivery method
After selecting trigger, the options area presents `Set delivery method´ with the option to write the e-
mail address where the notification should be sent to (Note: Html format cannot be sent by email).
Recipients are entered in the `To´ field and multiple recipients are separated by semi-colon (
. Asubject and message can be entered in the two text boxes below the `To´ field. Note: In order to be
able to send files via e-mail, the system administrator must have specified a mail server address in
the TARGIT Management Studio setup panel.
Schedule Notification Agent
When the delivery method has been specified the options area allows specification of the first
notification date and time and the monitoring frequency.
Pressing „Next? after defining the schedule makes more options available in the options area. At this
time, though, it is possible to press the „Go? button in order to schedule the Notification Agent in case
the remaining options are not required:
... for each ...
Selecting this option makes it possible to specify a dimension level for which all members will be
individually monitored using the selected trigger specifications
... selected by the following criteria
If no criteria are needed, pressing the Go button will activate the notification fulfilling the chosen
options. If data for the notification should be filtered, activating this option will open the „Criteria
options? tool where criteria may be selected just like using the Criteria editor. When criteria are
selected pressing the Go button will activate the notification fulfilling all chosen options and open the
Smartpad „Agents and Actions? tab with data about the newly created Notification Agent with options
to edit its specifications. The Work area will at the same time show a list of all Notification Agents with
the newly created Notification Agent highlighted.
Note: When a notification is created it can be edited in the Scheduled Jobs tab in the Smartpad. For
detailed explanation see the section about Administrating Scheduled Jobs.
Options to schedule
After having selected the ‘…schedule’ option you will be prompted to select the file or analysis object
to schedule. The following choices change based upon the selected file or object.
32 TARGIT User Guide
Select filename and format
After choosing what to schedule you will be prompted to write a filename for the schedule. Further, an
image format must be chosen. This image format depends on the file or analysis object that was
chosen for scheduling. If an analysis was chosen, the formats; PNG Image (.png), Jpeg Image (.jpeg),
GIF Image (.gif) or BMP Image (.bmp) are available. For an analysis object, the available file formats
are: MS Excel (.xls), XML file (.xml) or CSV file (.csv). For a report, the formats are: Adobe Acrobat
(.pdf), MS Word (.rtf) or Internet (.html) and for a storyboard: Windows media video (.wmv) or
Podcast (.wmv).
Set delivery method
After selecting filename and format, the options area presents `Set delivery method´ with the option
to choose the folder to save the exported file to. The available locations of saved files are configured
in TARGIT Management Studio. Another option is to choose to send by email (Note: Html format
cannot be sent by email). Recipients are entered in the `To´ field and multiple recipients are
separated by semi-colon (
. A subject and message can be entered in the two text boxes below the`To´ field.
Note: In order to be able to send files via e-mail, the system administrator must have specified a mail
server address in the TARGIT Management Studio Setup panel.
Set schedule
The last option is `Set schedule´, where the start date and start time can be chosen from the drop
down panels. The recurrence of the schedule is chosen by entering an integer and chose between
day(s), week(s) or month(s) at the `Repeat every´drop down panels.
Options to create a storyboard
After having selected the ‘…create a storyboard…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would
like to create a storyboard’ and the options area changes into ‘Select from the options to describe
what you wish to do’ and the options area presents a list of additional phrases that can be used to add
further contents to the storyboard.
…based on drillpad analyses…
This option brings up the ‘Select the analyses to include’ with the available analyses logged in the
drillpad. When satisfied with the selections, clicking the Next button will update the explanation area
with the chosen option and bring up the following option:
…based on document analyses…
This option brings up the ‘Select the analyses to include’ with all the available files saved in the
Shared and Personal folders. When satisfied with the selections, clicking the Next button will update
Intelligent Analysis 33
the explanation area and no further options are available. Clicking the Go button, allows you to create
a Video, a Podcast or a Slideshow.
Options to search
After having selected the ‘…search…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would like to
search…:’ and all the saved analyses are displayed in the options area. Click one of the analyses and
pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen analysis. Click the Go
button to start the search. The search function uses the preferences setup in Windows Desktop
Search.
Options to search for Sentinels
After having selected the ‘…search for Sentinels…’ option, the explanation field changes into ‘I would
like to search for Sentinels…’ and all the measures from a cube is displayed in the options area.
Another cube may be selected by clicking the displayed cube name. Clicking any of the analyses and
pressing the Next button will update the explanation area with the chosen analysis. Click the Go
button to start the search for Sentinels. This opens the 'Search for Sentinels' dialog which is the same
as clicking the Sentinels icon in the toolbar. For more information on the settings that may be applied
in this dialog please see the section about Sentinels.
Options to analyze uploaded data
After having selected the ‘…analyze uploaded data…’ option, a dialog is displayed to register for
TARGIT Cloud if unregistered. If already registered a browser window is opened with direct logged on
access to analyze the data already uploaded to TARGIT Cloud.
Note: In order to have access to TARGIT Cloud software maintenance is required.
Options to upload data
After having selected the ‘…upload data…’ option, a dialog is displayed to register for TARGIT Cloud if
unregistered. If already registered a browser window is opened with direct logged on access to upload
data to TARGIT Cloud.
Note: In order to have access to TARGIT Cloud software maintainance is required.
34 TARGIT User Guide
Designing Analyses
The Intelligent Analysis tool is designed to fulfill most requirements for designing analyses, but after
having created an analysis using this tool, all components of the analysis may be modified individually
in order to improve the Analysis. It is even possible to manually create complete analyses without
using the Intelligent Analysis tool.
Creating a new analysis
New analyses may be created either by using the Intelligent Analysis tool, or by selecting the 'File |
New analysis' menu item to start a manual design of an analysis.
Creating Objects
An Object is a window in the Work area that displays data and has options to specify which data is
displayed and how it is displayed. Within each Object window there are many options that affect the
representation of the data. The procedures for creating and using Objects are explained here.
Objects can be created using either the Toolbar or the menu. When a new Object is created, the
Smartpad is automatically changed into the 'Source data' tab ready for selecting data fields for the
new object. Simultaneously, a new Object window appears in the Analysis Work area.
Creating Objects from the Toolbar
The Toolbar contains buttons that will create new Objects.
New object. This option creates a new object which type is decided by the intelligent system.
New chart object. A chart object displays data graphically. There are many types of charts, and
the chart type is defined during object definition.
New cross tabulation. A Cross tabulation works just like a Table. It displays less data, but there
are more options concerning the layout of the data sheet.
New globe. Globes are used to display data based on geographical locations.
New gauge. Gauges are used to display data values, progress or trends relative to a fixed or
dynamic scale.
New layout object. Layout objects may be added to an analysis in order to improve its layout and
readability.
To create a new Object, simply click the button that represents the object type you wish to create.
Designing Analyses 35
Next to some of these buttons, there is a small down-arrow button. Clicking these opens submenus,
which will enable users to select other object types within that same category.
Creating Objects from the menu
Creating Objects may also be done using the 'Object | New object' menu item.
Organizing Objects
Objects in the Work area will automatically adjust their size so that they together will fill the available
Work area space.
Therefore, when there are two or more Objects in the Work area, there will often be a need to
organize them, both regarding placement and relative size. This application offers several tools to
facilitate this, the primary one being the “Auto-arrange” feature. This feature allows individual Objects
to be moved around on the Work area by dragging in the Objects title bar. When an Object is being
dragged, a semi transparent image of that Object is shown together with two sets of arrows pointing
up, down left and right. One set of arrows are at the borders of the work area and the other set of
arrows are shown in the object where the cursor with the dragged object is placed. Whenever the
cursor is over one of these arrows the semi transparent image of the dragged object changes into a
larger grey area indicating where the object will be dropped if released which is either above, under or
to the right or left of the object or work area depending on the arrow type. When the Object is
dropped, the surrounding Objects are resized in order to make room for the dropped Object.
An Object may be resized by dragging its borders, and such an action will automatically resize the
adjacent objects, such that the whole Work area space is filled with the available Objects. Note that
an object cannot immediately be stretched to more that the size of itself and the adjacent object. It
requires resizing of the other objects first. The Objects functions chapter describes functions, which
allows control over the height and width of Objects measured as fractions of the actual height or width
of the Work area. Furthermore, right-clicking an Objects border opens a menu where the horizontal or
vertical distribution of the Objects may be specified.
Object definition
Object definition is done using the Smartpad. When creating a new object the Smartpad automatically
changes to the 'Source data' tab allowing selection of data for the new Object. Simultaneously, a new
Object window appears in the Work area.
When the cursor is hovering over a dimension or a measure, one or more selection lines in the object
definition window will flash. Only selection lines where the data type fits will flash. Data fields may
now be selected for display simply by being dragged to the flashing selection line, or by clicking the
field, or by selecting an item in the right-click menu. In the same way, data may be removed from the
definition window simply by dragging the data field back onto the Smartpad 'Source data' tab, by
clicking the field in the tab or by removing the appropriate item using the right-click menu.
36 TARGIT User Guide
Selecting data
The drop-list at the top of the 'Source data' tab of the Smartpad is used to select the Cube which
contains the required data to be analyzed. Below this drop-list, available dimensions and measures for
the selected cube are shown. Dimensions and measures are descriptions of data, for example,
Revenue contains data values for revenue and Customers contains data about the customers. Some
dimensions may be hierarchical which is shown by a small plus or minus sign to the left of the
dimension name and a special hierarchical icon. Clicking the plus or minus sign will either reveal or
hide the next dimension level.
Selecting data for display
Because the Object is new, no selections are made. When the cursor is hovering over an active
dimension or measure in the Smartpad 'Source data' tab, it changes into a pointing hand and a
selection line in the Object definition window begins flashing. Only selection lines where the data can
be placed will flash. The active data field may now be selected for display simply by dragging it to the
flashing selection line. In the same way data may be removed from display simply by dragging the
data field back onto the Smartpad 'Source data' tab. Clicking the data field will move it back and forth
between the Smartpad and the definition window, and even right-click menu items exist for selecting
or deselecting data fields for display.
Note: It is not necessary to drag a given data field exactly onto the flashing selection line. Dropping
the field in the general area of the selection line is sufficient. Unavailable areas are hatched in the
definition window.
The screenshot below shows a Cross tabulation object with the dimension Item on the Y-axis and the
dimension Period on the X-axis. The numbers in the grid represent the measure Revenue.
Dimensions and measures in Object
The automatic descriptions of Objects work like this: Measure per/by Dimension. For example,
Revenue per Item by Period as shown above or Revenue per Store by Gender.
As mentioned, dimensions and measures can be placed manually or automatically into the definition
window. To place one in the window manually, drag it from the Smartpad 'Source data' tab onto a
flashing selection line. To have a dimension or a measure placed automatically, simply click it in the
'Source data' tab. When clicking, the data field chosen first will be placed on the first available
Designing Analyses 37
selection line in the row headers. The second data field will be placed on the first available selection
line in the column headers and so on.
Replace measures in objects
It is possible to replace a measure in an object with a different measure and at the same time
maintain the place and formatting of the replaced measure. This is done within the Smartpad Source
data tab simply by dragging the new measure on top of the measure to be replaced in the Source
data tab.
Displaying data
When the dimensions and measures required have been selected, the Object can be processed to
display actual data. This is done either by clicking the Fetch data/Define button in the Toolbar or
selecting `Toggle chart or data´ from the Object submenu . When the Object state is changed, the
Toolbar button will change too, and another click will take the Object back to define state. Next to the
Fetch/Define button is a small green button which may be used to refresh data in all objects in the
open analysis.
After the Refresh or Fetch button is clicked the Refresh button switches to a red button as long as
data are being updated. Pushing the red Abort button immediately stops the update process and frees
up your client for you to continue working and removes the job from the TARGIT Server, freeing up
memory and CPU.
Fetch data. Selects display mode of the selected Object.
Define. Selects definition mode of the selected Object.
Refresh data in all objects. Updates the data in all objects in an analysis.
Abort. Stops the update process and frees up ressources.
Object types
There are three main types of Objects: Graphical, Non-graphical and Layout. Examples of graphical
Objects are Pie charts, and Gauges. Non-graphical Object types consist of Tables and Cross
tabulations. Layout Objects are designed to improve layout and can only be changed into other types
within this category.
Object type change
Smartpad: Properties tab. Menu: Object | Object. Keyboard: CTRL + 0-9.
An active Object can easily be changed to another type using the menu or Smartpad Properties tab.
When an Object is changed, all Dimensions and Measures defined for the Object are converted to fit
38 TARGIT User Guide
perfectly with the properties of the new Object type. Changing the type of an Object is a strong
feature when having to decide how to most efficiently present data - or if the best way to present data
is liable for change. Please observe that a Layout Object can only be changed to another type of
Layout Object.
Non-graphical Objects
Non-graphical Object types consist of Tables and Cross tabulations.
Tables
Tables are used for displaying data in a simple row form. A Table is used to display large amounts of
data with many different data types.
Creating Table Objects is not like defining other Objects since there is only one selection line for
Dimensions and Measures in the new Object window. Placing a Dimension or Measure is done simply
by dragging it from the Smartpad 'Source data' tab onto the window and clicking it in the Smartpad or
using the right-click menu.
Removing a Dimension or Measure from the Table window is done by clicking it in the Smartpad,
dragging it back onto the Smartpad or using the right-click menu.
The order of the Dimensions and Measures placed in the window dictates how the data is displayed in
the Table.
Cross tabulations
Cross tabulations or Cross tab Objects behave much like Table Objects but may offer a clearer view of
the data. There are no practical limit to the number of dimensions and measures that can be displayed
in Cross tabs. Grouping data by placing more than one dimension on a row or column header is one
way to make complex data structures easier to comprehend. An example of this type of grouping is
shown in the next figures.
Designing Analyses 39
The New Cross tabulation window
Here, two dimensions and one measure have been placed in the Cross tabulation Object. The result
displayed is described in the title bar of the Object and shown in the screenshot below.
The Cross tabulation result
Graphical Objects
There are many types of graphical Objects. They can all be created by selecting the 'New Object'
function from the menu or Toolbar as described earlier. Once the Object is created, the type can be
chosen during definition of the Object. Available types of graphical objects are:
Pie chart is the default type. Mainly used for displaying percentages.
Bar chart. Displays data values in vertical bars.
Horizontal bar chart. This works just like the normal bar chart, but the bars
are horizontal.
Line chart. Displays data values as connected points in a system of co-
ordinates.
40 TARGIT User Guide
Area chart. Works just like the line chart except that the area under a line is
filled with the color of the line.
Scatter chart. Display data as points in a system of co-ordinates.
Bubble chart. Display data as variable size points in a system of co-
ordinates.
Radar chart. Display data around a chart in star-shaped figure.
Map. A map is used for displaying relations between geographical locations
and other data.
Globe. A globe is a three-dimensional map used for displaying data related
to geographical locations
Scalable map. A scalable map is used for displaying data related to
geographical locations.
Gauge. Displays a data value, progress or trend relative to a fixed or
dynamic scale.
When viewing graphical Objects, dimensions and measures are represented by graphics only. This
means that there will not be text on the graphical elements to describe the elements. In order to
identify each graphical element, a legend box may be shown at the right side of the graphical Object.
Holding the cursor over a graphical element will display a label with text information about the
element. The user may use the formatting options in the Smartpad Properties tab to specify which
data is displayed in the label.
The colors of the small boxes in the legend box match the colors of the corresponding graphical
elements.
Note: Graphical Objects may be rendered invisible if the legend or labels take up too much of the
available space in the graph window. The problem may be solved by either resizing the Object window
or removing the legend and/or labels.
Pie charts
Pie charts are used to display data values as percentages. In order to show how total revenue is split
between Stores, a Pie chart could be designed with the measure Revenue and the dimension Store.
The entire Pie represents the total Revenue and each piece of Pie represents the Revenue for a single
Store.
To achieve this, Store is dragged to the flashing selection line in the Pie chart definition window legend
area and Revenue is dragged to the flashing selection line in the middle of the pie chart accordingly.
Designing Analyses 41
Using Pie charts, it is easy to illustrate how a value such as Revenue is divided into pieces based on
any given grouping of data.
Bar charts and Horizontal bar charts
These two chart types are practically identical, the only difference being the direction of the bars. The
screenshot below shows the define state of a Bar chart. In this example, a Vertical bar chart.
New Bar chart definition window
In this example we would like the chart to show the annual Revenue for each Product. To achieve this,
we place Period on the selection line on the X-axis of the chart, Item on the legend selection line and
Revenue in the center selection line. These data types can be interchanged to get a slightly different
view of the data.
To specify what the bars should represent, Revenue is placed on the flashing selection line in the
middle of the definition window. When viewing actual data, the bar chart could look like shown below.
The order of the explanations in the legend box resembles the order of the bars of the chart.
The Bar chart result
42 TARGIT User Guide
By default the X-axis will meet the Y-axis at point zero (0) and the Y-axis top value will be adjusted to
the highest measure value, but specific values may be set in the Smartpad Properties tab. If a chart
contains more than one measure, it will also be possible to add an extra axis at the opposite end of
the coordinate plane and specify properties for this axis and define which measure relates to which
axis.
Line charts
The line chart is a system of coordinates where data is represented by points connected by lines.
To illustrate how Revenue changes monthly for each Product, Time is placed on the X-axis selection
line and Product on the legend selection line and Revenue is placed on the selection line in the middle
of the definition window. The lines will then represent the Revenue for each Product seen over Time.
By default the X-axis will meet the Y-axis at point zero (0) and the Y-axis top value will be adjusted to
the highest measure value, but specific values may be set in the Smartpad Properties tab. If a chart
contains more than one measure, it will also be possible to add an extra axis at the opposite side of
the coordinate plane and specify properties for this axis and define which measure relates to which
axis.
Area charts
This chart type is closely related to the line chart. The only difference between the two is that the area
beneath each line is filled with the color of the line.
Scatter charts
The scatter chart is a special kind of chart. It can display the same data as all other charts, but the
chart works differently with Dimensions and Measures. The following explains the way a Scatter chart
is used and the advantage of using it over using other chart types, e.g. bar charts.
If we wish to see Revenue, and the Contribution Margin percentage for each year, we could use a
normal bar chart. Revenue and Contribution Margin percentage are both Measures. This means that if
we want those data types to be represented on a bar chart, the values would be represented by the
height of the bars. The problem is that the Y-axis will be showing Revenue values from 0 to millions.
This means that the values of the Contribution Margin percentage, which are between 0 and 100,
would be almost invisible. The same would apply in line charts and area charts.
Designing Analyses 43
The scatter chart, however, allows placing Measures on both axes of the graph. This means that the
measure data, Revenue and Contribution Margin percentage, can be placed one on each of the axes of
the chart, while the required dimension, for instance Time is placed on the selection line of the legend.
It is now easier to see the data values for each item as dots in the scatter graph. Using the above
suggested dimensions and measures it would be desirable to have all the dots placed in the upper
right corner of the chart, which means that they all show high Contribution Margin percentages and
large Revenue values.
By default the X- and Y-axis will meet each other at point zero (0) and the axes top values will be
adjusted to the highest measure values. Specific values for each axis may be defined in the Smartpad
Properties tab.
Bubble charts
The bubble chart is basically the same as the scatter chart the only difference being, that in the
bubble chart the points may have variable sizes depending on a measure value. The bubble chart
therefore uses three measures, one for point sizes and one for each of the two axes.
By default the X- and Y-axis will meet each other at point zero (0) and the axes top values will be
adjusted to the highest measure values. Specific values for each axis may be defined in the Smartpad
Properties tab.
Radar charts
The radar chart is a two-dimensional chart consisting of two axes with the Y-axis displaying the value
range. The chart may display data from one dimension and one or more measures. When a dimension
is added to the chart, dimension members are plotted around the chart as a star-shaped figure. This
also limits the number of dimensions members being displayed in the chart, as too many members
makes it difficult to separate each member from each other. The placement of the members in the
chart depend on the measure value as members are placed farther from the center the higher the
value is. The center value depends on the member with the lowest value and the Y-axis top value is
adjusted to the highest measure value.
The recommended use for radar charts is to spot differences among a limited number of members in
one dimension. The differences may be spotted among several measures, but a limited number of
measures should be added to improve the readability of the chart. The variance among the data
shouldn't be to big, since it is difficult to spot differences from member to member if one measure
consist of values in the million range and another consist of values in the small thousand range. It is
also recommended to use measures with the same format (e.g. currency, percentages etc.) in the
chart to maintain readability, though it is possible to add measures with different formats.
44 TARGIT User Guide
The radar chart may be formatted like any other chart from the Smartpad Properties tab.
Maps
Maps are used to display data in relation to locations. Locations for Maps may be either geographical
coordinates or coordinates related to other types of background images as for instance floor plans.
Data values are represented by coloring of the locations dots.
There are three selection lines on the definition stage of a map object. The first one, placed at the top
of the map is a selection line for dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions to the
Map objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column. The colors of the
table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the location dots. To learn
more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
Calculations functions
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the map, is a selection line for dimensions. This
selection line is normally used to place dimensions related to a location. Any dimension can be placed
here, but in many cases they will not have a predefined location on the map. To learn how to set up
locations on a map, see the Map locations section in the Object functions chapter.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the map, is for measures.
Globes
Globes are basically three-dimensional maps, but Globes are used only to show data which are related
to geographical locations.
There are three selection lines in the Globe definition window. The first one, placed at the top of the
Globe is a selection line for Dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions to the Globe
objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column. The colors of the
table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the geographical location dots.
To learn more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the Globe window, is a selection line for dimensions
which are used to place dimensions related to geographical locations. Any dimension can be placed
here, but normally they will have a predefined geographical location. To learn how to set up locations
on a Globe, see the Globe locations section of the Object functions chapter.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the Globe window, is for measures.
Designing Analyses 45
The main difference between using a Globe instead of a map is that the Globe is three-dimensional.
When showing data, the Globe can be rotated by moving the mouse while holding down the right
mouse button. Alternately, the cursor keys of the keyboard can be used. The second feature of the
globe is the ability to zoom. This is done using the + or - keys of the numeric keypad.
Scalable maps
Scalable maps are based on areas instead of a single dot using GIS-technology (Geographic
Information Systems). The Scalable map is also used to display data in relation to locations and may
contain several layers of information. The further you zoom into a scalable map, the more details will
be available to you. If the necessary detail is available, you may zoom a map from the Continent level
via Countries, States, Regions, Zip Codes all the way down to street names and house numbers. The
level of detail is determined by the information within the GIS-maps. These maps are available,
usually at a cost, from local and international GIS-providers. The mapping between GIS-information
and dimension values is regarded an administrative task and is handled centrally in the TARGIT
Management Studio. Apart from the scalability of these maps, scalable maps also cover the demand
for representing e.g. countries as colored areas rather than just colored dots.
There are three selection lines on the definition stage of a scalable map object. The first one, placed at
the top of the map is a selection line for dimensions. This selection line is designed to add dimensions
to the Scalable map objects underlying cross table, with the purpose of making a calculated column.
The colors of the table entries in the rightmost (calculated) column are used for coloring the location
areas. To learn more about Object calculations, see Calculations in the Object functions chapter.
The second selection line, placed in the middle of the Scalable map window, is a selection line for
dimensions which are used to place dimensions related to geographical locations. Any dimension can
be placed here, but normally they will have a predefined geographical location.
The last selection line, placed at the bottom of the map, is for measures.
Navigation and Zoom is a little different from the other objects. Use + and – keys or the mouse scroll
wheel to zoom in and out according to the current center of the map.To move the center of the map,
press and hold down the right mouse button while dragging the center of the map to a new position.
To change the properties of the scalable map see the formatting options section in the Object
functions chapter.
Gauges
46 TARGIT User Guide
Gauges are used to display the value, progress or trend of a measure or a calculation relative to a
fixed or dynamic scale. Gauge objects may contain one or more Gauges and are often used in
Dashboard Analyses.
When a new Gauge object has been added to the Work Area, the measure or calculation to be
displayed must initially be selected from the Add KPI option in Smartpad Properties. Selecting a single
measure or calculation and fetching data will create a complete Gauge object with several intelligent,
default settings:
Two gauges will be included: a Speedometer gauge and a Trend gauge.
The default Time dimension will automatically be included. The default Time dimension is
either the Time dimension that was last used in a gauge object or, if none has been used so
far, the Time dimension with the highest number of levels. The Time dimension will be
expanded to its second level.
The data displayed by the primary (broad) pointer in the Speedometer gauge will be from
the last period of the second level of this Time dimension.
The goal displayed by the secondary (narrow) pointer in the Speedometer gauge has been
calculated from the formula: “Goal = MaxValue + (MaxValue – MinValue) *0.2” where
MaxValue and MinValue are the highest and lowest values, respectively, within the available
periods.
The Speedometer gauge span, the minimum and maximum values of the Speedometer
gauge, has been calculated from these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest value of
either MaxValue*1.1 or Goal*1.1” and “MinSpan = the lowest value of either
MinValue*0.9 or Goal*0.9”. The Trend gauge is a graphical presentation of the overall
trend of data within the selected time span. It is based on the regression column which can
be seen when shifting to the data view of the gauge object. The formula for the regression is
best displayed by clicking the Explanation icon in the gauge object. A positive X multiplier
will display a positive trend, while a negative X multiplier will display a negative trend.
The Trend gauge span, the minimum and maximum values of the Trend gauge, has been
calculated from these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest absolute value of MaxValue
/2, MinValue/2 or Goal/2” and “MinSpan = -MaxSpan”. Goal is calculated as with the
Speedometer gauge, and even though Goal is not displayed in the Trend gauge it may have
an effect on the span of the Trend gauge.
SQL 2005 KPIs
The gauge object may also be based on a KPI that has been defined in Analysis Services for Microsoft
SQL Server 2005. If SQL 2005 KPIs have been defined in the Analysis Services database, they will
appear together with the list of available measures and calculations for the Gauge object definition.
Layout Objects
Menu: Object Right-click menu: New object Toolbar: Create a new layout object
Designing Analyses 47
Layout Objects are placeholders that may be added to an Analysis, just like any other Object in order
to improve the layout and readability. The type of the Layout Object can be changed from the
Smartpad Properties tab or from the Object menu, and can be either a blank box or it can contain
user supplied text, an explanation or a graphical image.
Note: When a trigger has been specified for a layout object, it may be selected by right-clicking and
clicking 'Select object'.
Blank area
The default Layout Object type is a blank area. A blank area Object can be inserted in an Analysis to
facilitate resizing of the other objects to a specific height or width and placement.
Text box
The Text box Layout Object type can be used to apply additional textual information to the Analysis.
The text to be displayed is entered in the Text field of the Smartpad Properties tab. Furthermore,
dynamic text may also be added from the dynamic content section below the text field. Dynamic text
is added by first selecting a cube and then a dimension. The dimension is inserted at the location of
the cursor in the text field in the format {reference
ostfix}, where the postfix may be first, last or alldepending on which values should be included in the caption:
Postfix Description
First The first value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
Last The last value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
All All values of the chosen dimension are inserted in the caption
separated by colons.
The default reference for a caption is cellvalue without a postfix.
The content of a Text box Layout Object may be formatted by using the Align and Formatting options
from the Smartpad Properties tab. Alignment of the text can be defined horizontally and vertically,
and options are available to change Background color, Border and Font in the same way as when
formatting the data page.
Explanation box
The Explanation box Object type will dynamically display the Global criteria that apply to the Analysis.
The content of an Explanation box Layout Object can be formatted by using the Align and Formatting
options from the Smartpad Properties tab. Alignment of the explanation can be defined horizontally
48 TARGIT User Guide
and vertically, and options are available to change Background color, Border and Font in the same
way as when formatting the data page.
Image
The Image Layout Object type can be used to display any image, e.g. a company logo. The image to
be displayed is chosen from the Background field of the Smartpad Properties tab.
Search Object
Microsoft Desktop Search may be integrated with TARGIT. This means that analysis data may be used
as search index on the user?s local machine. If the user performs a drill down in an analysis, on a
specific customer, to see his sales revenue, files related to the customer, like emails and such, will
appear together with other documents related to this customer. When using TARGIT the search icon in
the toolbar may be clicked to add an object with the Windows Desktop Search functionality. The
search includes metadata from the analysis as search criteria if 'Intelligent Search' is checked. These
metadata include measures and global criteria. Additional search terms may also be specified in the
text field 'Additional terms'. Several search objects may be added to an analysis if it contains data
objects (e.g. a crosstab).
TARGIT may also be connected to a Microsoft Search Server 2008 from TARGIT Management Studio
to extend the local search functionality to include corporate data details instead. When connected to a
Microsoft Search Server 2008, the search object in TARGIT appear as the Microsoft Desktop Search,
but the underlying search features, indexing methods etc. are controlled from the administration site
of the search server. For further information about these issues, please see the Microsoft Search
Server 2008 documentation.
Note: Windows operating systems include Windows Desktop Search except Windows XP where the
program must be downloaded from Microsoft's web site.
What-If
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data Toolbar: Add/remove What-If object
This unique feature gives the possibility to explore the hidden potential in the data warehouse. With
one single click a What-If object may be added and the effect of changes in figures may be predicted
based on information already available in the data warehouse. E.g. what if the sales revenue was 5%
higher? What would the numbers look like? This question may now be answered by adding a What-If
object to the analysis.
Designing Analyses 49
Adding a What-If object is easily done from the toolbar. When an analysis is open, click on the What-If
icon (pictured above) in the toolbar and the object is added. The object is represented as a cube with
a list of all the measures in the analysis. Each of the measures may be changed with the small plus or
minus icons. Each click on these icons will change the value one percent. It is also possible to double
click on the value to enable editing of the clicked value. Editing a value may also be done from the
Smartpad Properties tab or by right-clicking the measure or dimension and choose increase or
decrease. Note that totals are not changed since they are obtained from the cube and not
recalculated. To get a recalculated total a custom calculation must be inserted.
A What-If object may also be added by marking an object and selecting Object | Data | What-If from
the menu bar or by right-clicking the object and selecting Data | What-If. These options adds a What-
If object with all measures of the analysis and the last clicked hierarchy member or the first hierarchy
member if none was clicked. Further members may be added by right-clicking each of them in the
objects and select Data | What-If or use the corresponding selection in the menu bar. Another easy
way to add members to the What-If object is to use the properties tab in the Smartpad. Clicking on
the name of any of the dimensions changes the properties tab and dimension members may be added
by marking the check boxes and selecting for which measures the members must be added, that is,
for which measures should the dimension members be available in the What-If object.
The What-If object affects the appearance of the other objects in the analysis. Whenever a What-If
object is added to an analysis, the other objects in the analysis show the What-If modified values and
bar charts show both the original values and the What-If modified values.
To remove the What-If object from the analysis, click the blue cross in the upper right corner of the
object or click the What-If icon in the toolbar.
Multi-cube Analyses
When connecting to a Microsoft cube server (OLAP Services or Analysis Services) and the database
contains multiple cubes it is possible to generate Analyses with Objects simultaneously displaying data
from different cubes. This is accomplished by selecting a different cube in the Smartpad 'Source data'
tab. If there are any existing Objects from other cubes in the Analysis, a dialog is presented asking
whether these Objects should be removed or not. By answering no, new Objects can be added based
on data from other cubes.
Every Object in a Multi-cube Analysis will have a cube icon next to the explanation icon. Icons which
are not colored means that the Object belongs to a different cube than the selected Object. By
hovering the cursor over the icon, a description is displayed telling which cube the Object belongs to.
Multi-cube analyses imposes some limitations. When applying criteria either by using the criteria
editor or by drilling, only Objects connected to the same cube will be affected.
Biggest Opportunities and Problems
Menu: File | Document properties Toolbar: User preferences | Document properties
50 TARGIT User Guide
Biggest Opportunities and Biggest Problems are intelligent ways to browse through objects to highlight
remarkable good or bad trends. By default all analyses are included in the search for Biggest
Opportunities and Problems. When clicking any of the two options a search for candidate objects
among all analyses is initiated. The biggest options only consider gauge objects with a goal and a
trend and KPIs defined in the database. When the search is done the results are presented in gauges.
Objects from a Biggest Opportunities and Problems search is also presented automatically and kept up
to date in the TARGIT Desktop notification section.
To exclude an analysis from the search for Biggest Opportunities and problems check the option
'Exclude this analysis from biggest opportunities/problems' in the document properties menu.
Biggest Opportunities
Menu: Tools | Biggest Opportunities
When clicking the Biggest Opportunities option, all analyses (except anyone marked as excluded) and
all KPIs are immediately analyzed for Biggest Opportunities. To be considered an opportunity, the
current trend of the measured value must first of all be good (positive or negative depending on the
smiley settings). Furthermore, if the current value is on the good side of the goal, it will be prioritized
higher than those where the current value is on the bad side of the goal.
Biggest Problems
Menu: Tools | Biggest Problems.
When clicking the Biggest Problems option, all analyses (except anyone marked as excluded) and all
KPIs are immediately analyzed for biggest problems. To be considered a problem, the current trend of
the measured value must first of all be bad (negative or positive depending on the smiley settings).
Furthermore, if the current value is on the bad side of the goal, it will be prioritized higher than those
where the current value is on the good side of the goal.
Object Functions 51
Object functions
Activating functions
The most important functions for objects are available in the Smartpad Properties tab, the
Calculations tab and the Criteria tab. Most functions may also be activated from the menu, a right-
click menu or by keyboard shortcuts.
Note: In order to conserve space right-click menus may only show menu items relevant to the
position of the cursor when the right-click was initiated. If the right-click menu has been truncated, a
menu item „More? at the bottom will reveal all items when selected.
General functions
Locking Objects
Menu: Object | Object Right-click menu: Object
When an Object is locked it is no longer possible to change the appearance or behavior of the Object.
In other words, removing Dimensions and Measures or applying functions is disabled when the Object
is locked.
Note: Locking an Object does not affect the applying of Criteria or Drill downs to the Object. The Lock
function only affects the definition part of the Object properties, not the data part. To learn more
about Criteria and drilling, see the Criteria chapter of this guide. Locking and unlocking Objects is
available to Developer users only.
Locking all Objects
Menu: View.
As locking Objects is often used by Developer users to prevent Normal users from changing the
definition of shared Analyses, locking or unlocking all Objects in the Work area can be achieved using
the 'Lock all / Unlock all' function. This function is available to Developer users only.
Trigger Analysis
Smartpad: Properties tab
52 TARGIT User Guide
Trigger Analysis is a function where one Analysis can be linked to another Analysis or Report in such a
way that a click on an object in the first Analysis will trigger the other Analysis or Report to be
activated. The Analysis or Report to be activated can be selected from a dialog that is opened from
the 'Add trigger' link in the Smartpad Properties tab. Two options are available; 'Document' displays
the list of documents equal to the Documents tab in the Smartpad. The appropriate document must
be selected and if the option 'Include criteria when triggering' is checked the activated document is
assigned global criteria according to the dimension values of the element that was clicked in the
object.
The second option is to trigger an URL. This is done by entering an URL in the text field. Activation of
the URL is done similar to activation of a document - when clicking an element in the object with the
trigger, the URL is opened in a new browser window.
A selected trigger may be removed again by clicking the cross next to the trigger in the Smartpad.
Note: The trigger option is not only limited to data objects, but may also be applied to text boxes and
images to extend the flexibility.
Cut, Copy and Paste
Menu: Edit Keyboard: CTRL+X/C/V Right-click menu: Object | Cut/Copy/Paste
These functions are used to cut, copy and paste an active object for use in TARGIT or in other external
applications e.g. word processors. It is possible to cut, copy and paste both graphical and non-
graphical Objects (except What-if and Search objects). The function may also be used to copy
selections as comparisons to other objects.
Copying an object in TARGIT creates an exact copy of the object with all formatting (excluding any
criteria or what-if values) for insertion in the same analysis or another. All data objects may be copied
and also cross tables in reports may be copied from the cross table define mode to an analysis. Note
that locked objects are unlocked when copied.
Copied objects may also be pasted into any program which is able to handle images such as, but not
limited to, image editors and word processors. Copying Table and Cross table objects and also the
data page of graphical objects, will copy the characters (letters/numbers) of the Object to the
clipboard in a format, which is designed to be pasted into a spreadsheet application, e.g. Microsoft
Excel. This is achieved using tabulations - just like indenting text lines which also means, that the
clipboard data may be pasted into word processors and other applications with a sensible result.
Duplicate
Object Functions 53
Menu: Object | New object Right-click menu: New object | Duplicate
The function is used to create a new object in the work area which is an exact copy of the active
Object. The new Object is created in define mode ready to be edited. It is possible to duplicate both
graphical, non-graphical and layout Objects.
Actions
Menu: Object | Hyperrelate Right-click menu: Hyperrelate
Actions enable users to act upon the outcomes of their analyses. By using actions, end users can go
beyond traditional analysis and seek more information on discovered problems and deficiencies. The
two types of actions supported is HTML which transfer HTML to an Internet browser for direct display,
and URL which transfer an Internet URL address to the Internet browser in order to display its
content.
Actions are activated by right-clicking a graphical element or table/cross tabulation element for which
predefined actions should be executed. This brings up an Object menu where the Actions menu item
may be selected. After selection, the lower part of the object area will first show the selected
delimitations followed by a list of available actions. Clicking an action will execute it by opening the
default Internet browser and display HTML or an URL page. Clicking the ?Back to data page? button will
return the object to normal display mode.
When there is only one Action for the selected item, the „list of available actions? is not presented and
the Action is executed directly.
Note: In order to have access to actions, the system manager must have implemented Analysis
Services Actions at proper places in the active cube.
Export table data
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data
Table data or Cross tabulation data from Objects may be exported either directly to Microsoft Excel, to
a CSV (Comma separated) file or to an XML file. When the submenu items „Export to CSV? or „Export
to XML? is selected, a file save dialog opens for proper placement of the file. If the submenu item
„Export to Excel? is chosen, the Table or Cross tabulation data is copied to a new Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.
Hyper Relations
Menu: Object | Hyperrelate Right-click menu: Hyperrelate
54 TARGIT User Guide
A Hyper Relation is a relation from a measure value in an Object or in a report to an analysis that
provides more detailed information about that particular measure. TARGIT uses its built-in Intelligence
to determine which analysis will be the most suitable for providing additional information about the
measure.
Hyper Relations are activated from an analysis object by right-clicking an element in the Object, e.g. a
Revenue value in a cell in a cross table and selecting `TARGIT this´ from the right-click menu or from
Object | Hyperrelate in the menu. A suitable Revenue analysis will then be opened, and the dimension
values that related to the particular element in the source will be transferred as criteria to the target
analysis.
From a Report, in preview mode, Hyper Relations are activated by left-clicking an element in the
report, e.g. a Revenue value. A suitable Revenue analysis will then be opened, and the dimension
values that related to the particular element in the report will be transferred as criteria to the opened
analysis.
Scheduling
Scheduling may be applied to any output option from the TARGIT client. Reports, Analyses,
Dashboards, Storyboards, Notification Agents and even data export from individual objects may be
scheduled. Apart from using the Intelligent Analysis tool to schedule (see the section about Intelligent
Analysis), the Smartpad Documents tab and the right-click menu can also be used to schedule outputs
from TARGIT.
To schedule any of the output options mentioned above, right-click one of the saved documents in the
Smartpad Documents tab and select `Document | Schedule for export´. Data from a single object
may also be scheduled for export by right-clicking an object and selecting Data | Export table data |
Schedule for export. Selecting the menu item will bring up the Job Properties dialogue box where the
properties; Source, Scheduling, Format, Delivery and Batch may be defined:
Source
The Source page only needs to be edited if you want to schedule another source for the output (e.g.
Analysis, Report). This is done by selecting the appropriate file or file element in the file hierarchy.
Only files of the same type as the file originally chosen for export are available e.g. if an analysis was
chosen for export only other analyses in the file system are available. In the bottom of the page a
search field is available that may be used to find the relevant document to schedule. Also note that
only documents of the same file type are shown. The search operators supported in the search field
are the same as for the Documents tab.
If, for some reason, you want to schedule another type of source for export, the job properties dialog
box must be closed and another file must be chosen.
Schedule
On the top of the schedule page scheduling is enabled by clicking the checkbox. Furthermore, a name
for the scheduling may be typed. A default name of the element (analysis, report etc.), that was
chosen for export, is placed in the text box. The schedule page also contains the important definition
Object Functions 55
of frequency and the time of day for the scheduled job. The start date and time may be specified and
if the scheduling must be limited to a specific time interval, an end date may be enabled and entered
as well. Repetition may be specified both for the day the export takes place and for the overall
scheduling.
Format
On the format page the output filename, output format and output language may be changed. The
format options depend on the source used. If an analysis is scheduled, object titles may be hidden in
the output by checking the checkbox. Also the image size for a scheduled analysis may be selected
among the predefined resolutions or a custom resolution may be entered. When scheduling table data
for export, the three file formats; CSV, XML and Excel may be selected and formatted in the same
way as for ordinary table data export. Storyboards may be exported in three available formats;
1024x768, 800x600 and 640x480.
Delivery
On the delivery page two outputs may be selected, either to a folder specified in the TARGIT
Management Studio or by e-mail to one or more recipients. Multiple e-mail addresses are separated
by a semicolon. A subject and a message may be attached to the e-mail by writing in the text boxes.
Global criteria for the analysis/report may be included in the e-mail by checking the check mark
"Include criteria information".
Batch
Several outputs of the type chosen on the delivery page may be sent by using batch processing. This
feature makes it possible to use a chosen dimension and its members as criteria for export of several
analyses or reports. For example, if the dimension 'Salesperson' and two members 'John Rogers' and
'Susan Clarke' are chosen, two outputs are generated. One with the criterion 'Salesperson must be
John Rogers' and one with the criterion 'Salesperson must be Susan Clarke'. To enable this feature
mark the `Enable batch processing´ checkbox on the batch page. The cube must be the same as the
source cube. Choosing a cube will show all dimensions for the cube and selecting a dimension
presents a list of members of the selected dimension. In this list the members may be marked in the
following ways:
A member with this check mark has inherited its inclusion from its parent. For example, if a unique
pair of jeans with model number 123 is marked this way, then the higher level in the hierarchy (e.g.
Jeans) is either included in the scheduled export or inherits inclusion from an even higher level and so
on.
A member with this check mark has inherited its exclusion from its parent, that is, either the parent is
excluded from the scheduled export or inherits exclusion from a higher level and so on.
A member with this check mark is included in the scheduled export independent of the parent
properties.
56 TARGIT User Guide
A member with this check mark is excluded from a scheduled export independent of the parent
properties.
For each of the members included for scheduled export an output will be generated. For example if
three members have been marked as included, three files will be exported according to the properties
defined on the Delivery page. It should be noted, that for hierarchies an output is exported for each
marked lower-level member.
If the chosen dimension has member properties that includes e-mail addresses, the `Email member
property´ may be selected. This option will ensure that scheduled exports will be sent to the
appropriate persons e.g. each salesperson will receive an e-mail with an export of their revenue. In
addition a blind carbon copy (bcc) will be sent to the e-mail address specified on the Delivery page.
Note: To be able to use Batch processing the Corporate Communication Server edition license is
required and the user must have Developer rights. Also note that several e-mail addresses for each
dimension member is supported by separating the e-mail addresses by semicolon in the database.
Administrating Scheduled Jobs
Smartpad: Scheduled Jobs
If you want an overview of Scheduled Jobs select the „Tools | Scheduled Jobs? menu item or the
„Scheduled Jobs? tab in the Smartpad and the work area will change into displaying a list of all active
Scheduled Jobs, which may be sorted on any of its properties by a click in its column header. The size
of the column headers may also be changed by dragging the borders lines. A right-click menu is
available for each job in the list allowing „Run now?, „Open associated file?, „Delete? or 'Properties'
options to be chosen. Selecting a scheduled job in the work area displays the most used job properties
in the Smartpad and the job properties dialogue box will open when one of the small dialogue buttons
( ) or the `Schedule Job´ text is clicked. Selecting any other Smartpad tab will immediately return
the Work area to display the active analysis or report. A logging function is also integrated into the
schedule function and may be opened by highlighting a scheduled job and clicking the `Browse log´
text in the Job Properties tab in the Smartpad. A new window will pop up and display results, start
time, end time and possibly Last value for the jobs that have been processed.
Sentinels
Sentinels are digital watch dogs that may be scheduled to keep an eye on your data. Technically
Sentinels are rules that predict how data evolve based on how data have previously evolved.
To search for Sentinels in your data click on the Sentinels icon in the toolbar or right-click an analysis
and select 'Data | Search for Sentinels'. This opens the 'Search for Sentinels' dialog with the following
tabs:
Object Functions 57
Search Now!
This tab gives an overview of the search and shows the measure to base the prediction on and the
time level used for the Sentinels.
Prediction Measure
The prediction measure is the measure that you want to be warned about. It is typically of great
importance e.g. a KPI.
Time
On the time tab the lowest time dimension level may be defined. E.g. if you set it to month you will be
warned at least one month in advance of predicted changes. Criteria may also be applied to the time
dimension, but it is not recommended unless data are significantly different or faulty since Sentinels
are better, when they are based on as much data as possible.
Note: Dynamic time must be enabled in the cube for the period dimension. Otherwise the search
cannot be completed.
Source Cubes
The scope of the search for Sentinels may be limited to one or more cubes. Including several cubes
may cause more Sentinels to be found and a greater diversity especially if cubes from different areas
of the organization are selected. Only cubes with a shared period dimension are shown in the source
cubes list.
Criteria
This tab provides the option to setup criteria on the dimensions in the selected cubes. As with the time
dimension, setting criteria are not recommended unless data are unsuitable to include in the Sentinel
search. Criteria may also cause the search scope to be too narrow.
When the search has been defined click the 'OK' button and the search for Sentinels starts. The time
the search takes is highly dependent on the amount of data to be searched. When the search has
completed a list of all discovered Sentinels is shown. The Sentinels are sorted according to two things;
First, the confidence percentage, which is an indication of how reliable the Sentinel is based on the
data patterns in the prediction measure and the measures in the Sentinel. Second, a support level
that depends on how much data the Sentinel is based on. I.e. if measures cost and contribution have
similar patterns in 4 out of 5 situations it could be coincidence, but if similar patterns occur in 400 out
of 500 situations the risk that it is a coincidence is lower. The support level is not visible in the listed
Sentinels. The Sentinels with the highest quality (highest confidence and support level) are listed first
and since the Sentinels are based on two parameters the Sentinels are not necessarily listed according
to confidence. Already scheduled Sentinels are not visible in the list, but may be shown by enabling
the check box 'Show already scheduled Sentinel Agents' found in the bottom of the dialog. To select
all Sentinels for scheduling check the 'Select all' option also found below the list of Sentinels.
In the list of Sentinels small red and green arrows are shown next to the measures. For the prediction
measure this indicates that based on prior use of this measure a trend direction is calculated. E.g. if
increasing cost is always used as a negative result, then the arrow pointing upwards is red and the
other green. For the listed Sentinels the arrows indicate how the measures relate to the prediction
58 TARGIT User Guide
measure e.g. if a contribution measure in a Sentinel has a green arrow pointing upwards and a red
downwards, then the previously mentioned prediction measure cost increases a certain percentage if
contribution decreases a certain percentage. The colored arrows may be seen as an indication of the
nature of a measure e.g. cost is mostly seen as negative while contribution is mostly positive.
Visualize Sentinels
The list of Sentinels found in a search does not give an overview of the similarities found in the data.
To get a better view of this, the chart icon next to each Sentinel may be clicked. This opens a chart
where the Sentinel may be visualized. The chart actually includes several charts; one for each of the
source measures (the measures a prediction is based on) and one for the target measure (the
measure with a predicted change). An explanation object is also visible in the right side of the work
area explaining the Sentinel rule and the coloring of the charts. Notice that these Sentinel charts
always show an area chart with a measure and the Period dimension.
The coloring of a chart follow the trend of the measure in it e.g. if the measure cost decreases the
color of a period that adheres to the Sentinel rule is colored green and vice versa for e.g. revenue.
The trend of a measure may be reversed by clicking the smiley icon in the toolbar and select
'Configure'. In each of the charts 3 colors may be seen; a green color if it is a period where all
measures adhere to the Sentinel rule and the trend of the measure is good e.g. cost decreases. A red
color if it is a period where all measures adhere to the Sentinel rule and the trend of the measure is
bad e.g. cost increases. And at last yellow if the target measure does not adhere to the rule, but the
source measures do. When periods are colored yellow they are candidates for uncertainty as the data
patterns seen in the source measures are not seen in the target measure. Therefore, a lot of yellow
areas causes the uncertainty of the Sentinel rule to increase, which is indicated by a decrease in the
rule's confidence. All the grey areas are not colored because no patterns are seen in these periods
across the measures.
All the charts may be drilled like normal objects in an analysis and the object type may also be
changed. By default the criteria 'Period is less than or equal to this month' is set, but other criteria
may be applied from the criteria editor or the criteria bar. At any time when working with Sentinel
rules, the Sentinel icon in the toolbar may be clicked to see the list of Sentinels found in the last
search.
Note: Already scheduled Sentinels may also be visualized from the scheduled jobs list by right-
clicking the job and select 'Visualize Sentinel'.
Scheduling Sentinels
To schedule the Sentinels select them by checking the check box next to each of them. Then go to the
Schedule tab and enter one or more e-mail addresses along with the start time for the schedule.
Multiple e-mail addresses are separated by a semicolon. The schedule runs on the first day of the
period chosen in the Time tab e.g. first day of each month. When clicking 'Schedule' the schedule is
added to the Scheduled Job list, where additional settings may be applied by double-clicking the job
and then setting more detailed schedule and delivery settings.
Object Functions 59
Note: Detailed information about administrating scheduled jobs can be found in the section about
Scheduling and detailed information on the Schedule and Delivery options can be found in the section
about Notification Agents.
TARGIT Cloud
Toolbar: TARGIT Cloud icon Menu: Tools User Preferences menu
TARGIT Cloud is an add-on to TARGIT only available to customers with software maintenance. TARGIT
Cloud is a web portal (cloud.targit.com) where users may upload and analyze data ad-hoc as well as
share data with others. For more information on TARGIT Cloud please see the website.
The website may be opened from the menu, Intelligent Analysis tool and toolbar. The first time a
TARGIT Cloud reference is clicked a dialog appears where e-mail and password must be entered for
registration. After registering an e-mail is sent with an activation link and once activated TARGIT
Cloud is ready for use. For more information on uploading and analyzing data please see the website.
Notification Agents
Right-click menu: 'Notify me when...'
Notification Agents are useful when you need to monitor the development of key measures.
Notification Agents are scheduled to regularly check the current state of the measure. The current
value is then compared to the previous value, and if the pre-defined condition has been met the
Notification Agent will automatically send out an e-mail.
An easy way to create a new, scheduled Notification Agent is to base it on an element in an object in
an existing analysis. Simply right-click the element – a bar in a bar chart, or a cell in a cross table –
and select one of the three menu items „Notify me when...´ to create a new, context based
notification agent. Notification Agents may also be generated using Intelligent Analysis.
If any of the options above are used to apply a notification agent, the Job Properties dialogue box will
pop up and four properties may be changed; Condition, Criteria, Schedule and Delivery:
Condition
On the Condition page the measure to monitor and a corresponding member may be selected as the
source data. The value that triggers the notification may also be selected on the Condition page by
making an expression combined by values from the selection and input boxes. If a goal measure
exists this is set by clicking the `Select goal measure´ text and selecting a measure. If a time
dimension exist in the cube, this may be used to monitor the trend of the chosen measure. To set the
trend monitor, click the text `Monitor the trend of Measure´ and select the trend period. When the
trend is monitored the notification is based on changes in the trend value instead of changes in actual
data for the period where the notification agent is run. The trend value is based on a regression line
for the given measure over the time period.
60 TARGIT User Guide
Criteria
The Criteria page holds a list of the criteria that have been added to the notification. Criteria are
handled in the same way as described in the section about the Criteria editor.
Schedule
The notification is enabled on the Schedule page if the check box `Enabled´ is marked. Furthermore,
a name for the notification scheduling may be typed. As a default the name of the element (analysis,
report etc.), that was chosen for export, is placed in the text box. The schedule page also contain the
important definition of frequency and the time of day for the scheduled job. The start date and time
may be specified and if the scheduling must be limited to a specific time interval, an end date and
time may be enabled and entered as well. Repetition may be specified both for the day the export
takes place and for the overall scheduling.
Delivery
On the Delivery page an e-mail address must be supplied. Multiple e-mail addresses must be
separated by a semicolon. The notification e-mail by default includes a standard subject. This may be
exchanged with a custom text by selecting the button next to the empty text field and entering a text.
A longer text may be supplied in the Message field. This text will be the first text in the notification e-
mail. Default explanation and link to the context and properties for the notification are selected by
default and may be disabled by removing their respective checkmarks. The notification context is the
analysis where the source measure was selected from and the link to this analysis is automatically
inserted, but may be removed or another analysis may be selected. In the bottom of the dialog there
is an option to 'Prevent automatic notifications in Desktop clients'. Checking this option disables any
automatic notifications based on this notification that may appear in the Desktop client.
Note: Notification agents requires normal user rights. Detailed information about administrating
scheduled notification agents can be found in the section about Scheduling.
Add object Notification Agent
Right-click menu: Object
Object notifications are useful for defining exact notifications on data elements in an object. When
creating an object notification the condition and scheduling settings are specified in the job properties
dialog when applying the agent. Notification Agents may be inspected and edited in the Smartpad
„Scheduled Jobs´ tab.
Smiley
Object Functions 61
In the right side of the toolbar a smiley icon visualizes the overall trend for an analysis' data. Every
analysis is automatically rated based on a trend calculation given the most used measure and a time
dimension. The result is visualized by the smiley icon which has three states; happy, neutral and sad.
Hovering the mouse over the icon will show a popup box that explains the reason for the state. E.g. if
the measure is revenue and the dimension is period three different states could be: `I am happy
because revenue pr. period is increasing´, `I am sad because revenue pr. period is decreasing´ or `I
am inconclusive because revenue pr. period is unchanged´. If, for some reason, the trend calculation
cannot be calculated, the following text will be shown instead: `I am unable to determine the result of
revenue pr. period ´.
Clicking the smiley icon opens a smiley settings dialog with two options: Show Me... and Configure.
Selecting Show Me... creates a bar chart in the current analysis with details about the smiley data.
The Configure option makes it possible to enable/disable the smiley function and change the default
measure and dimension upon which the trend is calculated. The changes must be within the same
cube. The trend direction may also be changed. This may be applicable because of the different nature
of the measures e.g. increasing revenue is positive while increasing cost is negative.
Note: The smiley is based on completed periods only e.g. if period criteria is less than or equal to this
month, only months less than this month are considered in the smiley state.
Height
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
This function allows control over the height of the Object measured as a fraction of the actual height
of the Work area. Changing the height of an Object also changes the height of adjacent Objects. When
the available parameters are not fulfilling requirements, the mouse may be used to drag Object
borders to the required positions. Furthermore right-clicking a horizontal Object border opens a menu
where Vertical distribution of Objects may be specified.
Width
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
This function allows control over the width of the Object measured as a fraction of the actual width of
the Work area. Changing the width of an Object also changes the width of adjacent Objects. When the
available parameters are not fulfilling requirements, the mouse may be used to drag Object borders to
the required positions. Furthermore, right-clicking a vertical Object border opens a menu where
Horizontal distribution of Objects may be specified.
Maximize / Restore
Menu: Object | Arrange Right-click menu: Arrange
62 TARGIT User Guide
Working with an Analysis with multiple objects it may sometimes be difficult to see the details of a
single object. Double-click the header of any Object to maximize this Object to the size of the Work
Area. Double-click the header again to restore the Object to its original size.
Map locations
Menu: Object | Map | Edit locations
Maps are used to display data in relation to geographical locations. Data such as Store or Country
would be a good choice of dimension when working with Maps. Map objects with unassigned locations
will show a 'Map locations' button in the title bar of the Object window. This button activates the
locations editor for defining the locations of unassigned dimension values and for changing the
coordinates of already assigned locations.
On the editors Map image there may be small dots, each of which corresponds to a location of a
record of the Country dimension. To reassign a location, simply drag the dot to a new location using
the mouse.
On the right hand side of the editor is a Locations column contains the values of the dimension used
for map locations. Dimension values in bold has already been assigned a location, whereas dimension
values in regular print has not yet been assigned a location on the map. To assign these values to
locations on the map, simply drag the values from the column to the location wanted. It is also
possible to assign position coordinates to a selected location by entering the X/Y coordinates in the
edit fields just below the locations column. The bottom left corner of the map has coordinates (0,0)
and the top right corner has coordinates (999,999).
If the map is a geographical map, it may be mapped to the globe simply by entering the globe
coordinates for the maps top left and bottom right corner in the appropriate edit fields and pressing
the 'Apply globe mapping' button just below.
In the Map object definition window, the selection line in the middle is used for the dimension used as
locations for the map. Records from other dimensions such as Time or Product would normally have
no defined locations on the map, but by adding custom images any dimension could be used with the
Map object.
Globe locations
Menu: Object | Globe | Edit locations
Globes are used to display data in relation to geographical locations. Data such as Store or Country
would be a good choice of dimension when working with Globes. Globe objects with unassigned
locations will show a 'Globe locations' button in the title bar of the Object window. This button
Object Functions 63
activates the locations editor for defining the locations of unassigned dimension values and for
changing the coordinates of already assigned locations. Defining Globe locations is performed in the
same way as defining Map locations, with a few exceptions. The process is described in the Map
locations section.
One difference from the Map locations editor is the location coordinates edit fields, as the Globe needs
the geographical coordinates with Longitude and Latitude instead of the X/Y coordinates used in the
Map editor. The coordinates must be entered in degrees, arc minutes and arc seconds East/West and
North/South. The coordinates for Hjørring, Denmark are shown as an example above the text box
where you can enter the coordinates for the selected dimension value, for instance: 10 degrees, 1
minute and 48 seconds East and 57 degrees, 26 minutes and 24 seconds North is written like this:
10o1’48”E; 57o26’24”N
Another difference is that the globe may be rotated and zoomed just like in the data object. Rotation
is achieved by dragging the mouse while the right mouse button is pressed, or with the keyboard you
can use Alt+Arrow keys to rotate the globe. You may zoom in or out with the + or - keys in the
numeric keypad.
Note: Editing Globe locations requires Developer user rights.
Gauge configuration
Smartpad: Properties tab | Gauge
Gauges are used to display the value, progress or trend of a measure or a calculation relative to a
fixed or dynamic scale. Configuring the look and span of a Gauge object is done from the Smartpad
Properties tab. Clicking Gauge in the Smartpad Properties tab changes the Smartpad to display
properties for the currently selected gauge object. The list of active gauges is displayed like a
hierarchical structure. Each gauge object may contain one or more gauges, and each gauge may
contain one or more values, which are the measures or calculations that are to be displayed in the
gauge.
Object property – Adding and removing gauges
When the top node, the „Gauge? line, in the Active gauges list has been selected, use the ?+ Add
gauge? option to add a new gauge to the current gauge object. Likewise, when a specific gauge has
been selected, use the ?–? option to remove the gauge from the current gauge object.
Object property – Arranging gauges
The gauge arrangement property is only available when two or more gauges have been added to the
gauge object. By default the gauges are arranged automatically. The Auto arrange option may be
overridden by selecting Horizontal or Vertical arrangement.
64 TARGIT User Guide
It is also possible to move a selected gauge up and down in the hierarchical structure by using the
„Move gauge up/down” buttons. Such an action will change the position of the gauge in relation to the
other gauges in the gauge object.
Object property – Hyperrelate
This property contains a check box to enable/disable automatic hyperrelate when the object is clicked.
By default a hyperrelate is performed when a gauge object is clicked. Disabling this property selects
the object instead when it is clicked.
Gauge property – Title
Add a title for the selected gauge or change the existing title. The gauge title will be displayed above
or below the gauge in the gauge object according to the user?s choice. Furthermore the title may be
formatted with regard to font, font size, style and color.
Gauge property – Small gauge
The Small gauge property is only available when two or more gauges have been added to the gauge
object. Use this option to shrink the selected gauge to 50 % of its original size. Other gauges in the
object will use the freed space and may as a consequence grow in size.
Gauge property – Visualizations
When a gauge is highlighted in the `active gauges´ area in the Smartpad, use this option to select the
type of gauge. Each type is useful in different contexts and for different purposes. Also, as will be
described later, each type is defined via different properties:
Speedometer: The Speedometer gauge is the classical gauge where the measured value is
displayed as a needle on a speedometer type background. The Speedometer gauge is a
single, static image where only the location of the needles will change according to data.
The user may add multiple values to be measured or to be set up as a goal. Each of the
added values will result in an extra needle in the Speedometer gauge.
Icon: The Icon gauge is an alternative gauge where the gauge image itself will reflect the
value of the measured data. The Icon gauge is typically based on multiple images where
each image has been related to a certain relative data range. Typical Icon gauge images
may be Smileys or Traffic lights. The user may add another measure to be set up as a goal,
but the Icon gauge is only capable of displaying information about one measure value.
Progress bar: The Progress bar gauge displays the progress of the measured value. The
progress bar has been defined by a minimum and a maximum value and the relative
progress is displayed as a colored bar between these two boundaries. The Progress bar
gauge is a single, static image where only the displayed progress will change according to
data. The user may add another measure to be set up as a goal, but the Progress bar gauge
is only capable of displaying information about one measure value.
Object Functions 65
Gauge property – Scale
Many gauges may initially not have a scale present. E.g. a gauge without a scale might be a
Speedometer without numbers along the perimeter. The Scale property makes it possible to add a
scale to the gauge perimeter. The scale is automatically derived from the minimum and maximum
values of the gauge span, and formatting, such as number format, font size, prefix and postfix may
furthermore be changed.
Gauge property – Value
The Value property makes it possible to display the current value of one of the measures or
calculations that have been added to the gauge. The value will be displayed somewhere inside the
gauge.
Gauge property – Minimum and Maximum span
Click the More properties option to go to the second level of gauge properties. In this level of the
gauge properties the user may define the gauge span by defining the minimum and maximum values
of this span which may be defined either automatically, manually or dynamically:
Automatic: This is the default option defined by these formulas: “MaxSpan = the highest
value of either MaxValue*1.1 or Goal*1.1” and “MinSpan = the lowest value of
either MinValue*0.9 or Goal*0.9” where MaxValue and MinValue are the highest and
lowest values, respectively, among the available values.
Manual: This option allows the user to enter a user defined gauge span, using fixed
minimum and maximum values.
Dynamic: This option allows the user to select different measures as minimum or maximum
values of the gauge span. For example, if Revenue is measured, then it might be desirable
to set up Budget as the maximum gauge span. Not only other measures, but also
calculations, may be defined as Dynamic minimum or maximum. Furthermore, if a
dimension has been added to the object, e.g. Time, the user may define if this maximum
value should be derived from the last element, a specific element or from a range of
elements in this dimension.
Gauge property – Visualization and Rotation
Click the More properties option to go to the third and last level of the gauge properties. From the
Visualizations options the user may choose the preferred graphical presentation of the gauge. A
number of predefined visualizations are available for Speedometer gauges, Icon gauges and Progress
bar gauges. Each gauge type has its own set of visualizations. Other rotations may be selected in case
the default rotation is not suitable.
66 TARGIT User Guide
Gauge property – Adding and removing values
When one of the gauges in the Active gauges list has been selected, use the ?+ Add value? option to
add a new value to the current gauge. Likewise, when a specific value has been selected, use the ?–?
option to remove the value from the current gauge.
Value property – Selecting source data
The value to be displayed in the gauge may be selected from the list of available source data. The way
to display the selected value may be chosen from several options:
The selected value below: This option selects the value to be displayed as the measurable
value in the gauge. As a needle in a Speedometer gauge, as the value that determines the
proper image in the Icon gauge or as the progress of the bar in the Progress bar gauge.
A static value as goal: This option allows the user to enter a static goal for the selected
measure. This goal will be taken into consideration when determining Biggest Opportunities
or Biggest Problems.
Auto adjusted goal for the selected value: This option will calculate an automatic goal
for the selected measure. This goal will be taken into consideration when determining
Biggest Opportunities or Biggest Problems. The formula to calculate this goal is Goal = Max
Value + (MaxValue – MinValue)*0.2.
The selected value below as goal: This option allows the user to select a different
measure or a calculation to become the goal for the selected measure. For example, if
Revenue is the selected measure, then it might be desirable to set up Budget as the goal.
The trend for the selected measure: This option is relevant only when the gauge should
work as a Trend gauge. When this option is selected, a regression calculation is
automatically added to the gauge object. This regression is the basis of the trend direction.
Depending on the measure upon which a trend is displayed, it may be necessary to change
the direction of the trend. E.g. Positive trend is good is normally true for Revenue and
Contribution Margin, while Negative trend is good is normally true for Costs and Complaints.
Value property – Use default gauge span
When working with just one value in a gauge, this value will be displayed relative to the default gauge
span, i.e. the gauge span as defined by the gauge properties. When working with multiple values in
one gauge, the user has an option to disable the default gauge span for the individual values. Once
the default gauge span has been disabled for a value, it can be defined, for this value only, in a
manner similar to the gauge span definition.
Value property –Value Visualization (for Speedometer gauge
type only)
For Speedometer gauges the needles may have two different appearances: A thick needle and a thin
needle – selected as Default and Alternative 1 respectively.
Object Functions 67
Value property –Gauge Intervals (for Icon gauge type only)
Icon gauges work in intervals, with one image associated to each interval. When a value has been
selected for an Icon gauge a number, equal to the number of images in the Icon gauge, of evenly
distributed intervals will be created.
Use the Add interval option to add intervals to the Icon gauge. The added interval will split the
currently selected Gauge Interval into two equally sized intervals. It is most often only relevant to add
as many intervals as the number of different images in the Icon gauge.
Use the Edit Interval select the image for the interval and to redefine the range or the image of the
selected interval. The upper and lower values of the intervals are relative values on a 0 % to 100 %
scale. The actual span of the Icon gauge is determined by the minimum and maximum values of the
Icon gauge span definition. The Threshold value is always the lower value of the interval. When
editing an interval, expanding the icon image will display all available images for this Icon gauge. The
Inclusive option determines whether the Threshold value should be included in the current interval or
not.
Formatting functions
Auto Agent
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Object Keyboard: CTRL+A Right-click menu: Object
Auto Agent is a variation of a Color Agent. As opposed to the user defined Color Agent, the Auto Agent
processes the Object automatically and adds coloring to the Object elements based on the average,
minimum and maximum values of the Measure.
There are three states of this function, the first time the Agent is activated for the Object, the coloring
scheme is red for the smallest value, green for the largest value and shades of these colors for the
intermediate values. The second time the Agent is activated for the Object the coloring scheme is the
opposite, green for the smallest values, red for the largest value and shades of these colors for the
intermediate values. The third time the Agent is activated all Auto Agent coloring is removed.
Show criteria
Menu: Object | Criteria Right-click menu: Object | Criteria
When this function is activated, the bottom part of the Object will be used to display the criteria which
influences the data presented by the Object. In order to preserve space for the actual data
68 TARGIT User Guide
presentation, the criteria are displayed as one long text string. A Show or Hide criteria in all Objects is
available in the View menu.
Regression
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Data | Regression Right-click menu: Data | Regression
This function adds a regression column to the data page. The function is a toggle. If clicked once a
linear regression is added to the object and if clicked once more the regression is changed to a best fit
polynomial regression. The best fit regression is added as a 1. to 4. degree polynomial depending on
what describes the data best. If the best fit is actually a 1. degree polynomial (linear regression) for
the displayed data the regression function only toggles between the best fit linear regression and
none. The object explanation displays the type of regression added and also the regression formula
and variation among the time periods.
Regressions may also be added for several measures. In this case the regression line is colored in the
same color as the corresponding measure.
Note: The Time dimension must be on the X-axis in order to activate the Regression menu item.
Linear correlation
Smartpad: Properties tab
This function adds a linear correlation to a scatter or bubble chart. The linear correlation is a line
calculated from the values in the chart and expresses their relation. The object explanation shows the
line formula and a percentage of how well the line explains the value relationship (higher is better).
Show legend
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function toggles the hide/show status of the legend box at the right side of graphical Objects. The
legend may also be placed in different spots in the object by changing position in the chart properties
dialog.
Vertical axis labels
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right click menu: Chart
Object Functions 69
This function changes the angle of the text on the X-axis of graphs. The option may be used when the
explaining text lines on the X-axis of a chart are too long or if there are too many of them. Either one
of these cases will affect the text lines making some of them hidden due to lack of space. Pressing the
'X-axis text angle' button will turn the text lines 90 degrees counterclockwise to make room for all the
text lines. The trade-off is that there will be less room for the graphical elements of the chart.
Show labels
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Chart Keyboard: CTRL+L Right-click menu: Chart
Labels are used to display data values on graphical Objects. When the 'Show labels' option is enabled,
there will be yellow labels on all the active graph elements. Labels are also shown as hints when
hovering the mouse over an active element of a graphical Object.
There is a wide range of available formats of labels and hints. The format may be edited using the
Smartpad Properties Labels and hints editor, see below.
Show axis titles
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This option may be used to add a title to the axes. The titles shown will be the name(s) of the
measure(s) that belongs to the axis.
3D chart
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used on pie, bar, line and area charts. The '3D effect' function is used to switch
between three different views of the graphical Object: 2D, 3D and static 3D. The difference between
3D and static 3D is that turn and tilt functionality is available for 3D Objects using the mouse or arrow
keys.
The function may be used on an Object both during definition of the Object and when displaying
actual data.
Cylindrical
70 TARGIT User Guide
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used to toggle cylindrical shape of a bar chart on or off. The default shape of a
bar chart is rectangular.
Note: For the cylindrical function to take effect, the bar chart must be viewed in 3D mode.
Gradient rendering
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
This function may be used on graphical objects to make the colors of an object gradient. This will give
the objects a shaded look.
Multi series
Smartpad: Properties tab (in chart dialog) Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
The 'Multi series' function is available to some of the graphical Objects. It will rearrange the graphical
elements on a chart making the values of the data more visible. The rearrangement of the graphical
Object will have no effect on which data the axes represent. However, the value range of the axes
may be changed to fit the new arrangement of the Object.
The effect of this function will vary depending on 2D or 3D view as well as the number of dimensions
selected. There will be a number of different ways to arrange data depending on the chart type. The
available multi series settings are Side by Side, Back-to-Back, Stacked and Stacked percentage.
Globe projection
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Map
The 'Globe projection' function offers multiple ways of graphically presenting Globes. Beside the
classic Globe, a Globe Object can be shown in two different kinds of map-style layouts. Changing the
projection of a Globe will not affect the locations selected for the Object.
Average crosshair
Smartpad: Properties tab (also in chart dialog)Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart
Object Functions 71
This function adds two lines to a Scatter chart object, a vertical and a horizontal (crosshair) in order to
show the average values for the X- and Y-axis.
Align
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Align Right-click menu: Align
This function may be used to align text in Layout Objects. There are options for Left, Right and
Horizontal center alignment plus for Top, Bottom and Vertical Center. The individual options may be
selected as submenu items or by clicking buttons in the Smartpad Properties tab.
In Layout Objects of type Image, the selected background image may also be specified to align as
described above. In case the background image should cover the whole Object area independent of
Object proportions, selecting the 'Ignore proportions' option will stretch the image to fill the whole
Object area both vertically and horizontally.
Formatting options
Smartpad: Properties tab.
Formatting options on the Smartpad Properties tab consist of a series of links that opens a dialog or
changes the Smartpad to display more options. 'Title and Explanation', 'Chart properties', 'Cross
tabulation', 'Visibility', 'Labels and hints', 'Numbers', 'Dynamic captions' and 'Element colors'.
Title and explanation
This dialog may be opened for all graphical or table object types and is used to set titles and
explanations on objects. By default an automatic title is generated from the data in the object. A
Custom title may be entered in the text field and translated to all supported languages by clicking the
globe. The last option is to hide any titles from being displayed in the object.
A custom explanation may be entered in the large text field and translated in the same way as the
title by clicking the globe and entering a translation. It is displayed in the object explanation.
Chart properties
The content of the chart properties dialog may change depending on the selected chart type, but the
three tabs; Chart, Axes and Background are always present.
Chart
The chart tab includes options to enable/disable the legend and select the legend position in the
object. 3D effect, cylindrical bars and gradient may also be enabled/disabled for some charts.
72 TARGIT User Guide
The 'Multi series' function is available to some of the charts. It will rearrange the graphical elements
on a chart making the values of the data more visible. The rearrangement of the graphical object will
have no effect on which data the axes represent. However, the value range of the axes may be
changed to fit the new arrangement of the object. The effect of this function varies depending on 2D
or 3D view as well as the number of dimensions selected. There is a number of different ways to
arrange data depending on the chart type. The available multi series settings are Side by Side, Back-
to-Back, Stacked and Stacked percentage.
Axes
In the axes tab dimension grid lines may be enabled/disabled. Options to display axis titles and
vertical axis labels are also available. For more information on these options, please refer to the 'Show
axis titles' and 'Vertical axis labels' sections in this chapter.
Show axis titles
Vertical axis labels
Measures and calculations are placed on the same axis by default. In the list of measures and
calculations the axis may be specified for each. This makes it easier to view data where the span in
data values across measures/calculations is large.
Charts contain a coordinate plane with X- and Y-axes. The properties of these axes are set
automatically based on the span of data values and the type of graph. Some of these properties, such
as show/hide grid lines, number format, upper and lower limit and minimum step size may be
formatted by clicking the links below the measures/calculations list to improve the graphical
visualization.
Background
In the background tab any of the backgrounds added through TARGIT Management Studio may be
inserted as object background.
Map
The map dialog provides an option to select one of the maps added in TARGIT Management Studio.
Scalable map
Connections to several scalable maps may exist. In the scalable maps dialog one of the connected
maps may be selected for the object. Automatic zoom is enabled by default on a map and causes the
scalable map to zoom according to the data in it. For example, if criteria is set on a map, such that
only data for Denmark and Germany is represented, then the map is automatically zoomed to a point
that exactly contains Denmark and Germany.
Object Functions 73
Below is a list of layers with visibility properties. Each layer may be set to one of the properties
'Show', 'Only data' (only elements in layer if data are available) or 'Hide'. If a group layer is available
in the GIS-map, settings may be applied for the entire group layer instead of applying the same
settings to all individual layers.
Cross tabulation
This feature allows individual rows or ranges of rows in a Table object, Cross tabulation object or the
data page of a graphical object to be formatted. When a data object has been selected for formatting
the following options are available; Background color, Border and Font. Selecting the Background
color option opens a small color selector with options to enter HSV, RGB or HTML color values or
select a color from the spectrum or the predefined colors. Selecting Border provides options to change
the border width and color it with the same color picker as for background color. The Font option
opens a new dialog where all of the fonts installed on the system may be selected. Other options such
as font size, color and style may also be selected and in the bottom of the dialog an example text box
shows the formatting of the current selections. In the right side of the dialog all recently used fonts
are shown not just in this analysis but across the application. Note that checking the 'Use default font'
checkbox overrides the selected font and size. For each data object the formatting may be copied and
inserted in other data objects. These options are available below the three aforementioned formatting
options.
Visibility
Measures in the object may be hidden either completely or for a specified range of dimension values.
In case of hierarchical dimensions, there will be options to hide / show individual dimension levels,
and even calculated columns or rows may be hidden. Results of the selections may immediately be
observed in the selected Object in the Analysis Work area.
Labels and hints
The editor opened by this link allows specifications of the content of labels and hints. Hints are labels
which will be shown when the mouse is hovered over an active element of a graphical Object. Labels
are hints which may be permanently visible in the Object. The editor?s first element is a button to
Show / Hide labels. The format section of the editor shows the „All? radio button followed by a list of
measures and calculated fields in the object, each preceded by a checkbox and a radio button. The
checkbox controls if the label is shown or not, and an active radio button indicates that the Formatting
options in the section below are relevant for this measure or calculated field, or all if that radio button
is active. The Formatting options section shows a checklist of available options. Checked items are
made visible in the label and the hint for the selected measure(s) and / or calculation(s) or all.
74 TARGIT User Guide
Numbers
This link opens a dialog where a measure or calculation may be selected if there are several measures
or calculations (numbers) in the selected object. After selecting a number to format, the dialog
changes and formatting of the number shown in the top of the dialog may be performed or another
number may be selected by clicking the number.
Three formatting options exist for measures; Database default, Numeric and Time. The database
default keeps the formatting set in the database. Numeric formatting enables advanced formatting of
numeric values (see the subsection below for description) and for time formatting the source time unit
in the database may be selected and a display unit to be displayed in the object may also be selected.
For each number the cell alignment may be set and if the object is of the type Bar, Line or Area chart
the object type may be interchanged between these three types.
To the right of the formatting area two fields are shown. The upper field 'Copy from...' makes it
possible to copy the formatting from other formatted numbers in the object. If the object has chart
axes it is also possible to copy the formatting of the left and right chart axes to the current number
formatting. The lower field 'Recently used' displays the five most recently used format strings for the
user.
Numeric formatting
When the numeric formatting is selected a frame with a format string is available. By default the
database default is selected. The 'Format string option provides a text field and a drop box. The drop
box contains several predefined formatting options. The text field shows the selection from the drop
box. A custom format may also be entered according to the numeric value string format for MDX or
the custom format in Microsoft Excel. Some of the formatting characters are shown in the following
table and for further information please refer to the MDX or Excel documentation.
A user-defined format expression for numbers can have anywhere from one to four sections separated
by semicolons. If the expression contains one section the format expression applies to all values, for
two sections the first section applies to positive values and zeros, the second to negative values, for
three sections the first section applies to positive values, the second to negative values, and the third
to zeros and for four sections the first section applies to positive values, the second to negative
values, the third to zeros, and the fourth to null values. If the 'Advanced format' text is clicked in the
numeric formatting frame, each section may be specified individually and the result is displayed in the
'Format string' drop box.
Character Description
0 Represents a digit placeholder that displays a digit or a zero (0). If
the number has a digit in the position where the zero appears in the
format string, the formatted value displays the digit. Otherwise, the
formatted value displays a zero in that position. E.g. 0.0 represents a
number followed by one decimal (1234.5)
Object Functions 75
# Represents a digit placeholder that displays a digit or nothing. If the
expression has a digit in the position where the number sign (#)
appears in the format string, the formatted value displays the digit.
Otherwise, the formatted value displays nothing in that position E.g.
#.# represents a number followed by one decimal (1234.5) or no
decimals if there are no decimals in the original number (1234).
. Represents a decimal placeholder that determines how many digits
are displayed to the left and right of the decimal separator e.g. #.##
(1234.56). If the format expression contains only number sign (#)
characters to the left of the period (.), numbers smaller than 1 start
with a decimal separator. To display a leading zero displayed with
fractional numbers, use zero (0) as the first digit placeholder to the
left of the decimal separator. Notice that on some languages a
comma is used as a decimal separator.
, Represents a thousand separator that separates thousands from
hundreds within a number that has four or more places to the left of
the decimal separator e.g. #,#.# (1,234.5). Standard use of the
thousand separator is specified if the format contains a thousand
separator enclosed in digit placeholders (0 or #). Note that the
thousand separator may also be used to round thousands e.g. the
number format 0, rounds the number 1234567890 to 1234568 and
0,, rounds it to 1235 and so on.
% Represents a percentage placeholder. The expression is multiplied by
100. The percent character (%) is inserted in the position where the
percentage appears in the format string e.g. #.00 % (0.12 is
formatted as 12.00 %).
"AB" Displays the string inside the double quotation marks ("Percentage"
#.00 % is formatted as Percentage 12.00 %).
When selecting one of the predefined strings or creating a custom string, the example below the drop
box shows how the format takes effect (note that the General Number string displays numbers
without thousand separator and with the number of decimals available from the data source, which is
not necessarily the 2 decimals shown in the example). The decimal and thousand separators are
formatted according to the client regional settings and the currency format string is formatted
according to the currency language set in TARGIT Management Studio. The format may also be
reversed by selecting the 'Reverse sign' check box. This reverses all numbers, e.g. 1234,56 is
displayed as -1234,56, except for the English (Worldwide) currency where the number is enclosed in
parentheses instead.
In the advanced format the format string may be customized in the same way as in the basic format,
but each of the four aforementioned sections may be specified individually. Clicking the 'Specify' text
changes the dialog to show additional settings for the selected section. The settings include: Leading
text - adds the specified text in front of the number, Group thousands - groups thousands by adding
76 TARGIT User Guide
thousand separators, Min. number of digits - specifies the minimum number of digits missing digits
are replaced by zeroes, Min. number of decimals - specifies the minimum number of decimals, Trailing
text - appends the specified text after the number, Percentage (multiply by 100) - multiplies the
number by 100 and adds the percentage character to the end of the number, Unit size - divides the
number by the selected unit size.
Note: To be able to format all numbers on the client side the setting 'Client-side number formatting'
must be enabled in TARGIT Management Studio. If this option is not enabled the formatting is based
on the system language of the server running the TARGIT Server. Of course this formatting may be
changed in the client, but only for individual objects or reports. By enabling 'Client-side number
formatting' the number formatting is done on the client according to the regional settings language
thereby enabling the formatting to be effective in all existing objects and reports without any changes
to them. It should be noted that scheduled analyses and reports are formatted according to the
language selected in the scheduled job and the default language is the client language.
Dynamic captions
This feature can be used to create manually defined dynamic captions. There are 2 ways to set
Dynamic captions. You can right click your crosstable on the heading that you wish to make dynamic
or when your object is active you can find “Format dynamic captions” under Properties in the
Smartpad. If you use the last option, the Properties tab in the Smartpad will change and show
captions for the elements of the highlighted object e.g. measures or calculations. Clicking one of the
elements changes the Smartpad again such that the caption for the chosen element can be
configured. Using the first option to set dynamic captions provides two options; setting dynamic
captions for a single member or all members on a level. After making an appropriate choice the
Smartpad changes and the dynamic captions may be configured.
Editing captions is done in the text box in the top of the Smartpad. Captions may be entered manually
or chosen from the list of references placed below the text box. Captions are entered in the format
{reference
ostfix}, where the postfix may be first, last or all depending on which values should beincluded in the caption:
Postfix Description
First The first value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
Last The last value of the chosen dimension is inserted in the caption.
All All values of the chosen dimension are inserted in the caption
separated by colons.
The default reference for a caption is cellvalue without a postfix.
Note: Dynamic captions for a member may be reset to the original caption by clicking on the caption
in the Smartpad and clicking 'Reset to original caption' under the caption text box.
Object Functions 77
Element colors
Menu: Object | Chart Right-click menu: Chart | Format element colors
A dialog opens with options to set the object color or shared color for each dimension member.
Clicking the assigned color or the 'Assign color' text opens the color picker, where a color may be
chosen by moving the color slider and selecting a color from the color square. Standard or recent
colors may also be selected and HSV, RGB or HTML color codes may be entered to set a specific color.
Note: The difference between using the visibility and color formatting options and their corresponding
Visibility and Color Agents is as follows: the formatting options are used for promptly, unconditional
formatting of measures, dimension values or calculated values. Intelligent Agents are designed to
automatically apply the formatting according to certain conditions, as defined by the user.
Any color agents or auto agents override the manually formatted colors. Editing shared colors is
limited to users with Developer rights.
Intelligent Agents
Smartpad: Properties tab
Intelligent Agents are designed to implement actions which are based on certain conditions in actual
data in the Data Warehouse. Standard conditions such as above or below average and positive or
negative values are predefined and easily selectable. If more elaborate conditions are required,
options are supplied for user designed conditions using the same formula syntax as in the Advanced
Calculations Editor.
There are two types of Intelligent Agents, Color and Gauge Agents and Visibility Agents,
both accessible on the Smartpad Properties tab. One or more Intelligent Agents may be specified for
each measure, dimension value or calculated value, and in case two or more Agents exist for the
same value, there will be an option for rearranging them in order to control the sequence in which
they are applied.
Color and Gauge Agents
Color and gauge agents are used on cross tables and may be represented in many forms e.g. as small
gauges, icons or colored text in individual cross table cells. Color and gauge agents may be applied to
all objects, but the visual effects e.g. gauges or colors are only applied to the underlying cross table.
When the 'Color and Gauge Agents' link is clicked a new properties area is opened in the Smartpad. If
the list with color and gauge agents is empty a new agent is created by clicking any of the Smart
Agents listed. After clicking a Smart Agent a variant of that specific Smart Agent must be chosen and
the measure or calculation to apply the agent on must be chosen. Either a color or a gauge agent has
78 TARGIT User Guide
now been created depending on the choice of Smart Agent. The color or gauge agent is now listed in
the color and gauge agent list. The purpose of the Smart Agents is to be able to create agents with
ease and in very few clicks. If the need arise to add more details to an agent simply click its condition
in the list of agents and the agent properties dialog opens.
The agent properties dialog consist of four tabs on the left side. each of the tabs are described below:
Condition
The agent condition specifies when an agent should be triggered. The syntax is the same as used
when creating calculations and can be seen in the chapter 'Formula syntax'. For easy reference some
standard and recently used conditions are listed to the right of the condition editor. Simply click any of
these to insert the corresponding expression in the editor.
Action
The action tab specifies the action to be taken by the agent once the condition is fulfilled. For each
action one or more options are available.
Gauge
If choosing an action where an icon is displayed in a cell, the gauge tab contains several icon series
e.g. thumbs, arrows and traffic lights. When the appropriate icon series has been chosen, the size of
each of the icons in the series may be set. If choosing a speedometer or progress bar several gauges
are available and when selecting a gauge different sizes are also available.
Color
The color tab gives access to defining colors or color ranges for use in the cross table cells either as
standalone colors or coloring of progress bars, gauge needles etc. When creating a Smart Agent one
or more colors are present in the list of colors. If the color agent must change over a color scale e.g.
from red to yellow to green more colors may be added by duplicating the existing color. This is done
by clicking the '+' icon. Standard color series and recently used series are available to the right of the
color list. Several colors may be added and the preview color bar shows the color scale based on the
selected colors. The value range where the colors are applied is by default set to automatic, but a
custom range may be defined by adding a manual minimum and/or maximum value.
To get an overview of the properties of each agent refer to the table below.
Smart
Agent
Description
Default Clicking this agent opens the agent properties dialog. By default the agent condition is
set to 1 (all values), the action is set to 'Color an element' and the color is set to green.
Color
element
The color element agent puts a colored square into cross table cells similar to the auto
agent. The agent has four options; Default - opens the agent properties dialog as
mentioned above, Color element (2 states) - adds two agents, a green for positive
values and a red for negative values, Color element (3 states) - adds three agents, a
green for values significantly above average, a yellow for values within an average range
Object Functions 79
(average +/ standard deviation), a red for values significantly below average, Color
element automatically - Colors all values automatically according to a red/yellow/green
scale.
Icon The icon agent puts an icon into cross table cells. Several icon based Smart Agents exist:
Classic LED, Classic Arrow and Classic Smiley with 2, 3 or 5 states, Thumbs (1 or 2
states), Colored LED and Colored arrow. The only differences among these agents are
the number of states and the icon used.
Gauge The gauge agent puts a gauge into cross table cells. Three gauge based Smart Agents
exist: Progress bar - a progress bar with rounded frame and a red/yellow/green color
range, Default Speedometer - Default Speedometer with a red/yellow/green color range,
Classic Speedometer - Classic Speedometer with a red/yellow/green color range. For all
gauge types the color range is shown in the gauge depending on the cell value.
Background The Background Smart Agent colors the background of the cross table cell. The coloring
may be done with either 2 or 3 states. Another option is to color the cell as a progress
bar i.e. a part of the cell is colored according to the value in the cell.
Note: Coloring as a progress bar does not apply in TARGIT NET. Instead the whole cell is
colored according to the chosen colors.
Text The Text Smart Agent colors the text in the cross table cells. The agent has 2 and 3 state
variants and a variant that colors the text automatically with a red/yellow/green color
scale.
Note: Several Smart Agents may be added to the same cells, but combining icons with a background
progress bar causes the background of the icons to become white if the cross table is exported as a
report in pdf.
Visibility Agents
Visibility Agents are used to control visibility of measures, dimension values or calculated values when
the visibility is dependant on user specified conditions based on actual data values.
Format table functions
Format table functions is accessed via the 'Object | Table' menu for the active object. These functions
can also be accessed by right-clicking the object, and selecting 'Format table' from the right-click
menu. And finally, as a handy shortcut, hold down the CTRL key while right-clicking the object to open
the 'Format table' menu directly.
80 TARGIT User Guide
Sorting and ordering
The sequence of rows in Table Objects, Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects data page may
be changed by right-clicking a column header. There are three basic collating sequences, the source
data order, ascending order and descending order. An arrow up indicator in the column header means
that the column is sorted ascending, an arrow down indicator means the column is sorted descending,
and the source data order. Consecutive shift + right-clicks in the column header will toggle between
the three basic collating sequences.
If several columns must be sorted, sort one of the columns and for other columns that need to be
sorted right-click their column header and select 'Add to sort list'. When more than one column is
added to the sort order, the column headers show a number. This number represents the order of the
sort list. All members are sorted according to the column header with the number '1' first. If some
members have the same value in this column they are sorted according to the values in the column
with the number '2' in the header and so on. The collating sequence of a column may be changed by
right-clicking the column header and selecting 'Add to sort list'.
Note: Calculations may depend on the sorting order.
Custom order
The sequence of rows and columns may also be arranged by dragging individual elements to the
desired position. The same may also be achieved by keyboard commands, first use the Insert key to
select the element to be moved, then use up / down arrows to move the element to the desired
position and press Enter to do the actual insertion.
If such custom ordering has been applied to an Object, this custom order replaces the source data
order in above three sorting orders. Activating the Remove custom order function will reset this
collation to source data order.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Format row style
Menu: Object | Table | Format this member Right-click menu: Table | Format this member
Font, Font Style, Borders and Background properties may be specified for individual rows or ranges of
rows in a Table object, Cross tabulation object or the data page of a graphical object. Activating this
menu item will open the Properties tab 'Format data page' editor making it possible to edit these
properties.
Object Functions 81
Use right-click, or CTRL + right-click, on any row to edit row style properties for that particular row or
for that particular dimension level.
Measures Down
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Table
The 'Measures down' function offers the possibility of changing the way Dimensions and Measures are
presented in non-graphical Objects and in the Data view of Graphical Objects. The most noticeable
effect of using the 'Measures down' function is obtained when an Object consists of many Measures
and one or more Dimensions with relatively few values. By having Measures listed vertically instead of
horizontally, having to scroll the Object to see all Measures for a given Dimension value may be
avoided.
Word wrap
Menu: Object | Table
If column or row headers are too long to fit in a cell in the cross table, this function will enable
automatic word wrap such that text is fitted on successive lines.
Hierarchical collation
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
If a Table Object, Cross tabulation Object or a graphical Objects data page containing a hierarchical
dimension has been sorted, this option becomes available and set by default. This means that the
rows will be sorted, but the original hierarchy will be maintained. If this option is turned off the
hierarchy will be broken, and the order of rows will be decided by the values in the sorted column
alone.
Note: Turning off hierarchical collation will hide totals and subtotals.
Compact hierarchies
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Object | Table
By default, tables with hierarchical (multi-level) dimensions display the dimension hierarchy with one
column for each level of dimension values. The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a
hierarchical dimension to be displayed in a single column using indention to illustrate the dimension
82 TARGIT User Guide
levels. This option may also be set in the User Preferences menu, in this case the feature will be
activated for all new objects.
Indent hierarchies
Menu: Object | Table Right-click menu: Table
The 'Compact hierarchies' option will cause all levels of a hierarchical dimension to be displayed in a
single column using indention to illustrate the dimension levels. The indention may be toggled on / off
by using this function.
Grand totals
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table |
Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether the grand totals are shown or not. This only affects cross tabulation
objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Subtotals
Smartpad: Properties tab Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table |
Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether the subtotals are shown or not. This only affects cross tabulation objects
or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Remove custom order
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
Columns and rows in Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when in data mode may be
rearranged by dragging individual elements to the desired position. This option removes all such
custom ordering and reset the Object to default ordering.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Ignore custom order
Menu: Object | Table | Sorting Right-click menu: Table | Sorting
Object Functions 83
Columns and rows in Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when in data mode may be
rearranged by dragging individual elements to the desired position. This option toggles such custom
ordering on/off.
Note: Custom ordering of columns and rows is not available if there is more than one dimension on
the X- or Y-axis respectively.
Row totals after members
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether totals and subtotals should be shown before or after the members. This
only affects Cross tabulation Objects or graphical Objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is not available if there is more than one dimension on the X-axis.
Text row
Menu: Object | Data Right-click menu: Data
This function may be used to add extra rows to a crosstable with customized text. The text may be
entered in the Smartpad in the same format as dynamic captions or as regular text.
Column totals after members
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether totals and subtotals should be shown above or below the elements. This
only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is not available if there is more than one dimension on the Y-axis.
Multidimensional subtotal columns
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether subtotals columns should be shown for secondary dimensions on the X-
axis. This only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data
mode.
Note: This option is only relevant if there is more than one dimension on the X-axis.
84 TARGIT User Guide
Multidimensional subtotal rows
Menu: Object | Table | Totals and Subtotals Right-click menu: Table | Totals and Subtotals
This option toggles whether subtotal rows should be shown for secondary dimensions on the Y-axis.
This only affects cross tabulation objects or graphical objects when they are viewed in data mode.
Note: This option is only relevant if there is more than one dimension on the Y-axis.
Calculations functions
The Calculations tab offers two major function types, 'Smart calculations' and `Top list´ plus a button
to open the Advanced Calculations Editor. Before working with any of these, it is necessary to select
the Object to which the chosen functions should apply.
Smart calculations
Smartpad: Calculations tab
The 'Smart calculations' window on the Calculations tab first lists all existing Smart calculations for the
active object. To add/modify an existing calculation, click it and add/modify it as described below.
Add calculation
There are several predefined calculations listed under Add calculation. When a predefined calculation
is chosen, it must be determined first under which conditions the calculation should be added. This is
done via a number of logical steps, which are common for all predefined calculations. The number of
steps will vary, depending on the number of measures and dimensions in the selected object. This
process is made as self explanatory as possible, and if the object for instance is built with one
measure and one dimension only, the chosen predefined calculation will be automatically applied in
the correct place simply by clicking it.
Here is a list of available Smart calculations:
Total: This function will calculate the sum of the chosen measure(s) across the X- or Y-axes
according to the choice of dimension.
Average: This function will calculate the average of the chosen measure(s) across the X- or
Y-axes according to the choice of dimension.
Standard deviation: This function will calculate the standard deviation of the chosen
measure(s) across the X- or Y-axis according to the choice of dimension.
Accumulated sum: This function will calculate the accumulated sum, from top to bottom or
from left to right, of the chosen measure(s) of the last column or last row according to the
choice of dimension.
Object Functions 85
Accumulated average: This function will calculate the accumulated average, from top to
bottom or from left to right, of the chosen measure(s) of the last column or last row
according to the choice of dimension.
Difference: This function will calculate the difference of the chosen measure(s) in the last
two columns or the last two rows according to the choice of dimension.
Growth percent: This function will calculate the „Growth percent? of the chosen measure(s)
in the last two columns or the last two rows according to the choice of dimension.
Measure difference: This function will calculate the difference of two chosen measures in
the last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Note that you will be
requested to choose an A-measure and subsequently a B-measure. The calculation will be A-
B.
Index percent: This function will calculate the index percent of the chosen measure in the
last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value will be
calculated as a percentage of the topmost or leftmost measure value.
Percentage: This function will calculate the index percent of the chosen measure in the last
column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value will be
calculated as a percentage of the total of all measure values.
Index of average: This function will calculate the index of average of the chosen measure
in the last column or the last row according to the choice of dimension. Each measure value
will be calculated as a percentage of the average of all measure values.
Custom calculation: This function makes it possible to add ones own customized
calculation. In the „Enter calculation? box the desired formula may be entered.
Modify a calculation
Once a calculation has been added to an object, it will appear at the top of the 'Smart calculations'
pad. If an added calculation is clicked, the following properties may be changed:
Calculation title: Change the title of this calculation.
Range: Define the range, e.g. from first column to last column, to which this calculation
must apply.
Source: Define the referenced column/row for the calculation, either „current? or another
relatively referenced column/row.
Source (Measure): Change the measure for the calculation.
Move Calculation to the other axis: A calculated column will become a calculated row,
and vice-versa.
Swap X and Y references: If the formula has a defined range, e.g. calculation of average
of all measures from first column to last column of last row, you can swap X and Y
references to calculate the average of all measures from first row to last row of last column
instead. This property is only available for calculations that are added as a new measure.
Advanced Calculations Editor
Smartpad: Calculations tab.
86 TARGIT User Guide
It is possible to add calculated columns and rows to all objects. This may be done either by using the
predefined Smart calculations in the Smartpad or by using Advanced Calculations Editor to manually
add columns or rows to a cross tabulation object and design formulas to define the contents of the
data fields of the added columns and / or rows. This feature also applies to the grid of the 'Data page'
of graphical objects.
Before working with the Advanced Calculations Editor, it is necessary to understand the basic
structure of the cross tabulations and how to reference rows, columns and specific data fields within
the cross table.
Syntax description
The general syntax for referencing cells in a cross table is: cells(x coordinate, y coordinate,
measure#). The x coordinate refer to columns, while the y coordinate refer to rows. The measure
reference is necessary as there may be more than one measure in a cross table.
The current column or row can be referenced by replacing the x coordinate or y coordinate
respectively with '0'. If e.g. a calculated column has been added, the current row can be referenced as
cells(x coordinate, 0, measure#), and if a calculated row has been added, the current column can
be referenced as cells(0, y coordinate, measure#). As shorthand, column cells in the current row
may also be referenced as: cols(x coordinate, measure#), and row cells in the current column may
likewise be referenced as: rows(y coordinate, measure#).
Referencing columns, rows and data
When designing a formula with a reference to a specific cell, the syntax must be cells(d#, d#, m#).
Note that column and row references have been prefixed with a 'd', for “dimension reference”, while
'm' is for “measure reference”.
The dimension reference 'd' must be followed by either a positive or a negative integer which defines
the referenced column?s or row?s position in the table. Positive integers indicate that the table columns
and rows are referenced from left to right and from top to bottom respectively. E.g. cells(d1,d1,m1)
refers to the upper left cell in the table. Negative integers indicate that the table columns and rows
are referenced from right to left and from bottom to top respectively. E.g. cells(d-1,d-1,m1) refers
to the lower right cell in the table. Please observe that calculated columns and rows are not counted
when using 'd-1'.
The measure reference 'm' must be followed by a positive or negative integer which defines the
measure?s position in the table. Positive integers indicate that the measures are referenced from left
to right or from top to bottom. Negative integers indicate that the measures are referenced from right
to left or from bottom to top. E.g. 'm1' refers the leftmost or topmost measure and likewise 'm-1'
refers the rightmost or bottommost measure, independent of type, calculated or not.
Object Functions 87
The calculation reference 'c' can be used to refer to a previously inserted, calculated column or row,
and follow the same referencing rules as measure references. E.g. cells(c1,d1,m1) refers to the first
calculated column, while cells(d1,c1,m1) refers to the first calculated row.
Relative references
Cell references may also be used without the 'd' prefixes, thereby being a positive or negative integer
(incl. zero). This means that the referenced cells are relative to the cells into which the result of the
actual calculation is placed. As mentioned above '0' means current row or column; negative integers
means previous rows or columns; and positive integers means next rows or columns.
E.g. cells(d1,-1,m1) refers to the cell containing measure 'm1' in the previous row of the first
column.
Cell range references
It is also possible to refer to ranges of cells in cross tabulations. Cell ranges consist of a start and an
end cell reference separated by colon.
E.g. cells(d-1,d1:d3,m1) refers to cells containing measure 'm1' in the first three rows of the last
column.
Often you would like to define a range of all cells from top to bottom or from left to right. This can be
done by defining the range as d1:d-1 (from first to last column or row). Alternatively the keyword 'all'
can be used.
E.g. cells(d2,all,m2) refers to cells containing measure 'm2' in all rows of the second column.
Scope
The method used for referencing cells, as described above, enables calculations to always work within
the current “scope”. For instance in a cross table with one or more hierarchical dimensions, it is
possible to expand a dimension to its next level, for example a Time dimension can be expanded from
the Quarter level to the Month level. Thus the scope has changed from 'Quarter' to 'Month'. A formula
will in this expanded level only reference dimension values concerning the new scope, 'Month', and
not dimension values in the “upper” scope: 'Quarter'.
Even though the expanded scope may now contain more rows or more columns than the original
scope, the formulas, if properly designed, will automatically adapt to the new scope. E.g. an 'all'
reference will now simply address all months rather than all quarters, a 'd-1' reference will still refer
to the last row or last column, which now contains month values rather than quarter values etc.
Grand totals are considered to be in a scope level separate from the dimension values.
Top list
Smartpad: Calculations tab
The Top list function offers an easy-to-use approach to isolating either negative or positive values in a
result set. As indicated by the terminology, a Top list consists of the best or worst part of values of an
Object. For instance, if it is desirable to focus on the revenue for the 5 best months of the year, a
88 TARGIT User Guide
positive Top list can be build for the Revenue pr. Time Analysis. The column to be used for Top list
can be selected in the drop-list just below the Top list edit field.
Note: Top lists are based on the present sorting of the Object. This means that if the Object is sorted
on the Time column, a 5 item Top list will show Months 1-5. If the object is “unsorted”, i.e. no explicit
sorting has been chosen then activating the Top list function will cause the object to be sorted
automatically according to the right-most column. Also consider that setting Top list to 5 and sort the
object ascending on the right-most column will actually result in a Bottom list (and vice versa).
Top percentage (Pareto analysis)
The 'Top percentage' function is a variant of the Top list function. For instance, it can be used to
perform a Pareto analysis on the Revenue of all products. The classic thesis is that 80% of the
Revenue is based on only 20% of the products. To try this, using the 'Top percentage' function, enter
80 in the Top list edit field and click the percentage button. The result will be a Top list of those
products contributing with at least 80% of the total revenue.
Note: Clicking the percentage button repeatedly will cause the functionality to toggle between 'Top
percentage' and Top list.
Criteria 89
Criteria
Criteria, Drill down and Comparisons are mechanisms used to control which data is displayed by the
Objects, Analyses and Reports in the Work area.
Global criteria
Global criteria are available as basic criteria represented by a Criteria bar or as Advanced criteria
specified in the Criteria editor. The fact that the criteria are global means that selected values
influence all unlocked Objects in the Work area. All global criteria may be removed by clicking
'Remove all global criteria' in the Criteria tab in the Smartpad.
Basic Global criteria
Menu: View | Criteria bar
The Criteria bar may be shown or hidden by selecting the Criteria bar item in the View menu or by
pressing the magnifying glass button in the Toolbar.
Shows/hides the Criteria bar.
When the Criteria bar is visible it appears beneath the Toolbar or the Menu bar if the Toolbar is
hidden. The Criteria bar consists of drop-down boxes with different content. The most central drop
downs contain dimension values available for criteria selection. When selecting one or more values the
objects in the analysis are immediately reflected. For example if an analysis consists of two objects
e.g. Revenue per Item and Revenue Per Period and in the Customer Country drop-list a criteria has
been set to Denmark, then the two objects in the analysis only show data for Denmark.
Multiple values may be selected at the same time by check marking each of the desired values and
then close the drop-down list by clicking the down arrow to the right of the drop-list. A click on one of
the item names in the list selects this one value as criteria and closes the list box. For some
dimensions it may be convenient to only allow a single selection. This is done by right-clicking the
dimension in the criteria bar and selecting 'Single selection'. Note that in the criteria editor this
dimension still appears with multiple selections. To get a quick overview of the criteria in a dimension
click the icon to the left of the dimension name, which opens a yellow information box. Sometimes a
small orange information icon is shown to the right of the dimension name. This icon is shown when
other criteria, that cannot be displayed in the criteria bar, apply e.g. dynamic periods. More
information on the criteria that apply may be obtained by clicking the icon.
The 'disable immediate refresh' button at the right end of the Criteria bar may be used to suppress
fetching of data each time criteria are selected. When all required criteria has been selected in the
Criteria bar drop-lists, a new click on this button, now called Automatic refresh, will start fetching data
90 TARGIT User Guide
according to the specified delimitations. The refresh button may also be found in the menu opened by
right-clicking the criteria bar.
The dimensions available as drop-lists in the Criteria bar can be changed using the Smartpad. This is
done simply by dragging dimensions between the Smartpad 'Source data' tab and the Criteria bar in
the same way as when defining Objects or by right-clicking a dimension in the criteria bar or
Smartpad and selecting the appropriate menu item. Drop downs in the criteria bar may be rearranged
by dragging them to an appropriate place or use the right-click menu in the source data tab in the
Smartpad. Global criteria may be removed by right-clicking in an empty area of the criteria bar and
selecting 'Remove all global criteria' to remove all global criteria in the analysis or report or 'Remove
bar criteria' to remove only the criteria in the criteria bar. Note that the dimensions are not removed
from the criteria bar.
Note: The Criteria bar dimension drop-lists cannot display criteria of types “Greater than” or “Less
than”, or any combinations thereof, use the Criteria editor for this type of action. Also note that
criteria drop downs are populated at the time of drop down. For large dimensions this may take some
time.
Free text filtering
In order to make it easier to find and select dimension values in a drop-list with many entries, a free-
text filtering of dimension values using wildcards (*) is available just by typing a selection string in
the drop-list. The operators available are equal to the ones used in the criteria editor and for easier
access to the criteria editor a search field using the same operators is also available in the bottom of
the drop down. Searches in this field may be transferred to the criteria editor for advanced criteria
handling by clicking the 'Editor' text.
Auto-filter Criteria bar
In order to make it even easier to select criteria in the Criteria bar, the Criteria bar drop-lists may be
filtered to contain only the dimension values that would be present in a data object influenced by
already selected criteria. This may be activated by selecting the „Auto-filter Criteria bar? option in the
Tools | User Preferences submenu. This setting enables auto-filtering in the criteria bar for the user
until it is disabled again. Another option to auto filter the criteria bar is to right-click the bar and select
'Auto-filter'. This setting keeps auto-filtering during the session (until log out) or until it is disabled
again.
Stored criteria selector
A stored criteria selector may be added to the criteria bar by right-clicking the bar and select 'Add
stored criteria selector'. This adds a drop down to the criteria bar automatically including any stored
document criteria. The criteria displayed in the stored criteria selector may be changed by right-
clicking the selector and select 'Properties'. This opens a dialog with a list of Shared and Document
criteria. Clicking a stored criteria adds it to the left box containing criteria displayed in the selector.
The order of the stored criteria may be changed by selecting a stored criteria and clicking the arrows.
Criteria 91
Measure selector
For an easy way of changing measure in an analysis, a measure selector may be added to the criteria
bar by right-clicking the criteria bar and selecting 'Add measure selector'. Opening the drop down
shows a list of all the measures in the cube and a measure to substitute on top. If several measures
are available in the analysis the measure to substitute may be clicked and another measure may be
selected. The measure displayed in the measure selector may also be substituted by another
measure, by dragging the measure from the Source data tab in the Smartpad onto the measure
selector.
If only a few measures should be available for selection in the measure selector, a properties dialog
may be opened by right-clicking the selector and click 'Properties'. This opens a dialog with all
measures in the cube placed in the right side and all of the measures in the selector on the left side.
Measures are added by clicking them and the order of the measures in the selector may be changed
by highlighting a measure and moving it with the blue arrows. The name of the selector may also be
changed by editing the text field and translations for any of the available languages may be added by
clicking the globe and entering appropriate translations.
Dynamic periods
When a period dimension has been added to the criteria bar, dynamic periods may be used by right-
clicking the dimension drop down and select 'Use dynamic periods'. This enables the drop down to
show predefined dynamic periods available for easy selection. To further edit the listed dynamic
periods or add other dynamic period criteria to the analysis click the 'Editor' link in the bottom of the
drop down. This opens the criteria editor where more advanced criteria may be specified.
To further improve the usability of 'Dynamic Periods' it is possible to set its origin. A dynamic date
origin selector may be added to the criteria bar by right-clicking the bar and select 'Add dynamic date
origin'. The selected date only takes effect when dynamic periods are used. To set the 'Dynamic date
origin' click the arrow in the drop down box and select a date in the calendar. Month and year may be
selected by clicking each respectively. The 'Dynamic date origin' is active for the whole analysis or
report but is not saved with it. To save the Dynamic date origin for the whole session click the clock
icon next to the drop down.
Note: Use of dynamic periods is only available if it has been set up in the cube.
Ignore initial criteria
Menu: File | Document properties Toolbar: User preferences | Document properties
In the Roles management in TARGIT Management Studio initial criteria may be set on dimensions of
each cube. Initial criteria are applied as global criteria on all analyses and reports based on data from
the cube where the initial criteria have been applied. The initial criteria may be removed from the
analysis or report, but will be re-added once the analysis or report is opened again. This setting may
be used for analyses or reports to ignore any initial criteria set. After changing the setting the
analysis/report must be saved and if the applied initial criteria shouldn't be shown when opening the
92 TARGIT User Guide
analysis/report they must be removed before saving it. When creating a new analysis the initial
criteria are also applied, but the cube with the initial criteria must be selected in the Source data tab
before creating the analysis i.e. adding an object to a new analysis and then changing cube does not
apply the initial criteria.
Note: When hyper relating or trigger from an analysis or report with initial criteria, the initial criteria
are included in the opened analysis despite that the ignore initial criteria setting is enabled in this
analysis. This is also the case when performing magic drops.
Criteria tab
Smartpad: Criteria
The Criteria tab in the Smartpad is used to gain an overview of existing criteria and add or edit new
advanced criteria. When no object is highlighted only global criteria are shown and when highlighting
an object global and local criteria and comparisons for that specific object are shown. If dynamic
period criteria are applied to the object 'Dynamic date origin' may also be set in the Smartpad Criteria
tab. For more information on how to apply criteria, see the section 'Criteria editor'.
Criteria editor
Menu: Tools | Criteria editor Keyboard: CTRL+R
The Criteria editor is the main dialog to work with criteria. It may be used to add and edit global or
local criteria. To add or edit global criteria open the criteria editor either by selecting its menu item in
the Tools menu, by clicking the small down-arrow button next to the Criteria bar magnifying glass in
the Toolbar or by clicking an existing global criterion or adding a new one in the Criteria tab in the
Smartpad.
Either of the above opens a dialog with a list of existing criteria or a view where criteria may be
selected. In the list of existing criteria a criterion may be edited by clicking a dimension member or it
may be deleted by clicking the garbage can. In the bottom of the dialog three icons provide options to
store criteria for later use (they appear in the Stored criteria list to the left - see subsection below), to
copy criteria to another editor (e.g. local criteria editor, notification editor or comparison editor) or
paste copied criteria into this editor.
Note: Criteria in the list of selected criteria are intersected e.g. if a criterion is Period = 2009 and
another is Period >= 2008 the analysis shows empty results for all objects, since these two criteria
cannot be fulfilled at the same time. Instead use the 'equal to' criteria type and select all the periods
manually.
Criteria 93
Adding criteria
To add criteria click the 'Add criteria' text in the bottom of the dialog. This changes the list of criteria
to a list of dimensions and hierarchies for the database used in the analysis. Selecting any dimension
or hierarchy changes the dialog to display a list of criteria types and a list of dimension members.
When working with advanced criteria it is a user responsibility to make sensible criteria. For instance a
criteria could be „Month must be less than 06?, which would make sense. Another example is „Product
must be less than shirts?, which would make no sense.
When criteria type has been selected, one or more dimension members may be ticked off in the list
depending on the selected criteria type. All selected members are shown above the member list and if
clicked the member name is highlighted in the list. For the types 'between...' and 'not between...' a
range must be provided as from and to members, which may be included in the range by checking the
'Include' boxes. The dimension member list may also be shown according to the members available in
the analysis e.g. if criteria have been applied such that data is only shown for Period members in 2007
it is not necessary to show all Period members from 2006-2009. By checking the 'Auto-filter member
list' box only members included in the data set are shown. If members are selected, but should be
filtered by the auto-filter they are still shown but highlighted with a grey background and parentheses
around their names.
In hierarchies selected members may not be easy to spot. Therefore an option, 'Show selected', is
available. If the link is clicked only selected members and their upper levels are shown. 'Show all'
returns to the full view of all members. If a dimension level contains more than 50 members only the
first 50 are shown. To see the rest click the 'Show all xx members' in the bottom of the list.
Adding criteria on member properties
If a dimension includes member properties, criteria may also be applied to these. When 'Add criteria'
has been selected, the check box 'Add criteria on a member property' must be checked. Dimensions
with member properties are then shown and a member property must be selected. The criteria are
entered in the text field according to the following operators and separated by comma:
Operator Description
< Less than
> More than
Different from
= Equal to
! Negation
So if the criteria, first 6 months in 2009, must be applied it may be written; =2009,